show access-lists

To display access control lists (ACLs) configured on the switch, use the show access-lists command in privileged EXEC mode.

show access-lists [name | number | hardware counters | ipc ]

 
Syntax Description

name

(Optional) Name of the ACL.

number

(Optional) ACL number. The range is 1 to 2699.

hardware counters

(Optional) Displays global hardware ACL statistics for switched and routed packets.

ipc

(Optional) Displays Interprocess Communication (IPC) protocol access-list configuration download information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The switch supports only IP standard and extended access lists. The allowed numbers are only 1 to 199 and 1300 to 2699.

This command also displays the MAC ACLs that are configured.


Note Though visible in the command-line help strings, the rate-limit keywords are not supported.


Examples

This is an example of output from the show access-lists command:

Switch# show access-lists
Standard IP access list 1
10 permit 1.1.1.1
20 permit 2.2.2.2
30 permit any
40 permit 0.255.255.255, wildcard bits 12.0.0.0
Standard IP access list videowizard_1-1-1-1
10 permit 1.1.1.1
Standard IP access list videowizard_10-10-10-10
10 permit 10.10.10.10
Extended IP access list 121
10 permit ahp host 10.10.10.10 host 20.20.10.10 precedence routine
Extended IP access list CMP-NAT-ACL
Dynamic Cluster-HSRP deny ip any any
10 deny ip any host 19.19.11.11
20 deny ip any host 10.11.12.13
Dynamic Cluster-NAT permit ip any any
10 permit ip host 10.99.100.128 any
20 permit ip host 10.46.22.128 any
30 permit ip host 10.45.101.64 any
40 permit ip host 10.45.20.64 any
50 permit ip host 10.213.43.128 any
60 permit ip host 10.91.28.64 any
70 permit ip host 10.99.75.128 any
80 permit ip host 10.38.49.0 any
 

This is an example of output from the show access-lists hardware counters command:

Switch# show access-lists hardware counters
L2 ACL INPUT Statistics
Drop: All frame count: 855
Drop: All bytes count: 94143
Drop And Log: All frame count: 0
Drop And Log: All bytes count: 0
Bridge Only: All frame count: 0
Bridge Only: All bytes count: 0
Bridge Only And Log: All frame count: 0
Bridge Only And Log: All bytes count: 0
Forwarding To CPU: All frame count: 0
Forwarding To CPU: All bytes count: 0
Forwarded: All frame count: 2121
Forwarded: All bytes count: 180762
Forwarded And Log: All frame count: 0
Forwarded And Log: All bytes count: 0
 
L3 ACL INPUT Statistics
Drop: All frame count: 0
Drop: All bytes count: 0
Drop And Log: All frame count: 0
Drop And Log: All bytes count: 0
Bridge Only: All frame count: 0
Bridge Only: All bytes count: 0
Bridge Only And Log: All frame count: 0
Bridge Only And Log: All bytes count: 0
Forwarding To CPU: All frame count: 0
Forwarding To CPU: All bytes count: 0
Forwarded: All frame count: 13586
Forwarded: All bytes count: 1236182
Forwarded And Log: All frame count: 0
Forwarded And Log: All bytes count: 0
 
L2 ACL OUTPUT Statistics
Drop: All frame count: 0
Drop: All bytes count: 0
Drop And Log: All frame count: 0
Drop And Log: All bytes count: 0
Bridge Only: All frame count: 0
Bridge Only: All bytes count: 0
Bridge Only And Log: All frame count: 0
Bridge Only And Log: All bytes count: 0
Forwarding To CPU: All frame count: 0
Forwarding To CPU: All bytes count: 0
Forwarded: All frame count: 232983
Forwarded: All bytes count: 16825661
Forwarded And Log: All frame count: 0
Forwarded And Log: All bytes count: 0
 
L3 ACL OUTPUT Statistics
Drop: All frame count: 0
Drop: All bytes count: 0
Drop And Log: All frame count: 0
Drop And Log: All bytes count: 0
Bridge Only: All frame count: 0
Bridge Only: All bytes count: 0
Bridge Only And Log: All frame count: 0
Bridge Only And Log: All bytes count: 0
Forwarding To CPU: All frame count: 0
Forwarding To CPU: All bytes count: 0
Forwarded: All frame count: 514434
Forwarded: All bytes count: 39048748
Forwarded And Log: All frame count: 0
Forwarded And Log: All bytes count: 0

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

access-list

Configures a standard or extended numbered access list on the switch. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

ip access list

Configures a named IP access list on the switch. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

mac access-list extended

Configures a named or numbered MAC access list on the switch.

show alarm description port

To display the alarm numbers with the text description, use the show alarm description port command in EXEC mode.

show alarm description port

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows output from the show alarm description port command. It shows the alarm IDs and their respective alarm descriptions.

Switch> show alarm description port
1 Link Fault
2 Port Not Forwarding
3 Port Not Operating
4 FCS Error Rate exceeds threshold

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

alarm profile (global configuration)

Creates an alarm profile containing one or more alarm IDs and alarm options.

show alarm profile

Displays all alarm profiles or a specified alarm profile and lists the interfaces to which each profile is attached.

show alarm profile

To display all alarm profiles configured in the system or the specified profile and the interfaces to which each profile is attached, use the show alarm profile command in EXEC mode.

show alarm profile [ name ]

 
Syntax Description

name

(Optional) Displays only the profile with the specified name.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If you do not enter a profile name, the display includes the profile information for all existing alarm profiles. This command does not display the default configuration settings.

The defaultPort profile is applied by default to all interfaces. This profile enables only the Port Not Operating (3) alarm. You can use the alarm profile defaultPort global configuration command and modify this profile to enable other alarms.

Examples

These are examples of output from the show alarm profile command.

This output displays all ports that are attached to the configured profiles:

Switch> show alarm profile GigE-UplinkPorts
Interface Gi1/2
Alarms 1,2,3,4
Syslog 1,2,3,4
Notifies 1,2,3,4
Relay-major 4
Relay-minor 1,2
 

This output displays all the configured profiles:

Switch> show alarm profile
Alarm Profile my_gig_port:
Interface Gi1/2
Alarms 1,2,3,4
Syslog 1,2,3,4
Notifies 1,2,3,4
Relay-major 4
Relay-minor 1,2
Alarm Profile my_fast_port:
Interface Fa1/1
Alarms 1,2,3,4
Syslog 1,2,3,4
Notifies 1,2,3,4
Relay-major 4
Relay-minor 1,2

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

alarm profile (global configuration)

Creates an alarm profile containing one or more alarm IDs and alarm options.

alarm profile (interface configuration)

Attaches an alarm profile to an interface.

show alarm settings

To display all environmental alarm settings on the switch, use the show alarm settings command in EXEC mode.

show alarm settings

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows output from the show alarm settings command. It shows all the switch alarm settings that are on the switch:

Switch> show alarm settings
Alarm relay mode: Positive
 
Power Supply
Alarm Enabled
Relay MAJ
Notifies Enabled
Syslog Enabled
Temperature-Primary
Alarm Enabled
Thresholds MAX: 95C MIN: -20C
Relay MAJ
Notifies Enabled
Syslog Enabled
Temperature-Secondary
Alarm Disabled
Threshold
Relay
Notifies Disabled
Syslog Disabled
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

alarm facility power-supply

Sets power supply alarm options.

alarm facility temperature

Sets temperature alarm options.

power-supply dual

Sets dual powersupply mode.

show archive status

To display the status of a new image being downloaded to a switch with the HTTP or the TFTP protocol, use the show archive status command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show archive status

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If you use the archive download-sw privileged EXEC command to download an image to a TFTP server, the output of the archive download-sw command shows the status of the download.

If you do not have a TFTP server, you can use Network Assistant or the embedded Device Manager to download the image by using HTTP. The show archive status command shows the progress of the download.

Examples

These are examples of output from the show archive status command:

Switch# show archive status
IDLE: No upgrade in progress
 
Switch# show archive status
LOADING: Upgrade in progress
 
Switch# show archive status
EXTRACT: Extracting the image
 
Switch# show archive status
VERIFY: Verifying software
 
Switch# show archive status
RELOAD: Upgrade completed. Reload pending

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

archive download-sw

Downloads a new image from a TFTP server to the switch.

show arp access-list

To display detailed information about Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) access control lists, use the show arp access-list command in EXEC mode.

show arp access-list [ acl-name ]

 
Syntax Description

acl-name

(Optional) Name of the ACL.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show arp access-list command:

Switch> show arp access-list
ARP access list rose
permit ip 10.101.1.1 0.0.0.255 mac any
permit ip 20.3.1.0 0.0.0.255 mac any

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP ACL.

deny (ARP access-list configuration)

Denies an ARP packet based on matches against the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) bindings.

ip arp inspection filter vlan

Permits ARP requests and responses from a host configured with a static IP address.

permit (ARP access-list configuration)

Permits an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings.

show authentication

To display information about authentication manager events on the switch, use the show authentication command EXEC mode.

show authentication { interface interface-id | registrations | sessions [ session-id session-id ] [ handle handle ] [ interface interface-id ] [ mac mac ] [ method method ] | statistics [ summary ]}

 
Syntax Description

interface interface-id

Displays all of the authentication manager details for the specified interface.

registrations

Displays authentication manager registrations

sessions

Displays details of the current authentication manager sessions (for example, client devices). If you do not enter any optional specifiers, all current active sessions are displayed. You can enter the specifiers singly or in combination to display a specific session (or group of sessions).

session-id session-id

(Optional) Specifies an authentication manager session.

handle handle

(Optional) Specifies a range from 1 to 4294967295.

mac mac

(Optional) Displays authentication manager information for a specified MAC address.

method method

(Optional) Displays all clients authorized by a specified authentication method (dot1x, mab, or webauth)

statistics

Displays authentication statistics in detail.

summary

(Optional) Displays authentication statistics summary.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Table 0-1 describes the significant fields shown in the output of the show authentication command.


Note The possible values for the status of sessions are shown in the table. For a session in terminal state, Authz Success or Authz Failed is displayed along with No methods if no method has provided a result.


 

Table 0-1 show authentication Command Output

Field
Description

Idle

The session has been initialized and no methods have run yet.

Running

A method is running for this session.

No methods

No method has provided a result for this session.

Authc Success

A method has resulted in authentication success for this session.

Authc Failed

A method has resulted in authentication fail for this session.

Authz Success

All features have been successfully applied for this session.

Authz Failed

A feature has failed to be applied for this session.

Table 0-2 lists the possible values for the state of methods. For a session in a terminal state, Authc Success, Authc Failed, or Failed over are displayed. Failed over means that an authentication method ran and then failed over to the next method, which did not provide a result. Not run appears for sessions that synchronized on standby.

 

Table 0-2 State Method Values

Method State
State Level
Description

Not run

Terminal

The method has not run for this session.

Running

Intermediate

The method is running for this session.

Failed over

Terminal

The method has failed and the next method is expected to provide a result.

Authc Success

Terminal

The method has provided a successful authentication result for the session.

Authc Failed

Terminal

The method has provided a failed authentication result for the session.

Examples

This example shows output of the show authentication registrations command:

Switch# show authentication registrations
Auth Methods registered with the Auth Manager:
Handle Priority Name
3 0 dot1x
2 1 mab
1 2 webauth
 

This example shows output of the show authentication interface interface-id command:

Switch# show authentication interface gigabitethernet1/2
Client list:
MAC Address Domain Status Handle Interface
000e.84af.59bd DATA Authz Success 0xE0000000 GigabitEthernet1//2
Available methods list:
Handle Priority Name
3 0 dot1x
Runnable methods list:
Handle Priority Name
3 0 dot1x
 

This example shows output of the show authentication sessions command:

Switch# show authentication sessions
Interface MAC Address Method Domain Status Session ID
Gi3/45 (unknown) N/A DATA Authz Failed 0908140400000007003651EC
Gi3/46 (unknown) N/A DATA Authz Success 09081404000000080057C274
 

This example shows output of the show authentication sessions command for a specified interface:

Switch# show authentication sessions int gigabitethernet 1/4
Interface: GigabitEthernet0/46 GigabitEthernet1/4
MAC Address: Unknown
IP Address: Unknown
Status: Authz Success
Domain: DATA
Oper host mode: multi-host
Oper control dir: both
Authorized By: Guest Vlan
Vlan Policy: 4094
Session timeout: N/A
Idle timeout: N/A
Common Session ID: 09081404000000080057C274
Acct Session ID: 0x0000000A
Handle: 0xCC000008
Runnable methods list:
Method State
dot1x Failed over
 

This example shows output of the show authentication sessions command for a specified MAC address:

Switch# show authentication sessions mac 000e.84af.59bd
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/4
MAC Address: 000e.84af.59bd
Status: Authz Success
Domain: DATA
Oper host mode: single-host
Authorized By: Authentication Server
Vlan Policy: 10
Handle: 0xE0000000
Runnable methods list:
Method State
dot1x Authc Success
 

This example shows output of the show authentication session method command for a specified method:

Switch# show authentication sessions method mab
No Auth Manager contexts match supplied criteria
Switch# show authentication sessions method dot1x
MAC Address Domain Status Handle Interface
000e.84af.59bd DATA Authz Success 0xE0000000 GigabitEthernet1/23

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

authentication control-direction

Configures the port mode as unidirectional or bidirectional.

authentication event

Sets the action for specific authentication events.

authentication fallback

Configures a port to use web authentication as a fallback method for clients that do not support IEEE 802.1x authentication.

authentication host-mode

Sets the authorization manager mode on a port.

authentication open

Enables or disables open access on a port.

authentication order

Sets the order of authentication methods used on a port.

authentication periodic

Enables or disables reauthentication on a port.

authentication port-control

Enables manual control of the port authorization state.

authentication priority

Adds an authentication method to the port-priority list.

authentication timer

Configures the timeout and reauthentication parameters for an 802.1x-enabled port.

show auto qos

To display the quality of service (QoS) commands entered on the interfaces on which automatic QoS (auto-QoS) is enabled, use the show auto qos command in EXEC mode.

show auto qos [ interface [ interface-id ]]


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the LAN Base image.


 
Syntax Description

interface [ interface-id ]

(Optional) Displays auto-QoS information for the specified port or for all ports. Valid interfaces include physical ports.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The show auto qos command output shows only the auto-QoS command entered on each interface. The show auto qos interface interface-id command output shows the auto-QoS command entered on a specific interface.

Use the show running-config privileged EXEC command to display the auto-QoS configuration and the user modifications.

The show auto qos command output also shows the service policy information for the Cisco IP phone.

To display information about the QoS configuration that might be affected by auto-QoS, use one of these commands:

  • show mls qos
  • show mls qos maps cos-dscp
  • show mls qos interface [ interface-id ] [ buffers | queueing ]
  • show mls qos maps [ cos-dscp | cos-input-q | cos-output-q | dscp-cos | dscp-input-q | dscp-output-q ]
  • show mls qos input-queue
  • show running-config

Examples

This is an example of output from the show auto qos command after the auto qos voip cisco-phone and the auto qos voip cisco-softphone interface configuration commands are entered:

Switch> show auto qos
 
GigabitEthernet1/1
auto qos voip cisco-softphone
 
 
GigabitEthernet1/3
auto qos voip cisco-phone
 
 
GigabitEthernet1/2
auto qos voip cisco-phone
 

This is an example of output from the show auto qos interface interface-id command when the auto qos voip cisco-phone interface configuration command is entered:

 
Switch> show auto qos interface gigabitethernet 1/1
 
GigabitEthernet1/1
auto qos voip cisco-phone
 

This is an example of output from the show running-config privileged EXEC command when the auto qos voip cisco-phone and the auto qos voip cisco-softphone interface configuration commands are entered:

Switch# show running-config
Building configuration...
...
mls qos map policed-dscp 24 26 46 to 0
mls qos map cos-dscp 0 8 16 26 32 46 48 56
mls qos srr-queue input bandwidth 90 10
mls qos srr-queue input threshold 1 8 16
mls qos srr-queue input threshold 2 34 66
mls qos srr-queue input buffers 67 33
mls qos srr-queue input cos-map queue 1 threshold 2 1
mls qos srr-queue input cos-map queue 1 threshold 3 0
mls qos srr-queue input cos-map queue 2 threshold 1 2
mls qos srr-queue input cos-map queue 2 threshold 2 4 6 7
mls qos srr-queue input cos-map queue 2 threshold 3 3 5
mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue 1 threshold 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue 1 threshold 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue 1 threshold 3 32
mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue 2 threshold 1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue 2 threshold 2 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 48
mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue 2 threshold 2 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue 2 threshold 2 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue 2 threshold 3 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map queue 2 threshold 3 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
mls qos srr-queue output cos-map queue 1 threshold 3 5
mls qos srr-queue output cos-map queue 2 threshold 3 3 6 7
mls qos srr-queue output cos-map queue 3 threshold 3 2 4
mls qos srr-queue output cos-map queue 4 threshold 2 1
mls qos srr-queue output cos-map queue 4 threshold 3 0
mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map queue 1 threshold 3 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map queue 2 threshold 3 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map queue 2 threshold 3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55
mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map queue 2 threshold 3 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map queue 3 threshold 3 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map queue 3 threshold 3 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map queue 4 threshold 1 8
mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map queue 4 threshold 2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map queue 4 threshold 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
mls qos queue-set output 1 threshold 1 100 100 100 100
mls qos queue-set output 1 threshold 2 75 75 75 250
mls qos queue-set output 1 threshold 3 75 150 100 300
mls qos queue-set output 1 threshold 4 50 100 75 400
mls qos queue-set output 2 threshold 1 100 100 100 100
mls qos queue-set output 2 threshold 2 35 35 35 35
mls qos queue-set output 2 threshold 3 55 82 100 182
mls qos queue-set output 2 threshold 4 90 250 100 400
mls qos queue-set output 1 buffers 15 20 20 45
mls qos queue-set output 2 buffers 24 20 26 30
mls qos
...
!
class-map match-all AutoQoS-VoIP-RTP-Trust
match ip dscp ef
class-map match-all AutoQoS-VoIP-Control-Trust
match ip dscp cs3 af31
!
policy-map AutoQoS-Police-SoftPhone
class AutoQoS-VoIP-RTP-Trust
set dscp ef
police 320000 8000 exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit
class AutoQoS-VoIP-Control-Trust
set dscp cs3
police 32000 8000 exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit
!
policy-map AutoQoS-Police-CiscoPhone
class AutoQoS-VoIP-RTP-Trust
set dscp ef
police 320000 8000 exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit
class AutoQoS-VoIP-Control-Trust
set dscp cs3
police 32000 8000 exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit
...
!
interface FastEthernet1/1
switchport mode access
switchport port-security maximum 1999
speed 100
duplex full
srr-queue bandwidth share 10 10 60 20
priority-queue out
mls qos trust device cisco-phone
mls qos trust cos
auto qos voip cisco-phone
!
 
interface GigabitEthernet1/1
switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q
switchport trunk native vlan 2
switchport mode access
speed 10
srr-queue bandwidth share 10 10 60 20
priority-queue out
mls qos trust device cisco-phone
mls qos trust cos
auto qos voip cisco-phone
!
 
interface GigabitEthernet1/2
srr-queue bandwidth share 10 10 60 20
priority-queue out
mls qos trust device cisco-phone
mls qos trust cos
mls qos trust device cisco-phone
service-policy input AutoQoS-Police-CiscoPhone
 
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show auto qos interface interface-id command when the auto qos voip cisco-phone interface configuration command is entered:

Switch> show auto qos interface FastEthernet1/2
 
FastEthernet1/2
auto qos voip cisco-softphone
 

This is an example of output from the show auto qos command when auto-QoS is disabled on the switch:

Switch> show auto qos
AutoQoS not enabled on any interface
 

This is an example of output from the show auto qos i nterface interface-id command when auto-QoS is disabled on an interface:

Switch> show auto qos interface gigabitethernet1/1
AutoQoS is disabled

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

auto qos voip

Automatically configures QoS for VoIP within a QoS domain.

debug auto qos

Enables debugging of the auto-QoS feature.

show boot

To display the settings of the boot environment variables, use the show boot command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show boot

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show boot command. Table 0-3 describes each field in the display.

Switch# show boot
BOOT path-list : flash:/ie2k-universalk9-mz.150-0.27.EY/ie2k-universalk9-mz
.150-0.27.EY.bin
Config file : flash:/config.text
Private Config file : flash:/private-config.text
Enable Break : yes
Manual Boot : no
HELPER path-list :
Auto upgrade : yes
Auto upgrade path :
Boot optimization : enabled
NVRAM/Config file
buffer size: 65536
Timeout for Config
Download: 0 seconds
Config Download
via DHCP: disabled (next boot: disabled)
Switch#

 

Table 0-3 show boot Field Descriptions

Field
Description

BOOT path-list

Displays a semicolon separated list of executable files to try to load and execute when automatically booting up.

If the BOOT environment variable is not set, the system attempts to load and execute the first executable image it can find by using a recursive, depth-first search through the flash file system. In a depth-first search of a directory, each encountered subdirectory is completely searched before continuing the search in the original directory.

If the BOOT variable is set but the specified images cannot be loaded, the system attempts to boot up with the first bootable file that it can find in the flash file system.

Config file

Displays the filename that Cisco IOS uses to read and write a nonvolatile copy of the system configuration.

Private Config file

Displays the filename that Cisco IOS uses to read and write a nonvolatile copy of the system configuration.

Enable Break

Displays whether a break during booting up is enabled or disabled. If it is set to yes, on, or 1, you can interrupt the automatic bootup process by pressing the Break key on the console after the flash file system is initialized.

Manual Boot

Displays whether the switch automatically or manually boots up. If it is set to no or 0, the bootloader attempts to automatically boot up the system. If it is set to anything else, you must manually boot up the switch from the bootloader mode.

Helper path-list

Displays a semicolon separated list of loadable files to dynamically load during the bootloader initialization. Helper files extend or patch the functionality of the bootloader.

Auto upgrade

Displays whether the switch is set to automatically copy its software version to an incompatible switch.

Boot optimization

Displays whether the switch is set to optimize the switch bootup time after a system crash.

NVRAM/Config file buffer size

Displays the buffer size that Cisco IOS uses to hold a copy of the configuration file in memory. The configuration file cannot be larger than the buffer size allocation.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

boot config-file

Specifies the filename that Cisco IOS uses to read and write a nonvolatile copy of the system configuration.

boot enable-break

Enables interrupting the automatic boot process.

boot manual

Enables manually booting up the switch during the next bootup cycle.

boot private-config-file

Specifies the filename that Cisco IOS uses to read and write a nonvolatile copy of the private configuration.

boot system

Specifies the Cisco IOS image to load during the next bootup cycle.

show boot buffersize

To display the buffer size for file system-simulated NVRAM, use the show boot buffersize command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show boot buffersize

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display the file system-simulated NVRAM boot buffer size.

Switch(config)# show boot buffersize
15000
Switch(config)#

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

boot buffersize

Sets file system-simulated NVRAM buffer size.

show cable-diagnostics tdr

To display the Time Domain Reflector (TDR) results, use the show cable-diagnostics tdr command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id

 
Syntax Description

interface interface-id

The interface on which TDR was run.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

For more information about TDR, see the software configuration guide for this release.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id command:

Switch# show cable-diagnostics tdr interface gigabitethernet1/2
TDR test last run on: March 01 20:15:40
Interface Speed Local pair Pair length Remote pair Pair status
--------- ----- ---------- ------------------ ----------- --------------------
Gi1/2 auto Pair A 0 +/- 2 meters N/A Open
Pair B 0 +/- 2 meters N/A Open
Pair C 0 +/- 2 meters N/A Open
Pair D 0 +/- 2 meters N/A Open
 

This is an example of output from the show cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id command:

Switch# show cable-diagnostics tdr interface fa0/1
 
TDR test last run on: March 01 01:05:40
 
Interface Speed Local pair Pair length Remote pair Pair status
--------- ----- ---------- ------------------ ----------- --------------------
Fa0/1 100M Pair A N/A Pair A Normal
Pair B N/A Pair A Normal
Pair C N/A Pair A N/A
Pair D N/A Pair A N/A
 
 

Table 0-4 lists the descriptions of the fields in the show cable-diagnostics tdr command output.

 

Table 0-4 Fields Descriptions for the show cable-diagnostics tdr Command Output

Field
Description

Interface

Interface on which TDR was run.

Speed

Speed of connection.

Local pair

Name of the pair of wires that TDR is testing on the local interface.

Pair length

Location on the cable where the problem is, with respect to your switch. TDR can only find the location in one of these cases:

  • The cable is properly connected, the link is up, and the interface speed is 1000 Mb/s.
  • The cable is open.
  • The cable has a short.

Remote pair

Name of the pair of wires to which the local pair is connected. TDR can learn about the remote pair only when the cable is properly connected and the link is up.

Pair status

The status of the pair of wires on which TDR is running:

  • Normal—The pair of wires is properly connected.
  • Not completed—The test is running and is not completed.
  • Not supported—The interface does not support TDR.
  • Open—The pair of wires is open.
  • Shorted—The pair of wires is shorted.
  • ImpedanceMis—The impedance is mismatched.
  • Short/Impedance Mismatched—The impedance mismatched or the cable is short.
  • InProgress—The diagnostic test is in progress

This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface-id command when TDR is running:

Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet1/2
gigabitethernet1/2 is up, line protocol is up (connected: TDR in Progress)
 

This is an example of output from the show cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id command when TDR is not running:

Switch# show cable-diagnostics tdr interface gigabitethernet1/2
% TDR test was never issued on Gi1/2
 

If an interface does not support TDR, this message appears:

% TDR test is not supported on switch 1

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

test cable-diagnostics tdr

Enables and runs TDR on an interface.

show cip

To display information about the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) subsystem, use the show cip command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show cip { connection { count | explicit | implicit } | faults | file { config | eds | vlan }| miscellaneous | object { assembly | dhcp instance instance | ethernet link | identity | switch { paramenter }| sync | tcp/ip { interface }}| security | session | status }

 
Syntax Description

connection

Displays the CIP connection information.

count

Displays the CIP connection count.

explicit

Displays the CIP connection explicit.

implicit

Displays the CIP connection implicit.

faults

Displays information about CIP faults.

file

Displays the information about the CIP file instances.

config

Displays the configuration file instance.

eds

Displays the EDS file instance.

vlan

Displays the VLAN file instance.

miscellaneous

Displays miscellaneous CIP system information.

object

Displays information about specific CIP objects. These objects include assembly, Ethernet link, identity, switch parameter, time sync, and TCP/IP objects.

assembly

Displays the CIP assembly link object.

dhcp instance instance

Displays the DHCP object for a specific instance; valid instances are 1 through 15.

ethernet link

Displays the CIP Ethernet object.

identity

Displays the CIP identity object.

switch parameter

Displays the switch parameters.

sync

Displays the CIP time sync object.

tcp/ip interface

Displays the TCP/IP object.

security

Displays the CIP security window status and settings.

session

Displays the active and inactive CIP sessions.

status

Displays the CIP status (enabled or disabled).

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show cip fault command:

Switch# show cip faults
Major/Minor Recoverable Faults
----------------------------------------------------
MAC address flap : Normal
CDP native vlan mismatch : Normal
Storm control event : Normal
Port security violation : Normal
Port in error-disable state: Normal
Major Unrecoverable Faults
----------------------------------------------------
POST detected HW failure : Normal
SFP in error-disable state : Normal
 

This is an example of output from the show cip security command:

Switch# show cip security
State : Enabled
Password: abc123
Window: Open
Owner IP: 172.20.140.147
Window timeout: 600 seconds
Window open tick: 17

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

cip enable

Enables CIP on a VLAN.

cip security

Sets CIP security options on the switch.

show cisp

To display CISP information for a specified interface, use the show cisp command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show cisp {[ interface interface-id ] | clients | summary }

 
Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays CISP information about the specified interface. Valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels.

clients

Displays CISP client details.

summary

Displays all CISO information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows output from the show cisp interface command:

Switch# show cisp interface fast 0
CISP not enabled on specified interface
 

This example shows output from the show cisp summary command:

Switch# show cisp summary
CISP is not running on any interface

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

cisp enable

Enables Client Information Signalling Protocol (CISP)

dot1x credentials (global configuration) profile

Configures a profile on a supplicant switch

show class-map

To display quality of service (QoS) class maps, which define the match criteria to classify traffic, use the show class-map command in EXEC mode.

show class-map [ class-map-name ]

 
Syntax Description

class-map-name

(Optional) The contents of the specified class map.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show class-map command:

Switch> show class-map
Class Map match-all videowizard_10-10-10-10 (id 2)
Match access-group name videowizard_10-10-10-10
 
Class Map match-any class-default (id 0)
Match any
Class Map match-all dscp5 (id 3)
Match ip dscp 5

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

class-map

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify.

match (class-map configuration)

Defines the match criteria to classify traffic.

show cluster

To display the cluster status and a summary of the cluster to which the switch belongs, use the show cluster command in EXEC mode. This command can be entered on the cluster command switch and cluster member switches.

show cluster

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If you enter this command on a switch that is not a cluster member, the error message Not a management cluster member appears.

On a cluster member switch, this command displays the identity of the cluster command switch, the switch member number, and the state of its connectivity with the cluster command switch.

On a cluster command switch, this command displays the cluster name and the total number of members. It also shows the cluster status and time since the status changed. If redundancy is enabled, it displays the primary and secondary command-switch information.

Examples

This is an example of output when the show cluster command is entered on the active cluster command switch:

Switch> show cluster
Command switch for cluster “cluster1
Total number of members: 7
Status: 1 members are unreachable
Time since last status change: 0 days, 0 hours, 2 minutes
Redundancy: Enabled
Standby command switch: Member 1
Standby Group: cluster1_standby
Standby Group Number: 110
Heartbeat interval: 8
Heartbeat hold-time: 80
Extended discovery hop count: 3
 

This is an example of output when the show cluster command is entered on a cluster member switch:

Switch1> show cluster
Member switch for cluster “cluster2”
Member number: 3
Management IP address: 192.192.192.192
Command switch mac address: 0000.0c07.ac14
Heartbeat interval: 8
Heartbeat hold-time: 80
 

This is an example of output when the show cluster command is entered on a cluster member switch that is configured as the standby cluster command switch:

Switch> show cluster
Member switch for cluster “hapuna”
Member number: 3 (Standby command switch)
Management IP address: 192.192.192.192
Command switch mac address: 0000.0c07.ac14
Heartbeat interval: 8
Heartbeat hold-time: 80
 

This is an example of output when the show cluster command is entered on the cluster command switch that has lost connectivity with member 1:

Switch> show cluster
Command switch for cluster “Ajang”
Total number of members: 7
Status: 1 members are unreachable
Time since last status change: 0 days, 0 hours, 5 minutes
Redundancy: Disabled
Heartbeat interval: 8
Heartbeat hold-time: 80
Extended discovery hop count: 3
 

This is an example of output when the show cluster command is entered on a cluster member switch that has lost connectivity with the cluster command switch:

Switch> show cluster
Member switch for cluster “hapuna”
Member number: <UNKNOWN>
Management IP address: 192.192.192.192
Command switch mac address: 0000.0c07.ac14
Heartbeat interval: 8
Heartbeat hold-time: 80

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

cluster enable

Enables a command-capable switch as the cluster command switch, assigns a cluster name, and optionally assigns a member number to it.

show cluster candidates

Displays a list of candidate switches.

show cluster members

Displays information about the cluster members.

show cluster candidates

To display a list of candidate switches, use the show cluster candidates command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show cluster candidates [ detail | mac-address H.H.H. ]

 
Syntax Description

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed information for all candidates.

mac-address H.H.H.

(Optional) Specifies the MAC address of the cluster candidate.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command is available only on the cluster command switch.

If the switch is not a cluster command switch, the command displays an empty line at the prompt.

The SN in the display means switch member number. If E appears in the SN column, it means that the switch is discovered through extended discovery. If E does not appear in the SN column, it means that the switch member number is the upstream neighbor of the candidate switch. The hop count is the number of devices the candidate is from the cluster command switch.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show cluster candidates command:

Switch> show cluster candidates
00d0.7961.c4c0 StLouis-2 WS-IE2000-4TC Gi1/1 2 1 Fa1/1
00d0.bbf5.e900 ldf-dist-128 WS-C3524-XL Fa1/7 1 0 Fa0/24
00e0.1e7e.be80 1900_Switch 1900 3 0 1 0 Fa0/11
00e0.1e9f.7a00 Surfers-24 WS-C2924-XL Fa1/5 1 0 Fa0/3
00e0.1e9f.8c00 Surfers-12-2 WS-C2912-XL Fa1/4 1 0 Fa0/7
00e0.1e9f.8c40 Surfers-12-1 WS-C2912-XL Fa1/1 1 0 Fa0/9
 
 

This is an example of output from the show cluster candidates command that uses the MAC address of a cluster member switch directly connected to the cluster command switch:

Switch> show cluster candidates mac-address 00d0.7961.c4c0
 
Device 'Tahiti-12' with mac address number 00d0.7961.c4c0
Device type: cisco WS-IE2000-4TC
Upstream MAC address: 00d0.796d.2f00 (Cluster Member 0)
Local port: Gi1/1 FEC number:
Upstream port: Gi2/2 FEC Number:
Hops from cluster edge: 1
Hops from command device: 1
 

This is an example of output from the show cluster candidates command that uses the MAC address of a cluster member switch three hops from the cluster edge:

Switch> show cluster candidates mac-address 0010.7bb6.1cc0
Device 'Ventura' with mac address number 0010.7bb6.1cc0
Device type: cisco WS-C2912MF-XL
Upstream MAC address: 0010.7bb6.1cd4
Local port: Fa2/1 FEC number:
Upstream port: Fa0/24 FEC Number:
Hops from cluster edge: 3
Hops from command device: -
 

This is an example of output from the show cluster candidates detail command:

Switch> show cluster candidates detail
Device 'Tahiti-12' with mac address number 00d0.7961.c4c0
Device type: cisco WS-C3512-XL
Upstream MAC address: 00d0.796d.2f00 (Cluster Member 1)
Local port: Fa0/3 FEC number:
Upstream port: Fa0/13 FEC Number:
Hops from cluster edge: 1
Hops from command device: 2
Device '1900_Switch' with mac address number 00e0.1e7e.be80
Device type: cisco 1900
Upstream MAC address: 00d0.796d.2f00 (Cluster Member 2)
Local port: 3 FEC number: 0
Upstream port: Fa0/11 FEC Number:
Hops from cluster edge: 1
Hops from command device: 2
Device 'Surfers-24' with mac address number 00e0.1e9f.7a00
Device type: cisco WS-C2924-XL
Upstream MAC address: 00d0.796d.2f00 (Cluster Member 3)
Local port: Fa0/5 FEC number:
Upstream port: Fa0/3 FEC Number:
Hops from cluster edge: 1
Hops from command device: 2

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show cluster

Displays the cluster status and a summary of the cluster to which the switch belongs.

show cluster members

Displays information about the cluster members.

show cluster members

To display information about the cluster members, use the show cluster members command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show cluster members [ n | detail ]

 
Syntax Description

n

(Optional) Number that identifies a cluster member. The range is 0 to 15.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed information for all cluster members.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command is available only on the cluster command switch.

If the cluster has no members, this command displays an empty line at the prompt.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show cluster members command. The SN in the display means switch number.

Switch# show cluster members
|---Upstream---|
SN MAC Address Name PortIf FEC Hops SN PortIf FEC State
0 0002.4b29.2e00 StLouis1 0 Up (Cmdr)
1 0030.946c.d740 tal-switch-1 Fa0/13 1 0 Gi0/1 Up
2 0002.b922.7180 nms-2820 10 0 2 1 Fa0/18 Up
3 0002.4b29.4400 SanJuan2 Gi0/1 2 1 Fa0/11 Up
4 0002.4b28.c480 GenieTest Gi0/2 2 1 Fa0/9 Up
 

This is an example of output from the show cluster members for cluster member 3:

Switch# show cluster members 3
Device 'SanJuan2' with member number 3
Device type: cisco WS-IE2000
MAC address: 0002.4b29.4400
Upstream MAC address: 0030.946c.d740 (Cluster member 1)
Local port: Gi1/1 FEC number:
Upstream port: Gi2/3 FEC Number:
Hops from command device: 2
 

This is an example of output from the show cluster members detail command:

Switch# show cluster members detail
Device 'StLouis1' with member number 0 (Command Switch)
Device type: cisco WS-ies
MAC address: 0002.4b29.2e00
Upstream MAC address:
Local port: FEC number:
Upstream port: FEC Number:
Hops from command device: 0
Device 'tal-switch-14' with member number 1
Device type: cisco WS-C3548-XL
MAC address: 0030.946c.d740
Upstream MAC address: 0002.4b29.2e00 (Cluster member 0)
Local port: Fa0/13 FEC number:
Upstream port: Gi0/1 FEC Number:
Hops from command device: 1
Device 'nms-2820' with member number 2
Device type: cisco 2820
MAC address: 0002.b922.7180
Upstream MAC address: 0030.946c.d740 (Cluster member 1)
Local port: 10 FEC number: 0
Upstream port: Fa0/18 FEC Number:
Hops from command device: 2
Device 'SanJuan2' with member number 3
Device type: cisco WS-ies
MAC address: 0002.4b29.4400
Upstream MAC address: 0030.946c.d740 (Cluster member 1)
Local port: Gi0/1 FEC number:
Upstream port: Fa0/11 FEC Number:
Hops from command device: 2
Device 'GenieTest' with member number 4
Device type: cisco SeaHorse
MAC address: 0002.4b28.c480
Upstream MAC address: 0030.946c.d740 (Cluster member 1)
Local port: Gi0/2 FEC number:
Upstream port: Fa0/9 FEC Number:
Hops from command device: 2
Device 'Palpatine' with member number 5
Device type: cisco WS-C2924M-XL
MAC address: 00b0.6404.f8c0
Upstream MAC address: 0002.4b29.2e00 (Cluster member 0)
Local port: Gi2/1 FEC number:
Upstream port: Gi0/7 FEC Number:
Hops from command device: 1

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show cluster

Displays the cluster status and a summary of the cluster to which the switch belongs.

show cluster candidates

Displays a list of candidate switches.

show controllers cpu-interface

To display the state of the CPU network interface ASIC and the send and receive statistics for packets reaching the CPU, use the show controllers cpu-interface command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show controllers cpu-interface

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This display provides information that might be useful for Cisco technical support representatives troubleshooting the switch.

Examples

This is a partial output example from the show controllers cpu-interface command:

Switch# show controllers cpu-interface
cpu-queue-frames retrieved dropped invalid hol-block
----------------- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------
rpc 4523063 0 0 0
stp 1545035 0 0 0
ipc 1903047 0 0 0
routing protocol 96145 0 0 0
L2 protocol 79596 0 0 0
remote console 0 0 0 0
sw forwarding 5756 0 0 0
host 225646 0 0 0
broadcast 46472 0 0 0
cbt-to-spt 0 0 0 0
igmp snooping 68411 0 0 0
icmp 0 0 0 0
logging 0 0 0 0
rpf-fail 0 0 0 0
queue14 0 0 0 0
cpu heartbeat 1710501 0 0 0
 
Supervisor ASIC receive-queue parameters
----------------------------------------
queue 0 maxrecevsize 5EE pakhead 1419A20 paktail 13EAED4
queue 1 maxrecevsize 5EE pakhead 15828E0 paktail 157FBFC
queue 2 maxrecevsize 5EE pakhead 1470D40 paktail 1470FE4
queue 3 maxrecevsize 5EE pakhead 19CDDD0 paktail 19D02C8
 
<output truncated>
 
Supervisor ASIC Mic Registers
------------------------------
MicDirectPollInfo 80000800
MicIndicationsReceived 00000000
MicInterruptsReceived 00000000
MicPcsInfo 0001001F
MicPlbMasterConfiguration 00000000
MicRxFifosAvailable 00000000
MicRxFifosReady 0000BFFF
MicTimeOutPeriod: FrameTOPeriod: 00000EA6 DirectTOPeriod: 00004000
 
<output truncated>
 
MicTransmitFifoInfo:
Fifo0: StartPtrs: 038C2800 ReadPtr: 038C2C38
WritePtrs: 038C2C38 Fifo_Flag: 8A800800
Weights: 001E001E
Fifo1: StartPtr: 03A9BC00 ReadPtr: 03A9BC60
WritePtrs: 03A9BC60 Fifo_Flag: 89800400
writeHeaderPtr: 03A9BC60
Fifo2: StartPtr: 038C8800 ReadPtr: 038C88E0
WritePtrs: 038C88E0 Fifo_Flag: 88800200
writeHeaderPtr: 038C88E0
Fifo3: StartPtr: 03C30400 ReadPtr: 03C30638
WritePtrs: 03C30638 Fifo_Flag: 89800400
writeHeaderPtr: 03C30638
Fifo4: StartPtr: 03AD5000 ReadPtr: 03AD50A0
WritePtrs: 03AD50A0 Fifo_Flag: 89800400
writeHeaderPtr: 03AD50A0
Fifo5: StartPtr: 03A7A600 ReadPtr: 03A7A600
WritePtrs: 03A7A600 Fifo_Flag: 88800200
writeHeaderPtr: 03A7A600
Fifo6: StartPtr: 03BF8400 ReadPtr: 03BF87F0
WritePtrs: 03BF87F0 Fifo_Flag: 89800400
 
<output truncated>

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show controllers ethernet-controller

Displays per-interface send and receive statistics read from the hardware or the interface internal registers.

show interfaces

Displays the administrative and operational status of all interfaces or a specified interface.

show controllers ethernet-controller

To display per-interface send and receive statistics read from the hardware, use the show controllers ethernet-controller command in Privileged EXEC mode without keywords.

show controllers ethernet-controller [ interface-id ] [ phy [ detail ]] [ port-asic { configuration | statistics }] [ fastethernet 0 ]

 
Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) The physical interface (including type, module, and port number).

phy

(Optional) Displays the status of the internal registers on the switch physical layer device (PHY) for the device or the interface. This display includes the operational state of the automatic medium-dependent interface crossover (auto-MDIX) feature on an interface.

detail

(Optional) Displays details about the PHY internal registers.

port-asic

(Optional) Displays information about the port ASIC internal registers.

configuration

Displays port ASIC internal register configuration.

statistics

Displays port ASIC statistics, including the Rx/Sup Queue and miscellaneous statistics.

fastethernet 0

(Optional) Displays the Fast Ethernet statistics.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC (only supported with the interface-id variable in EXEC mode)

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command without keywords provides traffic statistics, basically the RMON statistics for all interfaces or for the specified interface.

When you enter the phy or port-asic keywords, the displayed information is useful primarily for Cisco technical support representatives troubleshooting the switch.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show controllers ethernet-controller command for an interface. Table 0-5 describes the Transmit fields, and Table 0-6 describes the Receive fields.

Switch# show controllers ethernet-controller gigabitethernet1/1
Transmit GigabitEthernet1/1 Receive
0 Bytes 0 Bytes
0 Unicast frames 0 Unicast frames
0 Multicast frames 0 Multicast frames
0 Broadcast frames 0 Broadcast frames
0 Too old frames 0 Unicast bytes
0 Deferred frames 0 Multicast bytes
0 MTU exceeded frames 0 Broadcast bytes
0 1 collision frames 0 Alignment errors
0 2 collision frames 0 FCS errors
0 3 collision frames 0 Oversize frames
0 4 collision frames 0 Undersize frames
0 5 collision frames 0 Collision fragments
0 6 collision frames
0 7 collision frames 0 Minimum size frames
0 8 collision frames 0 65 to 127 byte frames
0 9 collision frames 0 128 to 255 byte frames
0 10 collision frames 0 256 to 511 byte frames
0 11 collision frames 0 512 to 1023 byte frames
0 12 collision frames 0 1024 to 1518 byte frames
0 13 collision frames 0 Overrun frames
0 14 collision frames 0 Pause frames
0 15 collision frames 0 Symbol error frames
0 Excessive collisions
0 Late collisions 0 Invalid frames, too large
0 VLAN discard frames 0 Valid frames, too large
0 Excess defer frames 0 Invalid frames, too small
0 64 byte frames 0 Valid frames, too small
0 127 byte frames
0 255 byte frames 0 Too old frames
0 511 byte frames 0 Valid oversize frames
0 1023 byte frames 0 System FCS error frames
0 1518 byte frames 0 RxPortFifoFull drop frame
0 Too large frames
0 Good (1 coll) frames
 

 

Table 0-5 Transmit Field Descriptions

Field
Description

Bytes

The total number of bytes sent on an interface.

Unicast Frames

The total number of frames sent to unicast addresses.

Multicast frames

The total number of frames sent to multicast addresses.

Broadcast frames

The total number of frames sent to broadcast addresses.

Too old frames

The number of frames dropped on the egress port because the packet aged out.

Deferred frames

The number of frames that are not sent after the time exceeds 2*maximum-packet time.

MTU exceeded frames

The number of frames that are larger than the maximum allowed frame size.

1 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after one collision occurs.

2 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after two collisions occur.

3 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after three collisions occur.

4 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after four collisions occur.

5 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after five collisions occur.

6 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after six collisions occur.

7 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after seven collisions occur.

8 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after eight collisions occur.

9 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after nine collisions occur.

10 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after ten collisions occur.

11 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after 11 collisions occur.

12 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after 12 collisions occur.

13 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after 13 collisions occur.

14 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after 14 collisions occur.

15 collision frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after 15 collisions occur.

Excessive collisions

The number of frames that could not be sent on an interface after 16 collisions occur.

Late collisions

After a frame is sent, the number of frames dropped because late collisions were detected while the frame was sent.

VLAN discard frames

The number of frames dropped on an interface because the CFI1 bit is set.

Excess defer frames

The number of frames that are not sent after the time exceeds the maximum-packet time.

64 byte frames

The total number of frames sent on an interface that are 64 bytes.

127 byte frames

The total number of frames sent on an interface that are from 65 to 127 bytes.

255 byte frames

The total number of frames sent on an interface that are from 128 to 255 bytes.

511 byte frames

The total number of frames sent on an interface that are from 256 to 511 bytes.

1023 byte frames

The total number of frames sent on an interface that are from 512 to 1023 bytes.

1518 byte frames

The total number of frames sent on an interface that are from 1024 to 1518 bytes.

Too large frames

The number of frames sent on an interface that are larger than the maximum allowed frame size.

Good (1 coll) frames

The number of frames that are successfully sent on an interface after one collision occurs. This value does not include the number of frames that are not successfully sent after one collision occurs.

1.CFI = Canonical Format Indicator

 

Table 0-6 Receive Field Descriptions

Field
Description

Bytes

The total amount of memory (in bytes) used by frames received on an interface, including the FCS2 value and the incorrectly formed frames. This value excludes the frame header bits.

Unicast frames

The total number of frames successfully received on the interface that are directed to unicast addresses.

Multicast frames

The total number of frames successfully received on the interface that are directed to multicast addresses.

Broadcast frames

The total number of frames successfully received on an interface that are directed to broadcast addresses.

Unicast bytes

The total amount of memory (in bytes) used by unicast frames received on an interface, including the FCS value and the incorrectly formed frames. This value excludes the frame header bits.

Multicast bytes

The total amount of memory (in bytes) used by multicast frames received on an interface, including the FCS value and the incorrectly formed frames. This value excludes the frame header bits.

Broadcast bytes

The total amount of memory (in bytes) used by broadcast frames received on an interface, including the FCS value and the incorrectly formed frames. This value excludes the frame header bits.

Alignment errors

The total number of frames received on an interface that have alignment errors.

FCS errors

The total number of frames received on an interface that have a valid length (in bytes) but do not have the correct FCS values.

Oversize frames

The number of frames received on an interface that are larger than the maximum allowed frame size.

Undersize frames

The number of frames received on an interface that are smaller than 64 bytes.

Collision fragments

The number of collision fragments received on an interface.

Minimum size frames

The total number of frames that are the minimum frame size.

65 to 127 byte frames

The total number of frames that are from 65 to 127 bytes.

128 to 255 byte frames

The total number of frames that are from 128 to 255 bytes.

256 to 511 byte frames

The total number of frames that are from 256 to 511 bytes.

512 to 1023 byte frames

The total number of frames that are from 512 to 1023 bytes.

1024 to 1518 byte frames

The total number of frames that are from 1024 to 1518 bytes.

Overrun frames

The total number of overrun frames received on an interface.

Pause frames

The number of pause frames received on an interface.

Symbol error frames

The number of frames received on an interface that have symbol errors.

Invalid frames, too large

The number of frames received that were larger than maximum allowed MTU3 size (including the FCS bits and excluding the frame header) and that have either an FCS error or an alignment error.

Valid frames, too large

The number of frames received on an interface that are larger than the maximum allowed frame size.

Invalid frames, too small

The number of frames received that are smaller than 64 bytes (including the FCS bits and excluding the frame header) and that have either an FCS error or an alignment error.

Valid frames, too small

The number of frames received on an interface that are smaller than 64 bytes (or 68 bytes for VLAN-tagged frames) and that have valid FCS values. The frame size includes the FCS bits but excludes the frame header bits.

Too old frames

The number of frames dropped on the ingress port because the packet aged out.

Valid oversize frames

The number of frames received on an interface that are larger than the maximum allowed frame size and have valid FCS values. The frame size includes the FCS value but does not include the VLAN tag.

System FCS error frames

The total number of frames received on an interface that have a valid length (in bytes) but that do not have the correct FCS values.

RxPortFifoFull drop frames

The total number of frames received on an interface that are dropped because the ingress queue is full.

2.FCS = frame check sequence

3.MTU = maximum transmission unit

This is an example of output from the show controllers ethernet-controller phy command for a specific interface:

Switch# show controllers ethernet-controller gigabitethernet1/1 phy
GigabitEthernet1/1 (gpn: 1, port-number: 1)
-----------------------------------------------------------
 
General SFP Information
-----------------------------------------------
Identifier : 0x03
Connector : 0x00
Transceiver : 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Encoding : 0x01
BR_Nominal : 0x0D
Vendor Name : CISCO-METHODE
Vendor Part Number : SP7041
Vendor Revision : 0x43 0x20 0x20 0x20
Vendor Serial Number : 00000MTC1017075F
-----------------------------------------------
 
Other Information
-------------------------------------------------------
Port asic num : 0
Port asic port num : 0
XCVR init completed : 0
Embedded PHY : not present
SFP presence index : 0
SFP iter cnt : 30
SFP failed oper flag : 0x0
IIC error cnt : 0
IIC error dsb cnt : 0
IIC max sts cnt : 50
Chk for link status : 1
Link Status : 1
Link Status Media : 2
 

This is an example of output from the show controllers ethernet-controller port-asic configuration command:

Switch# show controllers ethernet-controller port-asic configuration
========================================================================
Switch 1, PortASIC 0 Registers
------------------------------------------------------------------------
DeviceType : 000101BC
Reset : 00000000
PmadMicConfig : 00000001
PmadMicDiag : 00000003
SupervisorReceiveFifoSramInfo : 000007D0 000007D0 40000000
SupervisorTransmitFifoSramInfo : 000001D0 000001D0 40000000
GlobalStatus : 00000800
IndicationStatus : 00000000
IndicationStatusMask : FFFFFFFF
InterruptStatus : 00000000
InterruptStatusMask : 01FFE800
SupervisorDiag : 00000000
SupervisorFrameSizeLimit : 000007C8
SupervisorBroadcast : 000A0F01
GeneralIO : 000003F9 00000000 00000004
StackPcsInfo : FFFF1000 860329BD 5555FFFF FFFFFFFF
FF0FFF00 86020000 5555FFFF 00000000
StackRacInfo : 73001630 00000003 7F001644 00000003
24140003 FD632B00 18E418E0 FFFFFFFF
StackControlStatus : 18E418E0
stackControlStatusMask : FFFFFFFF
TransmitBufferFreeListInfo : 00000854 00000800 00000FF8 00000000
0000088A 0000085D 00000FF8 00000000
TransmitRingFifoInfo : 00000016 00000016 40000000 00000000
0000000C 0000000C 40000000 00000000
TransmitBufferInfo : 00012000 00000FFF 00000000 00000030
TransmitBufferCommonCount : 00000F7A
TransmitBufferCommonCountPeak : 0000001E
TransmitBufferCommonCommonEmpty : 000000FF
NetworkActivity : 00000000 00000000 00000000 02400000
DroppedStatistics : 00000000
FrameLengthDeltaSelect : 00000001
SneakPortFifoInfo : 00000000
MacInfo : 0EC0801C 00000001 0EC0801B 00000001
00C0001D 00000001 00C0001E 00000001
 
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show controllers ethernet-controller port-asic statistics command:

Switch# show controllers ethernet-controller port-asic statistics
===========================================================================
Switch 1, PortASIC 0 Statistics
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 RxQ-0, wt-0 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-0, wt-0 drop frames
4118966 RxQ-0, wt-1 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-0, wt-1 drop frames
0 RxQ-0, wt-2 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-0, wt-2 drop frames
 
0 RxQ-1, wt-0 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-1, wt-0 drop frames
296 RxQ-1, wt-1 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-1, wt-1 drop frames
2836036 RxQ-1, wt-2 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-1, wt-2 drop frames
 
0 RxQ-2, wt-0 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-2, wt-0 drop frames
0 RxQ-2, wt-1 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-2, wt-1 drop frames
158377 RxQ-2, wt-2 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-2, wt-2 drop frames
 
0 RxQ-3, wt-0 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-3, wt-0 drop frames
0 RxQ-3, wt-1 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-3, wt-1 drop frames
0 RxQ-3, wt-2 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-3, wt-2 drop frames
 
 
15 TxBufferFull Drop Count 0 Rx Fcs Error Frames
0 TxBufferFrameDesc BadCrc16 0 Rx Invalid Oversize Frames
0 TxBuffer Bandwidth Drop Cou 0 Rx Invalid Too Large Frames
0 TxQueue Bandwidth Drop Coun 0 Rx Invalid Too Large Frames
0 TxQueue Missed Drop Statist 0 Rx Invalid Too Small Frames
74 RxBuffer Drop DestIndex Cou 0 Rx Too Old Frames
0 SneakQueue Drop Count 0 Tx Too Old Frames
0 Learning Queue Overflow Fra 0 System Fcs Error Frames
0 Learning Cam Skip Count
 
15 Sup Queue 0 Drop Frames 0 Sup Queue 8 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 1 Drop Frames 0 Sup Queue 9 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 2 Drop Frames 0 Sup Queue 10 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 3 Drop Frames 0 Sup Queue 11 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 4 Drop Frames 0 Sup Queue 12 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 5 Drop Frames 0 Sup Queue 13 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 6 Drop Frames 0 Sup Queue 14 Drop Frames
0 Sup Queue 7 Drop Frames 0 Sup Queue 15 Drop Frames
===========================================================================
Switch 1, PortASIC 1 Statistics
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
0 RxQ-0, wt-0 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-0, wt-0 drop frames
52 RxQ-0, wt-1 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-0, wt-1 drop frames
0 RxQ-0, wt-2 enqueue frames 0 RxQ-0, wt-2 drop frames
 
<output truncated>
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show controllers cpu-interface

Displays the state of the CPU network ASIC and send and receive statistics for packets reaching the CPU.

show controllers tcam

Displays the state of registers for all ternary content addressable memory (TCAM) in the system and for TCAM interface ASICs that are CAM controllers.

show controllers tcam

To display the state of the registers for all ternary content addressable memory (TCAM) in the system and for all TCAM interface ASICs that are CAM controllers, use the show controllers tcam command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show controllers tcam [ asic [ number ]] [ detail ]

 
Syntax Description

asic

(Optional) Displays port ASIC TCAM information.

number

(Optional) Displays information for the specified port ASIC number. The range is from 0 to 15.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed TCAM register information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command provides information that might be useful for Cisco technical support representatives troubleshooting the switch.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show controllers tcam command:

Switch# show controllers tcam
------------------------------------------------------------------------
TCAM-0 Registers
------------------------------------------------------------------------
REV: 00B30103
SIZE: 00080040
ID: 00000000
CCR: 00000000_F0000020
 
RPID0: 00000000_00000000
RPID1: 00000000_00000000
RPID2: 00000000_00000000
RPID3: 00000000_00000000
 
HRR0: 00000000_E000CAFC
HRR1: 00000000_00000000
HRR2: 00000000_00000000
HRR3: 00000000_00000000
HRR4: 00000000_00000000
HRR5: 00000000_00000000
HRR6: 00000000_00000000
HRR7: 00000000_00000000
<output truncated>
 
GMR31: FF_FFFFFFFF_FFFFFFFF
GMR32: FF_FFFFFFFF_FFFFFFFF
GMR33: FF_FFFFFFFF_FFFFFFFF
 
=============================================================================
TCAM related PortASIC 1 registers
=============================================================================
LookupType: 89A1C67D_24E35F00
LastCamIndex: 0000FFE0
LocalNoMatch: 000069E0
ForwardingRamBaseAddress:
00022A00 0002FE00 00040600 0002FE00 0000D400
00000000 003FBA00 00009000 00009000 00040600
00000000 00012800 00012900

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show controllers cpu-interface

Displays the state of the CPU network ASIC and send and receive statistics for packets reaching the CPU.

show controllers ethernet-controller

Displays per-interface send and receive statistics read from the hardware or the interface internal registers.

show controllers utilization

To display bandwidth utilization on the switch or specific ports, use the show controllers utilization command in EXEC mode.

show controllers [ interface-id ] utilization

 
Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) ID of the switch interface.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show controllers utilization command:

Switch> show controllers utilization
Port Receive Utilization Transmit Utilization
Fa1/1 0 0
Fa1/2 0 0
Fa1/3 0
Fa1/4 0 0
Fa1/5 0 0
Fa1/6 0 0
Fa1/7 0 0
<output truncated>
 
<output truncated>
 
Switch Receive Bandwidth Percentage Utilization : 0
Switch Transmit Bandwidth Percentage Utilization : 0
 
Switch Fabric Percentage Utilization : 0
 

This is an example of output from the show controllers utilization command on a specific port:

Switch> show controllers gigabitethernet1/1 utilization
Receive Bandwidth Percentage Utilization : 0
Transmit Bandwidth Percentage Utilization : 0
 

 

Table 0-7 show controllers utilization Field Descriptions

Field
Description

Receive Bandwidth Percentage Utilization

Displays the received bandwidth usage of the switch, which is the sum of the received traffic on all the ports divided by the switch receive capacity.

Transmit Bandwidth Percentage Utilization

Displays the transmitted bandwidth usage of the switch, which is the sum of the transmitted traffic on all the ports divided it by the switch transmit capacity.

Fabric Percentage Utilization

Displays the average of the transmitted and received bandwidth usage of the switch.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show controllers ethernet-controller

Displays the interface internal registers.

show dot1x

To display IEEE 802.1x statistics, administrative status, and operational status for the switch or for the specified port, use the show dot1x command in EXEC mode.

show dot1x [{ all [ summary ] | interface interface-id } [ details | statistics ]]

 
Syntax Description

all summary

(Optional) Displays the IEEE 802.1x status for all ports.

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays the IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port (including type, module, and port number).

details

(Optional) Displays the IEEE 802.1x interface details.

statistics

(Optional) Displays IEEE 802.1x statistics for the specified port.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If you do not specify a port, global parameters and a summary appear. If you specify a port, details for that port appear.

If the port control is configured as unidirectional or bidirectional control and this setting conflicts with the switch configuration, the show dot1x { all | interface interface-id } privileged EXEC command output has this information:

ControlDirection = In (Inactive)
 

Examples

This is an example of output from the show dot1x EXEC command:

Switch> show dot1x
Sysauthcontrol Enabled
Dot1x Protocol Version 2
Critical Recovery Delay 100
Critical EAPOL Disabled
 

This is an example of output from the show dot1x all EXEC command:

Switch> show dot1x all
Sysauthcontrol Enabled
Dot1x Protocol Version 2
Critical Recovery Delay 100
Critical EAPOL Disabled
 
Dot1x Info for GigabitEthernet1/1
-----------------------------------
PAE = AUTHENTICATOR
PortControl = AUTO
ControlDirection = Both
HostMode = SINGLE_HOST
Violation Mode = PROTECT
ReAuthentication = Disabled
QuietPeriod = 60
ServerTimeout = 30
SuppTimeout = 30
ReAuthPeriod = 3600 (Locally configured)
ReAuthMax = 2
MaxReq = 2
TxPeriod = 30
RateLimitPeriod = 0
 
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show dot1x all summary EXEC command:

Interface PAE Client Status
--------------------------------------------------------
Gi1/1 AUTH none UNAUTHORIZED
Gi1/2 AUTH 00a0.c9b8.0072 AUTHORIZED
Fa1/1 AUTH none UNAUTHORIZED
 

This is an example of output from the show dot1x interface interface-id EXEC command:

Switch> show dot1x interface gigabitethernet1/2
Dot1x Info for GigabitEthernet1/2
-----------------------------------
PAE = AUTHENTICATOR
PortControl = AUTO
ControlDirection = In
HostMode = SINGLE_HOST
ReAuthentication = Disabled
QuietPeriod = 60
ServerTimeout = 30
SuppTimeout = 30
ReAuthPeriod = 3600 (Locally configured)
ReAuthMax = 2
MaxReq = 2
TxPeriod = 30
RateLimitPeriod = 0
 

This is an example of output from the show dot1x interface interface-id details EXEC command:

Switch# show dot1x interface gigabitethernet1/2 details
Dot1x Info for GigabitEthernet1/2
-----------------------------------
PAE = AUTHENTICATOR
PortControl = AUTO
ControlDirection = Both
HostMode = SINGLE_HOST
ReAuthentication = Disabled
QuietPeriod = 60
ServerTimeout = 30
SuppTimeout = 30
ReAuthPeriod = 3600 (Locally configured)
ReAuthMax = 2
MaxReq = 2
TxPeriod = 30
RateLimitPeriod = 0
 
Dot1x Authenticator Client List Empty
 

This is an example of output from the show dot1x interface interface-id details commmand when a port is assigned to a guest VLAN and the host mode changes to multiple-hosts mode:

Switch# show dot1x interface gigabitethernet1/1 details
Dot1x Info for GigabitEthernet1/1
-----------------------------------
PAE = AUTHENTICATOR
PortControl = AUTO
ControlDirection = Both
HostMode = SINGLE_HOST
ReAuthentication = Enabled
QuietPeriod = 60
ServerTimeout = 30
SuppTimeout = 30
ReAuthPeriod = 3600 (Locally configured)
ReAuthMax = 2
MaxReq = 2
TxPeriod = 30
RateLimitPeriod = 0
Guest-Vlan = 182
 
Dot1x Authenticator Client List Empty
 
Port Status = AUTHORIZED
Authorized By = Guest-Vlan
Operational HostMode = MULTI_HOST
Vlan Policy = 182
 

This is an example of output from the show dot1x interface interface-id statistics command. Table 0-8 describes the fields in the display.

Switch> show dot1x interface gigabitethernet1/2 statistics
Dot1x Authenticator Port Statistics for GigabitEthernet1/2
--------------------------------------------
RxStart = 0 RxLogoff = 0 RxResp = 1 RxRespID = 1
RxInvalid = 0 RxLenErr = 0 RxTotal = 2
 
TxReq = 2 TxReqID = 132 TxTotal = 134
 
RxVersion = 2 LastRxSrcMAC = 00a0.c9b8.0072
 

 

Table 0-8 show dot1x statistics Field Descriptions

Field
Description

RxStart

Number of valid EAPOL-start frames that have been received.

RxLogoff

Number of EAPOL-logoff frames that have been received.

RxResp

Number of valid EAP-response frames (other than response/identity frames) that have been received.

RxRespID

Number of EAP-response/identity frames that have been received.

RxInvalid

Number of EAPOL frames that have been received and have an unrecognized frame type.

RxLenError

Number of EAPOL frames that have been received in which the packet body length field is invalid.

RxTotal

Number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received.

TxReq

Number of EAP-request frames (other than request/identity frames) that have been sent.

TxReqId

Number of Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)-request/identity frames that have been sent.

TxTotal

Number of Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) frames of any type that have been sent.

RxVersion

Number of received packets in the IEEE 802.1x Version 1 format.

LastRxSrcMac

Source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot1x default

Resets the IEEE 802.1x parameters to their default values.

show dtp

To display Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) information for the switch or for a specified interface, use the show dtp command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show dtp [ interface interface-id ]

 
Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays port security settings for the specified interface. Valid interfaces include physical ports (including type, module, and port number).

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show dtp command:

Switch# show dtp
Global DTP information
Sending DTP Hello packets every 30 seconds
Dynamic Trunk timeout is 300 seconds
21 interfaces using DTP
 

This is an example of output from the show dtp interface command:

Switch# show dtp interface gigabitethernet1/1
DTP information for GigabitEthernet1/1:
TOS/TAS/TNS: ACCESS/AUTO/ACCESS
TOT/TAT/TNT: NATIVE/NEGOTIATE/NATIVE
Neighbor address 1: 000943A7D081
Neighbor address 2: 000000000000
Hello timer expiration (sec/state): 1/RUNNING
Access timer expiration (sec/state): never/STOPPED
Negotiation timer expiration (sec/state): never/STOPPED
Multidrop timer expiration (sec/state): never/STOPPED
FSM state: S2:ACCESS
# times multi & trunk 0
Enabled: yes
In STP: no
 
Statistics
----------
3160 packets received (3160 good)
0 packets dropped
0 nonegotiate, 0 bad version, 0 domain mismatches, 0 bad TLVs, 0 other
6320 packets output (6320 good)
3160 native
0 output errors
0 trunk timeouts
1 link ups, last link up on Mon Mar 01 1993, 01:02:29
0 link downs

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces trunk

Displays interface trunking information.

show eap

To display Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) registration and session information for the switch or for the specified port, use the show eap command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show eap {{ registrations [ method [ name ] | transport [ name ]]} | { sessions [ credentials name [ interface interface-id ] | interface interface-id | method name | transport name ]}} [ credentials name | interface interface-id | transport name ]

 
Syntax Description

registrations

Displays EAP registration information.

method name

(Optional) Displays EAP method registration information.

transport name

(Optional) Displays EAP transport registration information.

sessions

Displays EAP session information.

credentials name

(Optional) Displays EAP method registration information.

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays the EAP information for the specified port (including type, module, and port number).

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When you use the show eap registrations privileged EXEC command with these keywords, the command output shows this information:

  • None—All the lower levels used by EAP and the registered EAP methods.
  • method name keyword—The specified method registrations.
  • transport name keyword—The specific lower-level registrations.

When you use the show eap sessions privileged EXEC command with these keywords, the command output shows this information:

  • None—All active EAP sessions.
  • credentials name keyword—The specified credentials profile.
  • interface interface-id keyword—The parameters for the specified interface.
  • method name keyword—The specified EAP method.
  • transport name keyword—The specified lower layer.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show eap registrations all privileged EXEC command:

Switch> show eap registrations
Registered EAP Methods:
Method Type Name
4 Peer MD5
 
Registered EAP Lower Layers:
Handle Type Name
2 Authenticator Dot1x-Authenticator
1 Authenticator MAB
 

This is an example of output from the show eap registrations transport privileged EXEC command:

Switch> show eap registrations transport all
Registered EAP Lower Layers:
Handle Type Name
2 Authenticator Dot1x-Authenticator
1 Authenticator MAB
 

This is an example of output from the show eap sessions privileged EXEC command:

Switch> show eap sessions
Role: Authenticator Decision: Fail
Lower layer: Dot1x-AuthenticaInterface: Gi1/1
Current method: None Method state: Uninitialised
Retransmission count: 0 (max: 2) Timer: Authenticator
ReqId Retransmit (timeout: 30s, remaining: 2s)
EAP handle: 0x5200000A Credentials profile: None
Lower layer context ID: 0x93000004 Eap profile name: None
Method context ID: 0x00000000 Peer Identity: None
Start timeout (s): 1 Retransmit timeout (s): 30 (30)
Current ID: 2 Available local methods: None
 
Role: Authenticator Decision: Fail
Lower layer: Dot1x-AuthenticaInterface: Gi1/2
Current method: None Method state: Uninitialised
Retransmission count: 0 (max: 2) Timer: Authenticator
ReqId Retransmit (timeout: 30s, remaining: 2s)
EAP handle: 0xA800000B Credentials profile: None
Lower layer context ID: 0x0D000005 Eap profile name: None
Method context ID: 0x00000000 Peer Identity: None
Start timeout (s): 1 Retransmit timeout (s): 30 (30)
Current ID: 2 Available local methods: None
 
<Output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show eap sessions interface interface-id privileged EXEC command:

Switch# show eap sessions interface gigabitethernet1/1
Role: Authenticator Decision: Fail
Lower layer: Dot1x-AuthenticaInterface: Gi1/1
Current method: None Method state: Uninitialised
Retransmission count: 1 (max: 2) Timer: Authenticator
ReqId Retransmit (timeout: 30s, remaining: 13s)
EAP handle: 0x5200000A Credentials profile: None
Lower layer context ID: 0x93000004 Eap profile name: None
Method context ID: 0x00000000 Peer Identity: None
Start timeout (s): 1 Retransmit timeout (s): 30 (30)
Current ID: 2 Available local methods: None
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear eap sessions

Clears EAP session information for the switch or for the specified port.

show env

To show switch environment information, use the show env command in EXEC mode.

show env { all | power | temperature [ status ]}

 
Syntax Description

all

Displays both fan and temperature environmental status.

power

Displays the switch power status.

temperature

Displays the switch temperature status.

status

(Optional) Displays the switch internal temperature.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The command output shows the green and yellow states as OK and the red state as FAULTY.

If you enter the show env all command on this switch, the command output is the same as the show env temperature status command output.

For more information about the threshold levels, see the software configuration guide for this release.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show env all command:

Switch> show env all
TEMPERATURE is OK
Temperature Value: 48 Degree Celsius
POWER SUPPLY A is DC OK
POWER SUPPLY B is DC OK
 

 

This is an example of output from the show env power command.

Switch> show env power
Power supply A is DC OK
Power supply B is DC FAULTY
 

This is an example of output from the show env temperature command.

Switch> show env temperature
Temperature is OK
 

This is an example of output from the show env temperature status command.

Switch> show env temperature status
Temperature Value: 48 Degree Celsius
 

show env alarm-contact

To show the alarm contact information, use the show env alarm contact command in EXEC mode.

show env alarm contact

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows the output of the show env alarm-contact command:

Switch# show env alarm-contact
ALARM CONTACT 1
Status: not asserted
Description: line
Severity: minor
Trigger: closed
ALARM CONTACT 2
Status: not asserted
Description: external alarm contact 2
Severity: minor
Trigger: closed
Switch#

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

alarm contact

Configures the system alarm contact settings.

 

show errdisable detect

To display error-disabled detection status, use the show errdisable detect command in EXEC mode.

show errdisable detect

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

A displayed gbic-invalid error reason refers to an invalid small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show errdisable detect command:

Switch> show errdisable detect
ErrDisable Reason Detection Mode
----------------- --------- ----
arp-inspection Enabled port
bpduguard Enabled vlan
channel-misconfig Enabled port
community-limit Enabled port
dhcp-rate-limit Enabled port
dtp-flap Enabled port
gbic-invalid Enabled port
inline-power Enabled port
invalid-policy Enabled port
l2ptguard Enabled port
link-flap Enabled port
loopback Enabled port
lsgroup Enabled port
pagp-flap Enabled port
psecure-violation Enabled port/vlan
security-violatio Enabled port
sfp-config-mismat Enabled port
storm-control Enabled port
udld Enabled port
vmps Enabled port

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

errdisable detect cause

Enables error-disabled detection for a specific cause or all causes.

show errdisable flap-values

Displays error condition recognition information.

show errdisable recovery

Displays error-disabled recovery timer information.

show interfaces status

Displays interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.

show errdisable flap-values

To display conditions that cause an error to be recognized for a cause, use the show errdisable flap-values command in EXEC mode.

show errdisable flap-values

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The Flaps column in the command display shows how many changes to the state within the specified time interval will cause an error to be detected and a port to be disabled. For example, the display shows that an error will be assumed and the port shut down if three Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP)-state (port mode access/trunk) or Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) flap changes occur during a 30-second interval, or if 5 link-state (link up/down) changes occur during a 10-second interval.

ErrDisable Reason Flaps Time (sec)
----------------- ------ ----------
pagp-flap 3 30
dtp-flap 3 30
link-flap 5 10
 

Examples

This is an example of output from the show errdisable flap-values command:

Switch> show errdisable flap-values
ErrDisable Reason Flaps Time (sec)
----------------- ------ ----------
pagp-flap 3 30
dtp-flap 3 30
link-flap 5 10

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

errdisable detect cause

Enables error-disabled detection for a specific cause or all causes.

show errdisable detect

Displays error-disabled detection status.

show errdisable recovery

Displays error-disabled recovery timer information.

show interfaces status

Displays interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.

show errdisable recovery

To display the error-disabled recovery timer information, use the show errdisable recovery command in EXEC mode.

show errdisable recovery

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

A gbic-invalid error-disable reason shown in the command output refers to an invalid small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module interface.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show errdisable recovery command:

Switch> show errdisable recovery
ErrDisable Reason Timer Status
----------------- --------------
udld Disabled
bpduguard Disabled
security-violatio Disabled
channel-misconfig Disabled
vmps Disabled
pagp-flap Disabled
dtp-flap Disabled
link-flap Enabled
l2ptguard Disabled
psecure-violation Disabled
gbic-invalid Disabled
dhcp-rate-limit Disabled
unicast-flood Disabled
storm-control Disabled
arp-inspection Disabled
loopback Disabled
 
Timer interval:300 seconds
 
Interfaces that will be enabled at the next timeout:
 
Interface Errdisable reason Time left(sec)
--------- ----------------- --------------
Gi1/2 link-flap 279
 

Note Though visible in the output, the unicast-flood field is not valid.


 
Related Commands

Command
Description

errdisable recovery

Configures the recover mechanism variables.

show errdisable detect

Displays error-disabled detection status.

show errdisable flap-values

Displays error condition recognition information.

show interfaces status

Displays interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.

show etherchannel

To display EtherChannel information for a channel, use the show etherchannel command in EXEC mode.

show etherchannel [ channel-group-number { detail | port | port-channel | protocol | summary }] { detail | load-balance | port | port-channel | protocol | summary }

 
Syntax Description

channel-group - number

(Optional) Number of the channel group. The range is 1 to 6.

detail

Displays detailed EtherChannel information.

load-balance

Displays the load-balance or frame-distribution scheme among ports in the port channel.

port

Displays EtherChannel port information.

port-channel

Displays port-channel information.

protocol

Displays the protocol that is being used in the EtherChannel.

summary

Displays a one-line summary per channel-group.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If you do not specify a channel-group-number value, all channel groups are displayed.

In the output, the Passive port list field is displayed only for Layer 3 port channels. This field means that the physical port, which is still not up, is configured to be in the channel group (and indirectly is in the only port channel in the channel group).

Examples

This is an example of output from the show etherchannel 1 detail command:

Switch> show etherchannel 1 detail
Group state = L2
Ports: 2 Maxports = 16
Port-channels: 1 Max Port-channels = 16
Protocol: LACP
Ports in the group:
-------------------
Port: Gi1/1
------------
 
Port state = Up Mstr In-Bndl
Channel group = 1 Mode = Active Gcchange = -
Port-channel = Po1 GC = - Pseudo port-channel = Po1
Port index = 0 Load = 0x00 Protocol = LACP
 
Flags: S - Device is sending Slow LACPDUs F - Device is sending fast LACPDU
A - Device is in active mode. P - Device is in passive mode.
 
Local information:
LACP port Admin Oper Port Port
Port Flags State Priority Key Key Number State
Gi1/1 SA bndl 32768 0x0 0x1 0x0 0x3D
 
Age of the port in the current state: 01d:20h:06m:04s
Port-channels in the group:
----------------------
 
Port-channel: Po1 (Primary Aggregator)
------------
 
Age of the Port-channel = 01d:20h:20m:26s
Logical slot/port = 10/1 Number of ports = 2
HotStandBy port = null
Port state = Port-channel Ag-Inuse
Protocol = LACP
 
Ports in the Port-channel:
 
Index Load Port EC state No of bits
------+------+------+------------------+-----------
0 00 Gi1/1 Active 0
0 00 Gi1/2 Active 0
 
Time since last port bundled: 01d:20h:20m:20s Gi1/2
 

This is an example of output from the show etherchannel 1 summary command:

Switch> show etherchannel 1 summary
Flags: D - down P - in port-channel
I - stand-alone s - suspended
H - Hot-standby (LACP only)
R - Layer3 S - Layer2
u - unsuitable for bundling
U - in use f - failed to allocate aggregator
d - default port
 
Number of channel-groups in use: 1
Number of aggregators: 1
 
Group Port-channel Protocol Ports
------+-------------+-----------+----------------------------------------
1 Po1(SU) LACP Gi1/1(P) Gi1/2(P)
 

This is an example of output from the show etherchannel 1 port-channel command:

Switch> show etherchannel 1 port-channel
Port-channels in the group:
----------------------
Port-channel: Po1 (Primary Aggregator)
 
------------
 
Age of the Port-channel = 01d:20h:24m:50s
Logical slot/port = 10/1 Number of ports = 2
HotStandBy port = null
Port state = Port-channel Ag-Inuse
Protocol = LACP
 
Ports in the Port-channel:
 
Index Load Port EC state No of bits
------+------+------+------------------+-----------
0 00 Gi1/1 Active 0
0 00 Gi1/2 Active 0
 
Time since last port bundled: 01d:20h:24m:44s Gi1/2
 

This is an example of output from the show etherchannel protocol command:

Switch# show etherchannel protocol
Channel-group listing:
-----------------------
Group: 1
----------
Protocol: LACP
 
Group: 2
----------
Protocol: PAgP

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

channel-group

Assigns an Ethernet port to an EtherChannel group.

channel-protocol

Restricts the protocol used on a port to manage channeling.

interface port-channel

Accesses or creates the port channel.

show facility-alarm status

To display all generated alarms for the switch, use the show facility-alarm status command in EXEC mode.

show facility-alarm status [ critical | info | major | minor ]

 
Syntax Description

critical

(Optional) Displays only critical facility alarms.

info

(Optional) Displays all facility alarms.

major

(Optional) Displays major facility alarms and higher.

minor

(Optional) Displays major facility alarms and higher.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show facility-alarm status command. It displays alarm information for the switch.

Switch# show facility-alarm status
 
Source Severity Description Relay Time
toyota_S16_sps1 MAJOR 1 Temp above max primary thresh MAJ Oct 06
Syslog Disabled
Switch> show facility-alarm status
Source Severity Description Relay Time
FastEthernet1/3 MINOR 2 Port Not Forwarding NONE Mar 01
1993 00:02:22
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

alarm facility power-supply

Sets power supply alarm options.

alarm facility temperature

Sets temperature alarm options.

alarm profile (global configuration)

Creates alarm profiles with alarm IDs and alarm options to be attached to interfaces.

show fallback profile

To display the fallback profiles that are configured on a switch, use the show fallback profile command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show fallback profile

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the show fallback profile privileged EXEC command to display profiles that are configured on the switch.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show fallback profile command:

switch# show fallback profile
Profile Name: dot1x-www
------------------------------------
Description : NONE
IP Admission Rule : webauth-fallback
IP Access-Group IN: default-policy
Profile Name: dot1x-www-lpip
------------------------------------
Description : NONE
IP Admission Rule : web-lpip
IP Access-Group IN: default-policy
Profile Name: profile1
------------------------------------
Description : NONE
IP Admission Rule : NONE
IP Access-Group IN: NONE

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

dot1x fallback profile

Configures a port to use web authentication as a fallback method for clients that do not support IEEE 802.1x authentication.

fallback profile profile

Creates a web authentication fallback profile.

ip admission rule

Enables web authentication on a switch port

ip admission name proxy http

Enables web authentication globally on a switch

show dot1x [ interface interface-id ]

Displays IEEE 802.1x status for the specified port.

show fcs-threshold

To display the frame check sequence (FCS) bit error-rate settings on the switch interfaces, use the show fcs-threshold command in EXEC mode.

show fcs-threshold

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The Ethernet standard calls for a maximum bit error rate of 10-8. In the switch, the configurable bit error-rate range is from 10-6 to 10-11. The bit error-rate input to the switch is a positive exponent. The output displays the positive exponent; an output of 9 means that the bit error-rate is 10-9.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show fcs-threshold command. It shows the output when all ports are set to the default FCS threshold.

Switch# show fcs-threshold
Port FCS Threshold
Fa1/1 8
Fa1/2 8
Fa1/3 8
Fa1/4 8
Fa2/1 8
Fa2/2 8
Fa2/3 8
Fa2/4 8
Fa2/5 8
Fa2/6 8
Fa2/7 8
Fa2/8 8
Fa3/1 8
Fa3/2 8
Fa3/3 8
Fa3/4 8
Fa3/5 8
Fa3/6 8
Fa3/7 8
Fa3/8 8
Gi1/1 8
Gi1/2 8

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

fcs-threshold

Sets the FCS threshold on an interface.

show flowcontrol

To display the flow control status and statistics, use the show flowcontrol command in EXEC mode.

show flowcontrol [ interface interface-id | module number ]

 
Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays the flow control status and statistics for a specific interface.

module number

(Optional) Displays the flow control status and statistics for all interfaces on the switch. Module number is 1. This option is not available if you have entered a specific interface ID.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display the flow control status and statistics on the switch or for a specific interface.

Use the show flowcontrol command to display information about all the switch interfaces. The output from the show flowcontrol command is the same as the output from the show flowcontrol module number command.

Use the show flowcontrol interface interface-id command to display information about a specific interface.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show flowcontrol command.

Switch> show flowcontrol
Port Send FlowControl Receive FlowControl RxPause TxPause
admin oper admin oper
--------- -------- -------- -------- -------- ------- -------
Gi1/1 Unsupp. Unsupp. off off 0 0
Gi1/2 desired off off off 0 0
Gi1/3 desired off off off 0 0
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show flowcontrol interface interface-id command:

Switch> show flowcontrol interface gigabitethernet1/2
Port Send FlowControl Receive FlowControl RxPause TxPause
admin oper admin oper
--------- -------- -------- -------- -------- ------- -------
Gi1/2 desired off off off 0 0

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

flowcontrol

Sets the receive flow-control state for an interface.

show interfaces

To display the administrative and operational status of all interfaces or a specified interface, use the show interfaces command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show interfaces [ interface-id | vlan vlan-id ] [ accounting | capabilities [ module number ] | counters | description | etherchannel | flowcontrol | rep | pruning | stats | status [ err-disabled ] | [ backup | module number ] | transceiver | properties | detail [ module number ] | trunk ]

 
Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) Valid interfaces include physical ports (including type, module, and port number) and port channels. The port-channel range is 1 to 6.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies VLAN identification. The range is 1 to 4094.

accounting

(Optional) Displays accounting information on the interface, including active protocols and input and output packets and octets.

Note The display shows only packets processed in software; hardware-switched packets do not appear.

capabilities

(Optional) Displays the capabilities of all interfaces or the specified interface, including the features and options that you can configure on the interface. Though visible in the command line help, this option is not available for VLAN IDs.

module number

(Optional) Displays capabilities or transceiver characteristics (depending on preceding keyword) of all interfaces on the switch. The only valid module number is 1. This option is not available if you enter a specific interface ID.

counters

(Optional) Displays the show interfaces counters information.

description

(Optional) Displays the administrative status and description set for an interface.

etherchannel

(Optional) Displays interface EtherChannel information.

flowcontrol

(Optional) Displays interface flow control information

pruning

(Optional) Displays interface trunk VTP pruning information.

rep

(Optional) Displays the show interfaces rep information.

stats

(Optional) Displays the input and output packets by switching path for the interface.

status

(Optional) Displays the status of the interface. A status of unsupported in the Type field means that a non-Cisco small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module is inserted in the module slot.

err-disabled

(Optional) Displays interfaces in error-disabled state.

backup

(Optional) Displays Flex Link backup interface configuration and status for the specified interface or all interfaces on the switch.

transceiver detail | properties

(Optional) Displays the physical properties of a CWDM or DWDM small form-factor (SFP) module interface. The keywords have these meanings:

  • detail — (Optional) Displays calibration properties, including high and low numbers and any alarm information.
  • properties —( Optional) Displays speed and duplex settings on an interface.

trunk

Displays interface trunk information. If you do not specify an interface, only information for active trunking ports appears.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The show interfaces capabilities command with different keywords has these results:

  • Use the show interfaces capabilities module 1 to display the capabilities of all interfaces on the switch. Entering any other number is invalid.
  • Use the show interfaces interface-id capabilities to display the capabilities of the specified interface.
  • Use the show interfaces capabilities (with no module number or interface ID) to display the capabilities of all interfaces on the switch.

Note Though visible in the command-line help strings, the crb, fair-queue, irb, mac-accounting, precedence, random-detect, rate-limit, and shape keywords are not supported.


Examples

This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface-id command for an interface:

 
Switch# show interface GigabitEthernet1/2
GigabitEthernet1/2 is up, line protocol is up (connected)
Hardware is Gigabit Ethernet, address is 001e.1300.4882 (bia 001e.1300.4882)
MTU 1500 bytes, BW 100000 Kbit, DLY 100 usec,
reliability 255/255, txload 1/255, rxload 1/255
Encapsulation ARPA, loopback not set
Keepalive not set
Full-duplex, 100Mb/s, link type is auto, media type is 10/100/1000BaseTX
input flow-control is off, output flow-control is unsupported
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00
Last input 00:00:01, output 00:00:00, output hang never
Last clearing of ''show interface'' counters never
Input queue: 0/75/0/0 (size/max/drops/flushes); Total output drops: 0
Queueing strategy: fifo
Output queue: 0/40 (size/max)
5 minute input rate 2000 bits/sec, 4 packets/sec
5 minute output rate 17000 bits/sec, 27 packets/sec
553226 packets input, 39772509 bytes, 0 no buffer
Received 530934 broadcasts (529980 multicasts)
0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles
0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored
0 watchdog, 529980 multicast, 0 pause input
0 input packets with dribble condition detected
4031941 packets output, 317450903 bytes, 0 underruns
0 output errors, 0 collisions, 1 interface resets
0 babbles, 0 late collision, 0 deferred
0 lost carrier, 0 no carrier, 0 PAUSE output
0 output buffer failures, 0 output buffers swapped out
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces accounting command.

Switch# show interfaces accounting
Vlan1
Protocol Pkts In Chars In Pkts Out Chars Out
IP 1094395 131900022 559555 84077157
Spanning Tree 283896 17033760 42 2520
ARP 63738 3825680 231 13860
Interface Vlan2 is disabled
Vlan7
Protocol Pkts In Chars In Pkts Out Chars Out
No traffic sent or received on this interface.
Vlan31
Protocol Pkts In Chars In Pkts Out Chars Out
No traffic sent or received on this interface.
 
GigabitEthernet1/1
Protocol Pkts In Chars In Pkts Out Chars Out
No traffic sent or received on this interface.
GigabitEthernet1/2
Protocol Pkts In Chars In Pkts Out Chars Out
No traffic sent or received on this interface.
 
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces capabilities interface-id command for an interface.

 
Switch# show interfaces GigabitEthernet1/2 capabilities
GigabitEthernet1/2
Model: IE-3000-4TC
Type: Not Present
Speed: 10,100,1000,auto
Duplex: half,full,auto
Trunk encap. type: 802.1Q
Trunk mode: on,off,desirable,nonegotiate
Channel: yes
Broadcast suppression: percentage(0-100)
Flowcontrol: rx-(off,on,desired),tx-(none)
Fast Start: yes
QoS scheduling: rx-(not configurable on per port basis),
tx-(4q3t) (3t: Two configurable values and one fixed.)
CoS rewrite: yes
ToS rewrite: yes
UDLD: yes
Inline power: no
SPAN: source/destination
PortSecure: yes
Dot1x: yes
Multiple Media Types: rj45, sfp, auto-select
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface description command when the interface has been described as Connects to Marketing by using the description interface configuration command.

Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet1/2 description
Interface Status Protocol Description
Gi1/2 up down Connects to Marketing
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces etherchannel command when port channels are configured on the switch:

Switch# show interfaces etherchannel
----
Port-channel1:
Age of the Port-channel = 03d:20h:17m:29s
Logical slot/port = 10/1 Number of ports = 0
GC = 0x00000000 HotStandBy port = null
Port state = Port-channel Ag-Not-Inuse
 
Port-channel2:
Age of the Port-channel = 03d:20h:17m:29s
Logical slot/port = 10/2 Number of ports = 0
GC = 0x00000000 HotStandBy port = null
Port state = Port-channel Ag-Not-Inuse
 
Port-channel3:
Age of the Port-channel = 03d:20h:17m:29s
Logical slot/port = 10/3 Number of ports = 0
GC = 0x00000000 HotStandBy port = null
Port state = Port-channel Ag-Not-Inuse
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface-id pruning command when pruning is enabled in the VTP domain:

Switch# show interfaces gigibitethernet1/2 pruning
Port Vlans pruned for lack of request by neighbor
Gi1/2 3,4
 
Port Vlans traffic requested of neighbor
Gi1/2 1-3
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces stats command for a specified VLAN interface.

Switch# show interfaces vlan 1 stats
Switching path Pkts In Chars In Pkts Out Chars Out
Processor 1165354 136205310 570800 91731594
Route cache 0 0 0 0
Total 1165354 136205310 570800 91731594
 

This is an example of partial output from the show interfaces status command. It displays the status of all interfaces.

Switch# show interfaces status
Port Name Status Vlan Duplex Speed Type
Fa1/1 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
Fa1/2 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
Fa1/3 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
Fa1/4 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
Fa2/1 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
Fa2/2 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
Fa2/3 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
Fa2/4 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
Fa2/5 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
Fa2/6 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
Fa2/7 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
Fa2/8 notconnect 1 auto auto 10/100BaseTX
 
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces status err-disabled command. It displays the status of interfaces in the error-disabled state.

Switch# show interfaces status err-disabled
Port Name Status Reason
Gi1/2 err-disabled dtp-flap
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface-id pruning command:

Switch# show interfaces gigibitethernet1/2 pruning
Port Vlans pruned for lack of request by neighbor
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface-id trunk command. It displays trunking information for the port.

Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet1/1 trunk
Port Mode Encapsulation Status Native vlan
Gi1/1 auto negotiate trunking 1
 
Port Vlans allowed on trunk
Gi1/1 1-4094
 
Port Vlans allowed and active in management domain
Gi1/1 1-4
 
Port Vlans in spanning tree forwarding state and not pruned
Gi1/1 1-4
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface-id transceiver properties command:

Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet1/2 transceiver properties
Name : Gi1/2
Administrative Speed: auto
Operational Speed: auto
Administrative Duplex: auto
Operational Duplex: auto
Administrative Auto-MDIX: off
Operational Auto-MDIX: off
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces interface-id transceiver detail command:

Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet1/3 transceiver detail
ITU Channel not available (Wavelength not available),
Transceiver is externally calibrated.
mA:milliamperes, dBm:decibels (milliwatts), N/A:not applicable.
++:high alarm, +:high warning, -:low warning, -- :low alarm.
A2D readouts (if they differ), are reported in parentheses.
The threshold values are uncalibrated.
 
High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm
Temperature Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold
Port (Celsius) (Celsius) (Celsius) (Celsius) (Celsius)
------- ------------------ ---------- --------- --------- ---------
Gi1/3 41.5 110.0 103.0 -8.0 -12.0
 
High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm
Voltage Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold
Port (Volts) (Volts) (Volts) (Volts) (Volts)
------- --------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------
Gi1/3 3.20 4.00 3.70 3.00 2.95
 
High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm
Current Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold
Port (milliamperes) (mA) (mA) (mA) (mA)
------- ----------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------
Gi1/3 31.0 84.0 70.0 4.0 2.0
 
Optical High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm
Transmit Power Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold
Port (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)
------- ----------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------
Gi1/3 -0.0 ( -0.0) -0.0 -0.0 -0.0 -0.0
 
Optical High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm
Receive Power Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold
Port (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)
------- ----------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------
Gi1/3 N/A ( -0.0) -- -0.0 -0.0 -0.0 -0.0
 

 
Related Commands 0

Command
Description

switchport access

Configures a port as a static-access or a dynamic-access port.

switchport backup interface

Configures Flex Links, a pair of Layer 2 interfaces that provide mutual backup.

switchport block

Blocks unknown unicast or multicast traffic on an interface.

switchport mode

Configures the VLAN membership mode of a port.

switchport protected

Isolates unicast, multicast, and broadcast traffic at Layer 2 from other protected ports on the same switch.

switchport trunk pruning

Configures the VLAN pruning-eligible list for ports in trunking mode.

show interfaces counters

To display various counters for the switch or for a specific interface, use the show interfaces counters command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show interfaces [ interface-id | vlan vlan-id ] counters [ errors | etherchannel | protocol status | trunk ]

 
Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) ID of the physical interface, including type, module, and port number.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) ID of the VLAN.

errors

(Optional) Displays error counters.

etherchannel

(Optional) Displays EtherChannel counters, including octets, broadcast packets, multicast packets, and unicast packets received and sent.

protocol status

(Optional) Displays status of protocols enabled on interfaces.

trunk

(Optional) Displays trunk counters.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If you do not enter any keywords, all counters for all interfaces are included.


Note Though visible in the command-line help string, the vlan vlan-id keyword is not supported.


Examples

This is an example of partial output from the show interfaces counters command. It displays all counters for the switch:

Switch# show interfaces counters
Port InOctets InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts
Gi1/1 0 0 0 0
Gi1/2 0 0 0 0
 
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of partial output from the show interfaces counters protocol status command for all interfaces:

Switch# show interfaces counters protocol status
Protocols allocated:
Vlan1: Other, IP
Vlan20: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan30: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan40: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan50: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan60: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan70: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan80: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan90: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan900: Other, IP, ARP
Vlan3000: Other, IP
Vlan3500: Other, IP
FastEthernet1/1: Other, IP, ARP, CDP
FastEthernet1/2: Other, IP
FastEthernet1/3: Other, IP
FastEthernet1/4: Other, IP
FastEthernet1/5: Other, IP
FastEthernet1/6: Other, IP
FastEthernet1/7: Other, IP
FastEthernet1/8: Other, IP
FastEthernet1/9: Other, IP
FastEthernet1/10: Other, IP, CDP
 
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show interfaces counters trunk command. It displays trunk counters for all interfaces:

Switch# show interfaces counters trunk
Port TrunkFramesTx TrunkFramesRx WrongEncap
Gi1/1 0 0 0
Gi1/2 0 0 0
Gi1/1 80678 4155 0
Gi1/2 82320 126 0
 
<output truncated>

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces

Displays additional interface characteristics.

show interfaces rep

To display Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) configuration and status for a specified interface or for all interfaces, use the show interfaces rep command in EXEC mode.

show interfaces [ interface-id ] rep [ detail ]

 
Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) A specified physical interface or port channel ID.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed REP configuration and status information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

In the output for the show interface rep [ detail ] command, in addition to an Open, Fail, or AP (alternate port) state, the Port Role might show as Fail Logical Open (FailLogOpen) or Fail No Ext Neighbor (FailNoNbr). These states indicate that the port is physically up, but REP is not configured on the neighboring port. In this case, one port goes into a forwarding state for the data path to help maintain connectivity during configuration. The Port Role for this port shows as Fail Logical Open; the port forwards all data traffic on all VLANs. The other failed Port Role shows as Fail No Ext Neighbor; this port blocks traffic for all VLANs.

When the external neighbors for the failed ports are configured, the failed ports go through the alternate port state transitions and eventually go to an Open state or remain as the alternate port, based on the alternate port election mechanism.

In the show interfaces rep command output, ports configured as edge no-neighbors are designated with an asterisk (*) in front of Primary Edge or Secondary Edge. In the output of the show interfaces rep detail command, No-Neighbor is spelled out.

The output of this command is also included in the show tech-support privileged EXEC command output.

Examples

This is sample output from the show interface rep command:

Switch # show interface rep
Interface Seg-id Type LinkOp Role
---------------------- ------ ------------ ----------- ----
GigabitEthernet 1/1 1 Primary Edge TWO_WAY Open
GigabitEthernet 1/2 1 Edge TWO_WAY Open
FastEthernet 1/4 2 INIT_DOWN Fail
 
 

This is sample output from the show interface rep command when the edge port is configured to have no REP neighbor. Note the asterisk (*) next to Primary Edge.

Switch# show interface rep
Interface Seg-id Type LinkOp Role
---------------------- ------ -------------- ----------- ----
GigabitEthernet1/1 2 TWO_WAY Open
GigabitEthernet1/2 2 Primary Edge* TWO_WAY Open
 
 

This is sample output from the show interface rep command when external neighbors are not configured:

Switch # show interface rep
Interface Seg-id Type LinkOp Role
---------------------- ------ ------------ ----------- ----
GigabitEthernet1/1 1 NO_NEIGHBOR FailNoNbr
GigabitEthernet1/2 2 NO_NEIGHBOR FailLogOpen
 

This is sample output from the show interface rep detail command for a specified interface:

Switch # show interface gigabitethernet1/2 rep detail
GigabitEthernet1/2 REP enabled
Segment-id: 1 (Segment)
PortID: 00030019E85BDD00
Preferred flag: No
Operational Link Status: INIT_DOWN
Current Key: 00000000000000000000
Port Role: Fail
Blocked VLAN: 1-4094
Admin-vlan: 1
Preempt Delay Timer: disabled
LSL Ageout Timer: 5000 ms
Configured Load-balancing Block Port: 1234567890123456
Configured Load-balancing Block VLAN: 1-4094
STCN Propagate to: none
LSL PDU rx: 0, tx: 0
HFL PDU rx: 0, tx: 0
BPA TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
BPA (STCN, LSL) TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
BPA (STCN, HFL) TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
EPA-ELECTION TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
EPA-COMMAND TLV rx: 0, tx: 0
EPA-INFO TLV rx: 0, tx: 0

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

rep segment

Enables REP on an interface and assigns a segment ID. This command is also used to configure a port as an edge port, a primary edge port, or a preferred port.

show rep topology [ detail ]

Displays information about all ports in the segment, including which one was configured and selected as the primary edge port.

show inventory

To display product identification (PID) information for the hardware, use the show inventory command in EXEC mode.

show inventory [ entity-name | raw ]

 
Syntax Description

entity-name

(Optional) The specified entity. For example, enter the interface (such as gigabitethernet1/1) into which a small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module is installed.

raw

(Optional) Displays every entity in the device.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The command is case sensitive. With no arguments, the show inventory command produces a compact dump of all identifiable entities that have a product identifier. The compact dump displays the entity location (slot identity), entity description, and the unique device identifier (UDI) (PID, VID, and SN) of that entity.


Note If there is no PID, no output appears when you enter the show inventory command.


Examples

This is example output from the show inventory command:

Switch> show inventory
NAME: ''1'', DESCR: ''IE-3000-4TC''
PID: IE-3000-4TC, VID:, SN: FHK1152UZRW
 
NAME: ''IE-3000-4TC - Module in slot 1'', DESCR: ''IE-3000-4TC - Module in slot 1''
PID: 800-28491-01, VID: C1151V545FOC11504, SN: S9FOC115040MRFOC11503J7JF
 
NAME: ''IEM-3000-8TM - Module in slot 2'', DESCR: ''IEM-3000-8TM - Module in slot 2''
PID: 800-28540-01, VID: C1151V332FOC11515, SN: P0FOC11504ML3
 
NAME: ''IEM-3000-8FM - Module in slot 3'', DESCR: ''IEM-3000-8FM - Module in slot 3''
PID: 800-28543-01, VID: C1151V462FOC11505, SN: GTFOC11505JMPFOC11505JDX
 
Switch>

show ip arp inspection

To display the configuration and the operating state of dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) inspection or the status of this feature for all VLANs or for the specified interface or VLAN, use the show ip arp inspection command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show ip arp inspection [ interfaces [ interface-id ] | log | statistics [ vlan vlan-range ] | vlan vlan-range ]

 
Syntax Description

interfaces interface-id

(Optional) Displays the trust state and the rate limit of ARP packets for the specified interface or all interfaces. Valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels.

log

(Optional) Displays the configuration and contents of the dynamic ARP inspection log buffer.

statistics

(Optional) Displays statistics for forwarded, dropped, MAC validation failure, IP validation failure, access control list (ACL) permitted and denied, and DHCP permitted and denied packets for the specified VLAN. If no VLANs are specified or if a range is specified, displays information only for VLANs with dynamic ARP inspection enabled (active).

vlan vlan-range

(Optional) Displays the configuration and the operating state of dynamic ARP inspection for the specified VLAN. If no VLANs are specified or if a range is specified, displays information only for VLANs with dynamic ARP inspection enabled (active).

You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma. The range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection command:

Switch# show ip arp inspection
 
Source Mac Validation : Disabled
Destination Mac Validation : Disabled
IP Address Validation : Enabled
 
Vlan Configuration Operation ACL Match Static ACL
---- ------------- --------- --------- ----------
1 Enabled Active deny-all No
 
Vlan ACL Logging DHCP Logging Probe Logging
---- ----------- ------------ -------------
1 Acl-Match All Permit
 
Vlan Forwarded Dropped DHCP Drops ACL Drops
---- --------- ------- ---------- ---------
1 0 0 0 0
 
Vlan DHCP Permits ACL Permits Probe Permits Source MAC Failures
---- ------------ ----------- ------------- -------------------
1 0 0 0 0
 
Vlan Dest MAC Failures IP Validation Failures Invalid Protocol Data
---- ----------------- ---------------------- ---------------------
1 0 0 0
 

This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection interfaces command:

Switch# show ip arp inspection interfaces
Interface Trust State Rate (pps) Burst Interval
--------------- ----------- ---------- --------------
Gi1/1 Untrusted 15 1
Gi1/2 Untrusted 15 1
Gi1/3 Untrusted 15 1
 

This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection interfaces interface-id command:

Switch# show ip arp inspection interfaces gigabitethernet1/1
Interface Trust State Rate (pps) Burst Interval
--------------- ----------- ---------- --------------
Gi1/1 Untrusted 15 1
 

This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection log command. It shows the contents of the log buffer before the buffers are cleared:

Switch# show ip arp inspection log
Total Log Buffer Size : 32
Syslog rate : 10 entries per 300 seconds.
 
Interface Vlan Sender MAC Sender IP Num Pkts Reason Time
---------- ---- -------------- --------------- --------- ----------- ----
Gi1/1 5 0003.0000.d673 192.2.10.4 5 DHCP Deny 19:39:01 UTC Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi1/1 5 0001.0000.d774 128.1.9.25 6 DHCP Deny 19:39:02 UTC Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi1/1 5 0001.c940.1111 10.10.10.1 7 DHCP Deny 19:39:03 UTC Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi1/1 5 0001.c940.1112 10.10.10.2 8 DHCP Deny 19:39:04 UTC Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi1/1 5 0001.c940.1114 173.1.1.1 10 DHCP Deny 19:39:06 UTC Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi1/1 5 0001.c940.1115 173.1.1.2 11 DHCP Deny 19:39:07 UTC Mon Mar 1 1993
Gi1/1 5 0001.c940.1116 173.1.1.3 12 DHCP Deny 19:39:08 UTC Mon Mar 1 1993
 

If the log buffer overflows, it means that a log event does not fit into the log buffer, and the display for the show ip arp inspection log privileged EXEC command is affected. A -- in the display appears in place of all data except the packet count and the time. No other statistics are provided for the entry. If you see this entry in the display, increase the number of entries in the log buffer, or increase the logging rate in the ip arp inspection log-buffer global configuration command.

This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection statistics command. It shows the statistics for packets that have been processed by dynamic ARP inspection for all active VLANs:

Switch# show ip arp inspection statistics
Vlan Forwarded Dropped DHCP Drops ACL Drops
---- --------- ------- ---------- ---------
5 3 4618 4605 4
2000 0 0 0 0
 
Vlan DHCP Permits ACL Permits Source MAC Failures
---- ------------ ----------- -------------------
5 0 12 0
2000 0 0 0
 
Vlan Dest MAC Failures IP Validation Failures
---- ----------------- ----------------------
5 0 9
2000 0 0
 

For the show ip arp inspection statistics command, the switch increments the number of forwarded packets for each ARP request and response packet on a trusted dynamic ARP inspection port. The switch increments the number of ACL or DHCP permitted packets for each packet that is denied by source MAC, destination MAC, or IP validation checks, and the switch increments the appropriate failure count.

This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection statistics vlan 5 command. It shows statistics for packets that have been processed by dynamic ARP for VLAN 5:

Switch# show ip arp inspection statistics vlan 5
Vlan Forwarded Dropped DHCP Drops ACL Drops
---- --------- ------- ---------- ---------
5 3 4618 4605 4
 
Vlan DHCP Permits ACL Permits Source MAC Failures
---- ------------ ----------- -------------------
5 0 12 0
 
Vlan Dest MAC Failures IP Validation Failures Invalid Protocol Data
---- ----------------- ---------------------- ---------------------
5 0 9 3
 

This is an example of output from the show ip arp inspection vlan 5 command. It shows the configuration and the operating state of dynamic ARP inspection for VLAN 5:

Switch# show ip arp inspection vlan 5
Source Mac Validation :Enabled
Destination Mac Validation :Enabled
IP Address Validation :Enabled
 
Vlan Configuration Operation ACL Match Static ACL
---- ------------- --------- --------- ----------
5 Enabled Active second No
 
Vlan ACL Logging DHCP Logging
---- ----------- ------------
5 Acl-Match All

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP ACL.

clear ip arp inspection log

Clears the dynamic ARP inspection log buffer.

clear ip arp inspection statistics

Clears the dynamic ARP inspection statistics.

ip arp inspection log-buffer

Configures the dynamic ARP inspection logging buffer.

ip arp inspection vlan logging

Controls the type of packets that are logged per VLAN.

show arp access-list

Displays detailed information about ARP access lists.

show ip dhcp snooping

To display the DHCP snooping configuration, use the show ip dhcp snooping command in EXEC mode.

show ip dhcp snooping

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

This command displays only the results of global configuration. Therefore, in this example, the circuit ID suboption appears in its default format of vlan - mod - port, even if a string is configured for the circuit ID.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ip dhcp snooping command:

Switch> show ip dhcp snooping
Switch DHCP snooping is enabled
DHCP snooping is configured on following VLANs:
40-42
Insertion of option 82 is enabled
circuit-id format: vlan-mod-port
remote-id format: string
Option 82 on untrusted port is allowed
Verification of hwaddr field is enabled
Interface Trusted Rate limit (pps)
------------------------ ------- ----------------
GigabitEthernet1/1 yes unlimited
GigabitEthernet1/2 yes unlimited

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding information.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

To display the DHCP snooping binding database and configuration information for all interfaces on a switch, use the show ip dhcp snooping binding command in EXEC mode.

show ip dhcp snooping binding [ ip-address ] [ mac-address ] [ interface interface-id ] [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

ip-address

(Optional) The binding entry IP address.

mac-address

(Optional) The binding entry MAC address.

interface interface-id

(Optional) The binding input interface.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) The binding entry VLAN.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The show ip dhcp snooping binding command output shows only the dynamically configured bindings. Use the show ip source binding privileged EXEC command to display the dynamically and statically configured bindings in the DHCP snooping binding database.

If DHCP snooping is enabled and an interface changes to the down state, the switch does not delete the statically configured bindings.

Examples

This example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries for a switch:

Switch> show ip dhcp snooping binding
MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface
------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------- ---- --------------------
01:02:03:04:05:06 10.1.2.150 9837 dhcp-snooping 20 GigabitEthernet1/1
00:D0:B7:1B:35:DE 10.1.2.151 237 dhcp-snooping 20 GigabitEthernet1/2
Total number of bindings: 2
 

This example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries for a specific IP address:

Switch> show ip dhcp snooping binding 10.1.2.150
MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface
------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------- ---- --------------------
01:02:03:04:05:06 10.1.2.150 9810 dhcp-snooping 20 GigabitEthernet1/1
Total number of bindings: 1
 

This example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries for a specific MAC address:

Switch> show ip dhcp snooping binding 0102.0304.0506
MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface
------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------- ---- --------------------
01:02:03:04:05:06 10.1.2.150 9788 dhcp-snooping 20 GigabitEthernet1/2
Total number of bindings: 1
 

This example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries on a port:

Switch> show ip dhcp snooping binding interface gigabitethernet1/2
MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface
------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------- ---- --------------------
00:30:94:C2:EF:35 10.1.2.151 290 dhcp-snooping 20 GigabitEthernet1/2
Total number of bindings: 1
 

This example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries on VLAN 20:

Switch> show ip dhcp snooping binding vlan 20
MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface
------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------- ---- --------------------
01:02:03:04:05:06 10.1.2.150 9747 dhcp-snooping 20 GigabitEthernet1/1
00:00:00:00:00:02 10.1.2.151 65 dhcp-snooping 20 GigabitEthernet1/2
Total number of bindings: 2
 

Table 0-9 describes the fields in the show ip dhcp snooping binding command output.

 

Table 0-9 show ip dhcp snooping binding Command Output

Field
Description

MacAddress

Client hardware MAC address.

IpAddress

Client IP address assigned from the DHCP server.

Lease(sec)

Remaining lease time for the IP address.

Type

Binding type.

VLAN

VLAN number of the client interface.

Interface

Interface that connects to the DHCP client host.

Total number of bindings

Total number of bindings configured on the switch.

Note The command output might not show the total number of bindings. For example, if 200 bindings are configured on the switch and you stop the display before all the bindings appear, the total number does not change.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ip dhcp snooping binding

Configures the DHCP snooping binding database

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping database

To display the status of the DHCP snooping binding database agent, use the show ip dhcp snooping database command in EXEC mode.

show ip dhcp snooping database [ detail ]

 
Syntax Description

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed status and statistics information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ip dhcp snooping database command:

Switch> show ip dhcp snooping database
Agent URL :
Write delay Timer : 300 seconds
Abort Timer : 300 seconds
 
Agent Running : No
Delay Timer Expiry : Not Running
Abort Timer Expiry : Not Running
 
Last Succeded Time : None
Last Failed Time : None
Last Failed Reason : No failure recorded.
 
Total Attempts : 0 Startup Failures : 0
Successful Transfers : 0 Failed Transfers : 0
Successful Reads : 0 Failed Reads : 0
Successful Writes : 0 Failed Writes : 0
Media Failures : 0
 

This is an example of output from the show ip dhcp snooping database detail command:

Switch# show ip dhcp snooping database detail
Agent URL : tftp://10.1.1.1/directory/file
Write delay Timer : 300 seconds
Abort Timer : 300 seconds
 
Agent Running : No
Delay Timer Expiry : 7 (00:00:07)
Abort Timer Expiry : Not Running
 
Last Succeded Time : None
Last Failed Time : 17:14:25 UTC Sat Jul 7 2001
Last Failed Reason : Unable to access URL.
 
Total Attempts : 21 Startup Failures : 0
Successful Transfers : 0 Failed Transfers : 21
Successful Reads : 0 Failed Reads : 0
Successful Writes : 0 Failed Writes : 21
Media Failures : 0
 
First successful access: Read
 
Last ignored bindings counters :
Binding Collisions : 0 Expired leases : 0
Invalid interfaces : 0 Unsupported vlans : 0
Parse failures : 0
Last Ignored Time : None
 
Total ignored bindings counters:
Binding Collisions : 0 Expired leases : 0
Invalid interfaces : 0 Unsupported vlans : 0
Parse failures : 0

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ip dhcp snooping

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping database

Configures the DHCP snooping binding database agent or the binding file.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays DHCP snooping information.

show ip dhcp snooping statistics

To display DHCP snooping statistics in summary or detail form, use the show ip dhcp snooping statistics command in EXEC mode.

show ip dhcp snooping statistics [ detail ]

 
Syntax Description

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed statistics information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

In a switch stack, all statistics are generated on the stack master. If a new stack master is elected, the statistics counters reset.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ip dhcp snooping statistics command:

Switch> show ip dhcp snooping statistics
Packets Forwarded = 0
Packets Dropped = 0
Packets Dropped From untrusted ports = 0
 

This is an example of output from the show ip dhcp snooping statistics detail command:

Switch> show ip dhcp snooping statistics detail
Packets Processed by DHCP Snooping = 0
Packets Dropped Because
IDB not known = 0
Queue full = 0
Interface is in errdisabled = 0
Rate limit exceeded = 0
Received on untrusted ports = 0
Nonzero giaddr = 0
Source mac not equal to chaddr = 0
Binding mismatch = 0
Insertion of opt82 fail = 0
Interface Down = 0
Unknown output interface = 0
Reply output port equal to input port = 0
Packet denied by platform = 0
 

Table 0-10 shows the DHCP snooping statistics and their descriptions:

Table 0-10 DHCP Snooping Statistics

DHCP Snooping Statistic
Description

Packets Processed by DHCP Snooping

Total number of packets handled by DHCP snooping, including forwarded and dropped packets.

Packets Dropped Because IDB not known

Number of errors when the input interface of the packet cannot be determined.

Queue full

Number of errors when an internal queue used to process the packets is full. This might happen if DHCP packets are received at an excessively high rate and rate limiting is not enabled on the ingress ports.

Interface is in errdisabled

Number of times a packet was received on a port that has been marked as error disabled. This might happen if packets are in the processing queue when a port is put into the error-disabled state and those packets are subsequently processed.

Rate limit exceeded

Number of times the rate limit configured on the port was exceeded and the interface was put into the error-disabled state.

Received on untrusted ports

Number of times a DHCP server packet (OFFER, ACK, NAK, or LEASEQUERY) was received on an untrusted port and was dropped.

Nonzero giaddr

Number of times the relay agent address field (giaddr) in the DHCP packet received on an untrusted port was not zero, or the no ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted global configuration command is not configured and a packet received on an untrusted port contained option-82 data.

Source mac not equal to chaddr

Number of times the client MAC address field of the DHCP packet (chaddr) does not match the packet source MAC address and the ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address global configuration command is configured.

Binding mismatch

Number of times a RELEASE or DECLINE packet was received on a port that is different than the port in the binding for that MAC address-VLAN pair. This indicates someone might be trying to spoof the real client, or it could mean that the client has moved to another port on the switch and issued a RELEASE or DECLINE. The MAC address is taken from the chaddr field of the DHCP packet, not the source MAC address in the Ethernet header.

Insertion of opt82 fail

Number of times the option-82 insertion into a packet failed. The insertion might fail if the packet with the option-82 data exceeds the size of a single physical packet on the internet.

Interface Down

Number of times the packet is a reply to the DHCP relay agent, but the SVI interface for the relay agent is down. This is an unlikely error that occurs if the SVI goes down between sending the client request to the DHCP server and receiving the response.

Unknown output interface

Number of times the output interface for a DHCP reply packet cannot be determined by either option-82 data or a lookup in the MAC address table. The packet is dropped. This can happen if option 82 is not used and the client MAC address has aged out. If IPSG is enabled with the port-security option and option 82 is not enabled, the MAC address of the client is not learned, and the reply packets will be dropped.

Reply output port equal to input port

Number of times the output port for a DHCP reply packet is the same as the input port, causing a possible loop. Indicates a possible network misconfiguration or misuse of trust settings on ports.

Packet denied by platform

Number of times the packet has been denied by a platform-specific registry.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear ip dhcp snooping

Clears the DHCP snooping binding database, the DHCP snooping binding database agent statistics, or the DHCP snooping statistics counters.

show ip igmp profile

To display all configured Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) profiles or a specified IGMP profile, use the show ip igmp profile command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show ip igmp profile [ profile number ]

 
Syntax Description

profile number

(Optional) The IGMP profile number to be displayed. The range is 1 to 4294967295. If no profile number is entered, all IGMP profiles are displayed.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

These are examples of output from the show ip igmp profile privileged EXEC command, with and without specifying a profile number. If no profile number is entered, the display includes all profiles configured on the switch.

Switch# show ip igmp profile 40
IGMP Profile 40
permit
range 233.1.1.1 233.255.255.255
 
Switch# show ip igmp profile
IGMP Profile 3
range 230.9.9.0 230.9.9.0
IGMP Profile 4
permit
range 229.9.9.0 229.255.255.255

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ip igmp profile

Configures the specified IGMP profile number.

show ip igmp snooping

To display the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN, use the show ip igmp snooping EXEC command.

show ip igmp snooping [ groups | mrouter | querier ] [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

groups

(Optional) Displays the show ip igmp snooping groups information.

mrouter

(Optional) Displays the show ip igmp snooping mrouter information.

querier

(Optional) Displays the show ip igmp snooping querier information.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094 (available only in privileged EXEC mode).

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display snooping configuration for the switch or for a specific VLAN.

VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP snooping.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping vlan 1 command. It shows snooping characteristics for a specific VLAN.

Switch# show ip igmp snooping vlan 1
Global IGMP Snooping configuration:
-----------------------------------
IGMP snooping :Enabled
IGMPv3 snooping (minimal) :Enabled
Report suppression :Enabled
TCN solicit query :Disabled
TCN flood query count :2
Last member query interval : 100
 
Vlan 1:
--------
IGMP snooping :Enabled
Immediate leave :Disabled
Multicast router learning mode :pim-dvmrp
Source only learning age timer :10
CGMP interoperability mode :IGMP_ONLY
Last member query interval : 100
 

This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping command. It displays snooping characteristics for all VLANs on the switch.

Switch> show ip igmp snooping
Global IGMP Snooping configuration:
-----------------------------------
IGMP snooping : Enabled
IGMPv3 snooping (minimal) : Enabled
Report suppression : Enabled
TCN solicit query : Disabled
TCN flood query count : 2
Last member query interval : 100
 
Vlan 1:
--------
IGMP snooping :Enabled
Immediate leave :Disabled
Multicast router learning mode :pim-dvmrp
Source only learning age timer :10
CGMP interoperability mode :IGMP_ONLY
Last member query interval : 100
 
Vlan 2:
--------
IGMP snooping :Enabled
Immediate leave :Disabled
Multicast router learning mode :pim-dvmrp
Source only learning age timer :10
CGMP interoperability mode :IGMP_ONLY
Last member query interval : 333
 
<output truncated>

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ip igmp snooping

Enables IGMP snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval

Enables the IGMP snooping configurable-leave timer.

ip igmp snooping querier

Enables the IGMP querier function in Layer 2 networks.

ip igmp snooping report-suppression

Enables IGMP report suppression.

ip igmp snooping tcn

Configures the IGMP topology change notification behavior.

ip igmp snooping tcn flood

Specifies multicast flooding as the IGMP spanning-tree topology change notification behavior.

ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave

Enables IGMP snooping immediate-leave processing on a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Adds a multicast router port or configures the multicast learning method.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

Statically adds a Layer 2 port as a member of a multicast group.

show ip igmp snooping groups

Displays the IGMP snooping multicast table for the switch.

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

Displays IGMP snooping multicast router ports for the switch or for the specified multicast VLAN.

show ip igmp snooping querier

Displays the configuration and operation information for the IGMP querier configured on a switch.

show ip igmp snooping groups

To display the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping multicast table for the switch or the multicast information, use the show ip igmp snooping groups command in Privileged EXEC mode. Use with the vlan keyword to display the multicast table for a specified multicast VLAN or specific multicast information.

show ip igmp snooping groups [ vlan vlan-id [ ip_address ] | dynamic | user ] [ count ]

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

ip_address

(Optional) The specified group IP address.

dynamic

(Optional) Displays entries learned by IGMP snooping.

user

Optional) Displays only the user-configured multicast entries.

count

(Optional) Displays the total number of entries for the specified command

options instead of the actual entries.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display multicast information or the multicast table.

VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP snooping.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping groups command without any keywords. It displays the multicast table for the switch.

Switch# show ip igmp snooping groups
Vlan Group Type Version Port List
-------------------------------------------------------------
104 224.1.4.2 igmp v2 Gi1/1, Gi1/2
104 224.1.4.3 igmp v2 Gi1/1, Gi1/2
 

This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping groups count command. It displays the total number of multicast groups on the switch.

Switch# show ip igmp snooping groups count
Total number of multicast groups: 2
 

This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping groups dynamic command. It shows only the entries learned by IGMP snooping.

Switch# show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 1 dynamic
Vlan Group Type Version Port List
-------------------------------------------------------------
104 224.1.4.2 igmp v2 Gi1/1, Fa1/8
104 224.1.4.3 igmp v2 Gi1/1, Fa1/8
 

This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping groups vlan vlan-id ip-address command. It shows the entries for the group with the specified IP address.

Switch# show ip igmp snooping groups vlan 104 224.1.4.2
Vlan Group Type Version Port List
-------------------------------------------------------------
104 224.1.4.2 igmp v2 Gi1/1, Fa1/8

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ip igmp snooping

Enables IGMP snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Configures a multicast router port.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

Statically adds a Layer 2 port as a member of a multicast group.

show ip igmp snooping

Displays the IGMP snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN.

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

Displays IGMP snooping multicast router ports for the switch or for the specified multicast VLAN.

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

To display the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping dynamically learned and manually configured multicast router ports for the switch or for the specified multicast VLAN, use the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show ip igmp snooping mrouter [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display multicast router ports on the switch or for a specific VLAN.

VLAN IDs 1002 to 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in IGMP snooping.

When multicast VLAN registration (MVR) is enabled, the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command displays MVR multicast router information and IGMP snooping information.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command. It shows how to display multicast router ports on the switch.

Switch# show ip igmp snooping mrouter
Vlan ports
---- -----
1 Gi1/1(dynamic)

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ip igmp snooping

Enables IGMP snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Adds a multicast router port.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

Statically adds a Layer 2 port as a member of a multicast group.

show ip igmp snooping

Displays the IGMP snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN

show ip igmp snooping groups

Displays IGMP snooping multicast information for the switch or for the specified parameter.

show ip igmp snooping querier

To display the configuration and operation information for the IGMP querier configured on a switch, use the show ip igmp snooping querier detail command in EXEC mode.

show ip igmp snooping querier [ detail | vlan vlan-id [ detail ]]

 
Syntax Description

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed IGMP querier information.

vlan vlan-id detail

(Optional) Displays IGMP querier information for the specified VLAN. The range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094. Use the detail keyword to display detailed information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the show ip igmp snooping querier command to display the IGMP version and the IP address of a detected device, also called a querier , t hat sends IGMP query messages. A subnet can have multiple multicast routers but has only one IGMP querier. In a subnet running IGMPv2, one of the multicast routers is elected as the querier. The querier can be a Layer 3 switch.

The show ip igmp snooping querier command output also shows the VLAN and the interface on which the querier was detected. If the querier is the switch, the output shows the Port field as Router. If the querier is a router, the output shows the port number on which the querier is learned in the Port field.

The show ip igmp snooping querier detail EXEC command is similar to the show ip igmp snooping querier command. However, the show ip igmp snooping querier command displays only the device IP address most recently detected by the switch querier.

The show ip igmp snooping querier detail command di splays the device IP address most recently detected by the switch querier and this additional information:

  • The elected IGMP querier in the VLAN
  • The configuration and operational information pertaining to the switch querier (if any) that is configured in the VLAN

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping querier command:

Switch> show ip igmp snooping querier
Vlan IP Address IGMP Version Port
---------------------------------------------------
1 172.20.50.11 v3 Gi1/1
2 172.20.40.20 v2 Router
 

This is an example of output from the show ip igmp snooping querier detail command:

Switch> show ip igmp snooping querier detail
 
Vlan IP Address IGMP Version Port
-------------------------------------------------------------
1 1.1.1.1 v2 Fa1/1
 
Global IGMP switch querier status
--------------------------------------------------------
admin state : Enabled
admin version : 2
source IP address : 0.0.0.0
query-interval (sec) : 60
max-response-time (sec) : 10
querier-timeout (sec) : 120
tcn query count : 2
tcn query interval (sec) : 10
 
Vlan 1: IGMP switch querier status
 
--------------------------------------------------------
elected querier is 1.1.1.1 on port Fa1/1
--------------------------------------------------------
admin state : Enabled
admin version : 2
source IP address : 10.1.1.65
query-interval (sec) : 60
max-response-time (sec) : 10
querier-timeout (sec) : 120
tcn query count : 2
tcn query interval (sec) : 10
operational state : Non-Querier
operational version : 2
tcn query pending count : 0

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ip igmp snooping

Enables IGMP snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping querier

Enables the IGMP querier function in Layer 2 networks.

show ip igmp snooping

Displays IGMP snooping multicast router ports for the switch or for the specified multicast VLAN.

show ip source binding

To display the IP source bindings on the switch, use the show ip source binding command in EXEC mode.

show ip source binding [ ip-address ] [ mac-address ] [ dhcp-snooping | static ] [ interface interface-id ] [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

ip-address

(Optional) IP source bindings for a specific IP address.

mac-address

(Optional) IP source bindings for a specific MAC address.

dhcp-snooping

(Optional) Displays IP source bindings that were learned by DHCP snooping.

static

(Optional) Displays static IP source bindings.

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays IP source bindings on a specific interface.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays IP source bindings on a specific VLAN.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The show ip source binding command output shows the dynamically and statically configured bindings in the DHCP snooping binding database. Use the show ip dhcp snooping binding privileged EXEC command to display only the dynamically configured bindings.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ip source binding command:

Switch> show ip source binding
MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface
-------------- --------------- ---------- ------------- ---- --------------------
00:00:00:0A:00:0B 11.0.0.1 infinite static 10 GigabitEthernet1/1
00:00:00:0A:00:0A 11.0.0.2 10000 dhcp-snooping 10 GigabitEthernet1/1

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ip dhcp snooping binding

Configures the DHCP snooping binding database.

ip source binding

Configures static IP source bindings on the switch.

show ip verify source

To display the IP source guard configuration on the switch or on a specific interface, use the show ip verify source command in EXEC mode.

show ip verify source [ interface interface-id ]

 
Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays IP source guard configuration on a specific interface.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ip verify source command:

Switch> show ip verify source
Interface Filter-type Filter-mode IP-address Mac-address Vlan
--------- ----------- ----------- --------------- -------------- ---------
gi1/1 ip active 10.0.0.1 10
gi1/1 ip active deny-all 11-20
gi1/2 ip inactive-trust-port
gi1/3 ip inactive-no-snooping-vlan
gi1/4 ip-mac active 10.0.0.2 aaaa.bbbb.cccc 10
gi1/4 ip-mac active 11.0.0.1 aaaa.bbbb.cccd 11
gi1/4 ip-mac active deny-all deny-all 12-20
gi1/5 ip-mac active 10.0.0.3 permit-all 10
gi1/5 ip-mac active deny-all permit-all 11-20
 

In the previous example, this is the IP source guard configuration:

  • On the Gigabit Ethernet 1 interface, DHCP snooping is enabled on VLANs 10 to 20. For VLAN 10, IP source guard with IP address filtering is configured on the interface, and a binding exists on the interface. For VLANs 11 to 20, the second entry shows that a default port access control lists (ACLs) is applied on the interface for the VLANs on which IP source guard is not configured.
  • The Gigabit Ethernet 2 interface is configured as trusted for DHCP snooping.
  • On the Gigabit Ethernet 3 interface, DHCP snooping is not enabled on the VLANs to which the interface belongs.
  • On the Gigabit Ethernet 4 interface, IP source guard with source IP and MAC address filtering is enabled, and static IP source bindings are configured on VLANs 10 and 11. For VLANs 12 to 20, the default port ACL is applied on the interface for the VLANs on which IP source guard is not configured.
  • On the Gigabit Ethernet 5 interface, IP source guard with source IP and MAC address filtering is enabled and configured with a static IP binding, but port security is disabled. The switch cannot filter source MAC addresses.

This is an example of output on an interface on which IP source guard is disabled:

Switch> show ip verify source gigabitethernet 1/6
IP source guard is not configured on the interface gi1/16.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ip verify source

Enables IP source guard on an interface.

show ipc

To display Interprocess Communications Protocol (IPC) configuration, status, and statistics, use the show ipc command in EXEC mode.

show ipc { hog-info | mcast { appclass | groups | status } | nodes | ports [ open ] | queue | rpc | session { all | rx | tx } [ verbose ] | status [ cumlulative ] | zones }

 
Syntax Description

hog-info

Displays the IPC message consumed excessive CPU.

mcast appclass | groups | status

Displays the IPC multicast routing information. The keywords have these meanings:

  • appclass —Displays the IPC multicast application classes.
  • groups —Displays the IPC multicast groups.
  • status —Displays the IPC multicast routing status.

nodes

Displays participating nodes.

ports open

Displays local IPC ports. The keyword has this meaning:

  • open —(Optional) Displays only the open ports.

queue

Displays the contents of the IPC transmission queue.

rpc

Displays the IPC remote-procedure statistics.

session all | rx | tx

Displays the IPC session statistics (available only in privileged EXEC mode). The keywords have these meanings:

  • all —Displays all the session statistics.
  • rx —Displays the sessions statistics for traffic that the switch receives
  • tx —Displays the sessions statistics for traffic that the switch forwards.

verbose

(Optional) Displays detailed statistics (available only in privileged EXEC mode).

status cumlulative

Displays the status of the local IPC server. The keyword has this meaning:

  • cumlulative — ( Optional) Displays the status of the local IPC server since the switch was started or restarted.

zones

Displays the participating IPC zones. The switch supports a single IPC zone.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command is available only when the switch is running the IP services image.

Examples

This example shows how to display the IPC routing status:

Switch> show ipc mcast status
IPC Mcast Status
Tx Rx
 
Total Frames 0 0
Total control Frames 0 0
Total Frames dropped 0 0
Total control Frames dropped 0 0
 
Total Reliable messages 0 0
Total Reliable messages acknowledged 0 0
Total Out of Band Messages 0 0
Total Out of Band messages acknowledged 0 0
 
Total No Mcast groups 0 0
 
Total Retries 0 Total Timeouts 0
Total OOB Retries 0 Total OOB Timeouts 0
Total flushes 0 Total No ports 0
 

This example shows how to display the participating nodes:

Switch> show ipc nodes
There is 1 node in this IPC realm.
ID Type Name Last Last
Sent Heard
10000 Local IPC Master 0 0
 

This example shows how to display the local IPC ports:

Switch> show ipc ports
There are 8 ports defined.
 
Port ID Type Name (current/peak/total)
There are 8 ports defined.
10000.1 unicast IPC Master:Zone
10000.2 unicast IPC Master:Echo
10000.3 unicast IPC Master:Control
10000.4 unicast IPC Master:Init
10000.5 unicast FIB Master:DFS.process_level.msgs
10000.6 unicast FIB Master:DFS.interrupt.msgs
10000.7 unicast MDFS RP:Statistics
port_index = 0 seat_id = 0x10000 last sent = 0 last heard = 0
0/2/159
 
10000.8 unicast Slot 1 :MDFS.control.RIL
port_index = 0 seat_id = 0x10000 last sent = 0 last heard = 0
0/0/0
 
RPC packets:current/peak/total
0/1/4
 

This example shows how to display the contents of the IPC retransmission queue:

Switch> show ipc queue
There are 0 IPC messages waiting for acknowledgement in the transmit queue.
There are 0 IPC messages waiting for a response.
There are 0 IPC messages waiting for additional fragments.
There are 0 IPC messages currently on the IPC inboundQ.
Messages currently in use : 3
Message cache size : 1000
Maximum message cache usage : 1000
 
0 times message cache crossed 5000 [max]
 
Emergency messages currently in use : 0
 
There are 2 messages currently reserved for reply msg.
 
Inbound message queue depth 0
Zone inbound message queue depth 0
 

This example shows how to display all the IPC session statistics:

Switch# show ipc session all
Tx Sessions:
Port ID Type Name
10000.7 Unicast MDFS RP:Statistics
port_index = 0 type = Unreliable last sent = 0 last heard = 0
Msgs requested = 180 Msgs returned = 180
 
10000.8 Unicast Slot 1 :MDFS.control.RIL
port_index = 0 type = Reliable last sent = 0 last heard = 0
Msgs requested = 0 Msgs returned = 0
 
Rx Sessions:
Port ID Type Name
10000.7 Unicast MDFS RP:Statistics
port_index = 0 seat_id = 0x10000 last sent = 0 last heard = 0
No of msgs requested = 180 Msgs returned = 180
 
10000.8 Unicast Slot 1 :MDFS.control.RIL
port_index = 0 seat_id = 0x10000 last sent = 0 last heard = 0
No of msgs requested = 0 Msgs returned = 0
 

This example shows how to display the status of the local IPC server:

Switch> show ipc status cumulative
IPC System Status
 
Time last IPC stat cleared :never
 
This processor is the IPC master server.
Do not drop output of IPC frames for test purposes.
 
1000 IPC Message Headers Cached.
 
Rx Side Tx Side
 
Total Frames 12916 608
0 0
Total from Local Ports 13080 574
Total Protocol Control Frames 116 17
Total Frames Dropped 0 0
 
Service Usage
 
Total via Unreliable Connection-Less Service 12783 171
Total via Unreliable Sequenced Connection-Less Svc 0 0
Total via Reliable Connection-Oriented Service 17 116
<output truncated>

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear ipc

Clears the IPC multicast routing statistics.

show ipv6 dhcp conflict

To display address conflicts found by a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) server when addresses are offered to the client, use the show ipv6 dhcp conflict command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show ipv6 dhcp conflict


Note This command is available only if you have configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch and the switch is running the IP services image.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global configuration command, and reload the switch.

When you configure the DHCPv6 server to detect conflicts, it uses ping. The client uses neighbor discovery to detect clients and reports to the server through a DECLINE message. If an address conflict is detected, the address is removed from the pool, and the address is not assigned until the administrator removes the address from the conflict list.

Examples

This is an example of the output from the show ipv6 dhcp conflict command:

Switch# show ipv6 dhcp conflict
Pool 350, prefix 2001:1005::/48
2001:1005::10
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear ipv6 dhcp conflict

Clears an address conflict from the DHCPv6 server database.

ipv6 dhcp pool

Configures a DHCPv6 pool and enters DHCPv6 pool configuration mode.

show ipv6 mld snooping

To display IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN, use the show ipv6 mld snooping command in EXEC mode.

show ipv6 mld snooping [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display MLD snooping configuration for the switch or for a specific VLAN.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global configuration command and reload the switch.


Note This command is available only if you have configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.


Examples

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping vlan command. It shows snooping characteristics for a specific VLAN.

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping vlan 100
Global MLD Snooping configuration:
-------------------------------------------
MLD snooping : Enabled
MLDv2 snooping (minimal) : Enabled
Listener message suppression : Enabled
TCN solicit query : Disabled
TCN flood query count : 2
Robustness variable : 3
Last listener query count : 2
Last listener query interval : 1000
Vlan 100:
--------
MLD snooping : Disabled
MLDv1 immediate leave : Disabled
Explicit host tracking : Enabled
Multicast router learning mode : pim-dvmrp
Robustness variable : 3
Last listener query count : 2
Last listener query interval : 1000
 

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping command. It displays snooping characteristics for all VLANs on the switch.

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping
Global MLD Snooping configuration:
-------------------------------------------
MLD snooping : Enabled
MLDv2 snooping (minimal) : Enabled
Listener message suppression : Enabled
TCN solicit query : Disabled
TCN flood query count : 2
Robustness variable : 3
Last listener query count : 2
Last listener query interval : 1000
 
Vlan 1:
--------
MLD snooping : Disabled
MLDv1 immediate leave : Disabled
Explicit host tracking : Enabled
Multicast router learning mode : pim-dvmrp
Robustness variable : 1
Last listener query count : 2
Last listener query interval : 1000
 
<output truncated>
 
Vlan 951:
--------
MLD snooping : Disabled
MLDv1 immediate leave : Disabled
Explicit host tracking : Enabled
Multicast router learning mode : pim-dvmrp
Robustness variable : 3
Last listener query count : 2
Last listener query interval : 1000

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ipv6 mld snooping

Enables and configures MLD snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.

sdm prefer

Configures an SDM template to optimize system resources based on how the switch is being used.

show ipv6 mld snooping address

To display all or specified IP version 6 (IPv6) multicast address information maintained by Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping, use the show ipv6 mld snooping address command in EXEC mode.

show ipv6 mld snooping address [[ vlan vlan-id ] [ ipv6 multicast-address ]] [ vlan vlan-id ] [ count | dynamic | user ]

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN about which to show MLD snooping multicast address information. The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

ipv6-multicast-address

(Optional) Displays information about the specified IPv6 multicast address. This keyword is only available when a VLAN ID is entered.

count

(Optional) Displays the number of multicast groups on the switch or in the specified VLAN.

dynamic

(Optional) Displays MLD snooping learned group information.

user

(Optional) Displays MLD snooping user-configured group information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display IPv6 multicast address information.

You can enter an IPv6 multicast address only after you enter a VLAN ID.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

Use the dynamic keyword to display information only about groups that are learned. Use the user keyword to display information only about groups that have been configured.

To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global configuration command and reload the switch.


Note This command is available only if you have configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.


Examples

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping address EXEC command:

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping address

Vlan Group Type Version Port List
-------------------------------------------------------------
2 FF12::3 user Fa1/2, Gi1/2, Gi1/1,Gi1/3
 

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping address count EXEC command:

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping address count
Total number of multicast groups: 2
 

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping address User command:

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping address user
Vlan Group Type Version Port List
-------------------------------------------------------------
2 FF12::3 user v2 Fa1/2, Gi1/2, Gi1/1,Gi1/3
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ipv6 mld snooping vlan

Configures IPv6 MLD snooping on a VLAN.

sdm prefer

Configures an SDM template to optimize system resources based on how the switch is being used.

show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter

To display dynamically learned and manually configured IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) router ports for the switch or a VLAN, use the show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter command in EXEC mode.

show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display MLD snooping router ports for the switch or for a specific VLAN.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global configuration command and reload the switch.


Note This command is available only if you have configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.


Examples

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter command. It displays snooping characteristics for all VLANs on the switch that are participating in MLD snooping.

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter
Vlan ports
---- -----
2 Gi1/11(dynamic)
72 Gi1/11(dynamic)
200 Gi1/11(dynamic)
 

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan command. It shows multicast router ports for a specific VLAN.

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan 100
Vlan ports
---- -----
2 Gi1/11(dynamic)

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ipv6 mld snooping

Enables and configures MLD snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping vlan mrouter interface interface-id | static ipv6-multicast-address interface interface-id ]

Configures multicast router ports for a VLAN.

sdm prefer

Configures an SDM template to optimize system resources based on how the switch is being used.

show ipv6 mld snooping querier

To display IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping querier-related information most recently received by the switch or the VLAN, use the show ipv6 mld snooping querier command in EXEC mode.

show ipv6 mld snooping querier [ vlan vlan-id ] [ detail ]


Note This command is available only if you have configured a dual IPv4 and IPv6 Switch Database Management (SDM) template on the switch.


 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

detail

(Optional) Displays MLD snooping detailed querier information for the switch or for the VLAN.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the show ipv6 mld snooping querier command to display the MLD version and IPv6 address of a detected device that sends MLD query messages, which is also called a querier. A subnet can have multiple multicast routers but has only one MLD querier. The querier can be a Layer 3 switch.

The show ipv6 mld snooping querier command output also shows the VLAN and interface on which the querier was detected. If the querier is the switch, the output shows the Port field as Router. If the querier is a router, the output shows the port number on which the querier is learned in the Port field.

The output of the show ipv6 mld snoop querier vlan command displays the information received in response to a query message from an external or internal querier. It does not display user-configured VLAN values, such as the snooping robustness variable on the particular VLAN. This querier information is used only on the MASQ message that is sent by the switch. It does not override the user-configured robustness variable that is used for aging out a member that does not respond to query messages.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

To configure the dual IPv4 and IPv6 template, enter the sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 global configuration command and reload the switch.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping querier command:

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping querier
Vlan IP Address MLD Version Port
-------------------------------------------------------------
2 FE80::201:C9FF:FE40:6000 v1 Gi1/1
 

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping querier detail command:

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping querier detail
Vlan IP Address MLD Version Port
-------------------------------------------------------------
2 FE80::201:C9FF:FE40:6000 v1 Gi1/1
 

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan command:

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan 2
IP address : FE80::201:C9FF:FE40:6000
MLD version : v1
Port : Gi1/1
Max response time : 1000s

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ipv6 mld snooping

Enables and configures IPv6 MLD snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count

Configures the maximum number of queries that the switch sends before aging out an MLD client.

ipv6 mld snooping

Enables and configures IPv6 MLD snooping on the switch or on a VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval

Configures the maximum response time after sending out a query that the switch waits before deleting a port from the multicast group.

ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable

Configures the maximum number of queries that the switch sends before aging out a multicast address when there is no response.

sdm prefer

Configures an SDM template to optimize system resources based on how the switch is being used.

show ipv6 route updated

To display the current contents of the IPv6 routing table, use the show ipv6 route updated command in EXEC command.

show ipv6 route updated [ boot-up ]{ hh:mm | day { month [ hh:mm ]} [{ hh:mm | day { month [ hh:mm ]}]

 
Syntax Description

boot-up

(Optional) Displays the current contents of the IPv6 routing table.

hh:mm

The time entered as a 2-digit number for a 24-hour clock. Make sure to use the colons (:). For example, enter 13:32

day

The day of the month. The range is from 1 to 31.

month

The month entered in uppercase or lowercase letters. You can enter the full name of the month, such as January or august, or the first three letters of the month, such as jan or Aug.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the show ipv6 route privileged EXEC command to display the current contents of the IPv6 routing table.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 route updated rip command:

Switch> show ipv6 route rip updated
IPv6 Routing Table - 12 entries
Codes: C - Connected, L - Local, S - Static, U - Per-user Static route
B - BGP, R - RIP, I1 - ISIS L1, I2 - ISIS L2
IA - ISIS interarea, IS - ISIS summary
O - OSPF Intra, OI - OSPF Inter, OE1 - OSPF ext 1, OE2 - OSPF ext 2
ON1 - OSPF NSSA ext 1, ON2 - OSPF NSSA ext 2
R 2001::/64 [120/2]
via FE80::A8BB:CCFF:FE00:8D01, GigabitEthernet1/1
Last updated 10:31:10 27 February 2007
R 2004::/64 [120/2]
via FE80::A8BB:CCFF:FE00:9001, GigabitEthernet1/2
Last updated 17:23:05 22 February 2007
R 4000::/64 [120/2]
via FE80::A8BB:CCFF:FE00:9001, GigabitEthernet1/3
Last updated 17:23:05 22 February 2007
R 5000::/64 [120/2]
via FE80::A8BB:CCFF:FE00:9001, GigabitEthernet1/4
Last updated 17:23:05 22 February 2007
R 5001::/64 [120/2]
via FE80::A8BB:CCFF:FE00:9001, GigabitEthernet1/5
Last updated 17:23:05 22 February 2007

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show ipv6 route

Displays the current contents of the IPv6 routing table. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

show lacp

To display Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) channel-group information, use the show lacp command in EXEC mode.

show lacp [ channel-group-number ] { counters | internal | neighbor | sys-id }

 
Syntax Description

channel-group-number

(Optional) Number of the channel group. The range is 1 to 6.

counters

Displays traffic information.

internal

Displays internal information.

neighbor

Displays neighbor information.

sys-id

Displays the system identifier that is being used by LACP. The system identifier is made up of the LACP system priority and the switch MAC address.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You can enter any show lacp command to display the active channel-group information. To display specific channel information, enter the show lacp command with a channel-group number.

If you do not specify a channel group, information for all channel groups appears.

You can enter the channel-group-number option to specify a channel group for all keywords except sys-id.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show lacp counters EXEC command. Table 0-11 describes the fields in the display.

Switch> show lacp counters
LACPDUs Marker Marker Response LACPDUs
Port Sent Recv Sent Recv Sent Recv Pkts Err
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Channel group:1
Gi1/1 19 10 0 0 0 0 0
Gi1/2 14 6 0 0 0 0 0
 

 

Table 0-11 show lacp counters Field Descriptions

Field
Description

LACPDUs Sent and Recv

The number of LACP packets sent and received by a port.

Marker Sent and Recv

The number of LACP marker packets sent and received by a port.

Marker Response Sent and Recv

The number of LACP marker response packets sent and received by a port.

LACPDUs Pkts and Err

The number of unknown and illegal packets received by LACP for a port.

This is an example of output from the show lacp channel-group-number internal command:

Switch> show lacp 1 internal
Flags: S - Device is requesting Slow LACPDUs
F - Device is requesting Fast LACPDUs
A - Device is in Active mode P - Device is in Passive mode
 
Channel group 1
LACP port Admin Oper Port Port
Port Flags State Priority Key Key Number State
Gi1/1 SA bndl 32768 0x3 0x3 0x4 0x3D
Gi1/2 SA bndl 32768 0x3 0x3 0x5 0x3D
 

Table 0-12 describes the fields in the display.

 

Table 0-12 show lacp internal Field Descriptions

Field
Description

State

State of the specific port. These are the allowed values:

  • – —Port is in an unknown state.
  • bndl —Port is attached to an aggregator and bundled with other ports.
  • susp —Port is in a suspended state; it is not attached to any aggregator.
  • hot-sby —Port is in a hot-standby state.
  • indiv —Port is incapable of bundling with any other port.
  • indep —Port is in an independent state (not bundled but able to switch data traffic. In this case, LACP is not running on the partner port).
  • down —Port is down.

LACP Port Priority

Port priority setting. LACP uses the port priority to put ports in standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating.

Admin Key

Administrative key assigned to this port. LACP automatically generates an administrative key value as a hexadecimal number. The administrative key defines the ability of a port to aggregate with other ports. A port’s ability to aggregate with other ports is determined by the port physical characteristics (for example, data rate and duplex capability) and configuration restrictions that you establish.

Oper Key

Runtime operational key that is being used by this port. LACP automatically generates this value as a hexadecimal number.

Port Number

Port number.

Port State

State variables for the port, encoded as individual bits within a single octet with these meanings:

  • bit0: LACP_Activity
  • bit1: LACP_Timeout
  • bit2: Aggregation
  • bit3: Synchronization
  • bit4: Collecting
  • bit5: Distributing
  • bit6: Defaulted
  • bit7: Expired

Note In the list above, bit7 is the MSB and bit0 is the LSB.

This is an example of output from the show lacp neighbor command:

Switch> show lacp neighbor
Flags: S - Device is sending Slow LACPDUs F - Device is sending Fast LACPDUs
A - Device is in Active mode P - Device is in Passive mode
 
Channel group 3 neighbors
 
Partner’s information:
 
Partner Partner Partner
Port System ID Port Number Age Flags
Gi1/1 32768,0007.eb49.5e80 0xC 19s SP
 
LACP Partner Partner Partner
Port Priority Oper Key Port State
32768 0x3 0x3C
 
Partner’s information:
 
Partner Partner Partner
Port System ID Port Number Age Flags
Gi1/2 32768,0007.eb49.5e80 0xD 15s SP
 
LACP Partner Partner Partner
Port Priority Oper Key Port State
32768 0x3 0x3C
 

This is an example of output from the show lacp sys-id command:

Switch> show lacp sys-id
32765,0002.4b29.3a00
 

The system identification is made up of the system priority and the system MAC address. The first two bytes are the system priority, and the last six bytes are the globally administered individual MAC address associated to the system.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear lacp

Clears the LACP channel-group information.

lacp port-priority

Configures the LACP port priority.

lacp system-priority

Configures the LACP system priority.

show link-diag error-rate

To display link diagnostic error rate information, use the show link state group command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show link-diag error-rate { fastethernet interface | gigabitethernet interface | window-size }

 
Syntax Description

fastethernet interface

Displays the fastethernet interface number which ranges from 1-1.

gigabitethernet interface

Displays the gigabitethernet interface number which ranges from 1-1.

window-size

Displays the link diagnostics error rate window size.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to display show link diagnostics error rates:

Switch# show link-diag error-rate
Port Receive Err-Rate Transmit Err-Rate
---- ---------------- -----------------
Fa1/1 0 0
Fa1/2 0 0
Fa1/3 0 0
Fa1/4 0 0
Gi1/1 0 0
Gi1/2 0 0
Switch#
 

This example shows how to display Fast Ethernet link diagnostics error rates:

Switch# show link-diag error-rate fastethernet 1/1
Port Receive Err-Rate Transmit Err-Rate
---- ---------------- -----------------
Fa1/1 0 0
Switch#
 

This example shows how to display Gigabit Ethernet link diagnostics error rates:

Switch# show link-diag error-rate gigabitethernet 1/1
Port Receive Err-Rate Transmit Err-Rate
---- ---------------- -----------------
Gi1/1 0 0
Switch#

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

link-diag error-rate

Configures the window size for the link diagnostics feature.

show location

To display location information for an endpoint, use the show location command in EXEC mode.

show location [ admin-tag ] [ civic-location | elin-location { cdp | identifier id | interface interface-id | static }]

 
Syntax Description

admin-tag

(Optional) Displays administrative tag or site information.

civic-location

(Optional) Displays civic location information.

elin-location

(Optional) Displays emergency location information (ELIN).

cdp

(Optional) Displays CDP location information.

identifier id

(Optional) Specifies the ID for the civic location or the elin location. The ID range is 1 to 4095.

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays location information for the specified interface or all interfaces. Valid interfaces include physical ports.

static

(Optional) Displays static configuration information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the show location command to display location information for an endpoint.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show location civic-location command that displays location information for an interface:

Switch> show location civic interface gigibitethernet1/1
Civic location information
--------------------------
Identifier : 1
County : Santa Clara
Street number : 3550
Building : 19
Room : C6
Primary road name : Cisco Way
City : San Jose
State : CA
Country : US

 

This is an example of output from the show location civic-location identifier command that displays all the civic location information:

Switch> show location civic-location static
Civic location information
--------------------------
Identifier : 1
County : Santa Clara
Street number : 3550
Building : 19
Room : C6
Primary road name : Cisco Way
City : San Jose
State : CA
Country : US
Ports : Gi1/1
--------------------------
Identifier : 2
Street number : 24568
Street number suffix : West
Landmark : Golden Gate Bridge
Primary road name : 19th Ave
City : San Francisco
Country : US
--------------------------
 
This is an example of output from the show location elin-location command that displays the emergency location information:
 
Switch> show location elin-location identifier 1
Elin location information
--------------------------
Identifier : 1
Elin : 14085553881
Ports : Gi1/2
 
This is an example of output from the show location elin static command that displays all emergency location information:
 
Switch> show location elin static
Elin location information
--------------------------
Identifier : 1
Elin : 14085553881
Ports : Gi1/2
--------------------------
Identifier : 2
Elin : 18002228999
--------------------------
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

location (global configuration)

Configures the global location information for an endpoint.

location (interface configuration)

Configures the location information for an interface.

show link state group

To display the link-state group information, use the show link state group command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show link state group [ number ] [ detail ]

 
Syntax Description

number

(Optional) Number of the link-state group.

detail

(Optional) Specifies that detailed information appears.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the show link state group command to display the link-state group information. Enter this command without keywords to display information about all link-state groups. Enter the group number to display information specific to the group.

Enter the detail keyword to display detailed information about the group. The output for the show link state group detail command displays only those link-state groups that have link-state tracking enabled or that have upstream or downstream interfaces (or both) configured. If there is no link-state group configuration for a group, it is not shown as enabled or disabled.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show link state group 1 command:

Switch> show link state group 1
Link State Group: 1 Status: Enabled, Down
 

This is an example of output from the show link state group detail command:

Switch> show link state group detail
(Up):Interface up (Dwn):Interface Down (Dis):Interface disabled
 
Link State Group: 1 Status: Enabled, Down
Upstream Interfaces : Gi1/1(Dwn) Gi1/2(Dwn)
Downstream Interfaces : Fa1/5(Dis) Fa1/6(Dis) Fa1/7(Dis) Fa1/8(Dis)
 
Link State Group: 2 Status: Enabled, Down
Upstream Interfaces : Gi1/1(Dwn) Gi1/2(Dwn) Gi1/3(Dwn)
Downstream Interfaces : Fa1/5(Dis) Fa1/6(Dis) Fa1/7(Dis) Fa1/8(Dis)
 
(Up):Interface up (Dwn):Interface Down (Dis):Interface disabled
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

link state group

Configures an interface as a member of a link-state group.

link state track

Enables a link-state group.

show mac access-group

To display the MAC access control lists (ACLs) configured for an interface or a switch, use the show mac access-group command in EXEC mode.

show mac access-group interface interface-id

 
Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays the MAC ACLs configured on a specific interface. Valid interfaces are physical ports and port channels; the port-channel range is 1 to 6 (available only in privileged EXEC mode).

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac-access group EXEC command. Port 2 has the MAC access list macl_e1 applied; no MAC ACLs are applied to other interfaces.

Switch> show mac access-group
Interface GigabitEthernet1/1:
Inbound access-list is not set
Interface GigabitEthernet1/2:
Inbound access-list is macl_e1
Interface GigabitEthernet1/3:
Inbound access-list is not set
Interface GigabitEthernet1/4:
Inbound access-list is not set
 
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show mac access-group interface command:

Switch# show mac access-group interface gigabitethernet1/1
Interface GigabitEthernet1/1:
Inbound access-list is macl_e1

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mac access-group

Applies a MAC access group to an interface.

show mac address-table

To display a specific MAC address table static and dynamic entry or the MAC address table static and dynamic entries on a specific interface or VLAN, use the show mac address-table command in EXEC mode.

show mac address-table

 
Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table command:

Switch> show mac address-table
Mac Address Table
------------------------------------------
Vlan Mac Address Type Ports
---- ----------- ---- -----
All 0000.0000.0001 STATIC CPU
All 0000.0000.0002 STATIC CPU
All 0000.0000.0003 STATIC CPU
All 0000.0000.0009 STATIC CPU
All 0000.0000.0012 STATIC CPU
All 0180.c200.000b STATIC CPU
All 0180.c200.000c STATIC CPU
All 0180.c200.000d STATIC CPU
All 0180.c200.000e STATIC CPU
All 0180.c200.000f STATIC CPU
All 0180.c200.0010 STATIC CPU
1 0030.9441.6327 DYNAMIC Gi1/2
Total Mac Addresses for this criterion: 12

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear mac address-table dynamic

Deletes from the MAC address table a specific dynamic address, all dynamic addresses on a particular interface, or all dynamic addresses on a particular VLAN.

show mac address-table aging-time

Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table count

Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table dynamic

Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified interface.

show mac address-table notification

Displays the MAC address notification settings for all interfaces or the specified interface.

show mac address-table static

Displays static MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table vlan

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table address

To display MAC address table information for the specified MAC address, use the show mac address-table address command in EXEC mode.

show mac address-table address mac-address [ interface interface-id ] [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

mac-address

The 48-bit MAC address; the valid format is H.H.H.

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays information for a specific interface. Valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays entries for the specific VLAN only. The range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table address command:

Switch# show mac address-table address 0002.4b28.c482
Mac Address Table
------------------------------------------
 
Vlan Mac Address Type Ports
---- ----------- ---- -----
All 0002.4b28.c482 STATIC CPU
Total Mac Addresses for this criterion: 1

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show mac address-table aging-time

Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table count

Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table dynamic

Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified interface.

show mac address-table notification

Displays the MAC address notification settings for all interfaces or the specified interface.

show mac address-table static

Displays static MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table vlan

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table aging-time

Use the show mac address-table aging-time command in EXEC mode to display the aging time of a specific address table instance, all address table instances on a specified VLAN or, if a specific VLAN is not specified, on all VLANs.

show mac address-table aging-time [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays aging time information for a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If no VLAN number is specified, the aging time for all VLANs appears.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table aging-time command:

Switch> show mac address-table aging-time
Vlan Aging Time
---- ----------
1 300
 

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table aging-time vlan 10 command:

Switch> show mac address-table aging-time vlan 10
Vlan Aging Time
---- ----------
10 300
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mac address-table aging-time

Sets the length of time that a dynamic entry remains in the MAC address table after the entry is used or updated.

show mac address-table address

Displays MAC address table information for the specified MAC address.

show mac address-table count

Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table dynamic

Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified interface.

show mac address-table notification

Displays the MAC address notification settings for all interfaces or the specified interface.

show mac address-table static

Displays static MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table vlan

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table count

To display the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the specified VLAN, use the show mac address-table count command in EXEC mode.

show mac address-table count [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays the number of addresses for a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If no VLAN number is specified, the address count for all VLANs appears.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table count command:

Switch# show mac address-table count
Mac Entries for Vlan : 1
---------------------------
Dynamic Address Count : 2
Static Address Count : 0
Total Mac Addresses : 2

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show mac address-table address

Displays MAC address table information for the specified MAC address.

show mac address-table aging-time

Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table dynamic

Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified interface.

show mac address-table notification

Displays the MAC address notification settings for all interfaces or the specified interface.

show mac address-table static

Displays static MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table vlan

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table dynamic

To display only dynamic MAC address table entries, use the show mac address-table dynamic command in EXEC mode.

show mac address-table dynamic [ address mac-address ] [ interface interface-id ] [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

address mac-address

(Optional) Specifies a 48-bit MAC address; the valid format is H.H.H (available in privileged EXEC mode only).

interface interface-id

(Optional) Specifies an interface to match; valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays entries for a specific VLAN; the range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table dynamic command:

Switch> show mac address-table dynamic
Mac Address Table
------------------------------------------
 
Vlan Mac Address Type Ports
---- ----------- ---- -----
1 0030.b635.7862 DYNAMIC Gi1/2
1 00b0.6496.2741 DYNAMIC Gi1/2
Total Mac Addresses for this criterion: 2

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear mac address-table dynamic

Deletes from the MAC address table a specific dynamic address, all dynamic addresses on a particular interface, or all dynamic addresses on a particular VLAN.

show mac address-table address

Displays MAC address table information for the specified MAC address.

show mac address-table aging-time

Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table count

Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified interface.

show mac address-table static

Displays static MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table vlan

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table interface

To display the MAC address table information for the specified interface in the specified VLAN, use the show mac address-table interface user command.

show mac address-table interface interface-id [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

interface-id

An interface type; valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays entries for a specific VLAN; the range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table interface command:

Switch> show mac address-table interface gigabitethernet1/2
Mac Address Table
------------------------------------------
 
Vlan Mac Address Type Ports
---- ----------- ---- -----
1 0030.b635.7862 DYNAMIC Gi1/2
1 00b0.6496.2741 DYNAMIC Gi1/2
Total Mac Addresses for this criterion: 2

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show mac address-table address

Displays MAC address table information for the specified MAC address.

show mac address-table aging-time

Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table count

Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table dynamic

Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table notification

Displays the MAC address notification settings for all interfaces or the specified interface.

show mac address-table static

Displays static MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table vlan

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table learning

To display the status of MAC address learning for all VLANs or the specified VLAN u se the show mac address-table learning command in EXEC mode.

show mac address-table learning [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays information for a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the show mac address-table learning command without any keywords to display configured VLANs and whether MAC address learning is enabled or disabled on them. The default is that MAC address learning is enabled on all VLANs. Use the command with a specific VLAN ID to display the learning status on an individual VLAN.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table learning EXEC command showing that MAC address learning is disabled on VLAN 200:

Switch> show mac address-table learning
VLAN Learning Status
---- ---------------
1 yes
100 yes
200 no

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mac address-table learning vlan

Enables or disables MAC address learning on a VLAN.

show mac address-table move update

To display the MAC address-table move update information on the switch, use the show mac address-table move update command in EXEC mode.

show mac address-table move update

 
Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table move update command:

Switch> show mac address-table move update
Switch-ID : 010b.4630.1780
Dst mac-address : 0180.c200.0010
Vlans/Macs supported : 1023/8320
Default/Current settings: Rcv Off/On, Xmt Off/On
Max packets per min : Rcv 40, Xmt 60
Rcv packet count : 10
Rcv conforming packet count : 5
Rcv invalid packet count : 0
Rcv packet count this min : 0
Rcv threshold exceed count : 0
Rcv last sequence# this min : 0
Rcv last interface : Po2
Rcv last src-mac-address : 0003.fd6a.8701
Rcv last switch-ID : 0303.fd63.7600
Xmt packet count : 0
Xmt packet count this min : 0
Xmt threshold exceed count : 0
Xmt pak buf unavail cnt : 0
Xmt last interface : None
switch#

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear mac address-table move update

Clears the MAC address-table move update counters.

mac address-table move update { receive | transmit }

Configures MAC address-table move update on the switch.

show mac address-table notification

To display the MAC address notification settings for all interfaces or the specified interface, use the show mac address-table notification command in EXEC mode.

show mac address-table notification { change [ interface [ interface-id ] | mac-move | threshold }

 
Syntax Description

change

Displays the MAC change notification feature parameters and the history table.

interface

(Optional) Displays information for all interfaces. Valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels.

interface-id

(Optional) The specified interface. Valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels.

mac-move

Displays status for MAC address move notifications.

threshold

Displays status for MAC-address table threshold monitoring.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the show mac address-table notification change command without keywords to see if the MAC address change notification feature is enabled or disabled, the MAC notification interval, the maximum number of entries allowed in the history table, and the history table contents.

Use the interface keyword to display the notifications for all interfaces. If the interface-id is included, only the flags for that interface appear.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table notification change command:

Switch> show mac address-table notification change
MAC Notification Feature is Enabled on the switch
Interval between Notification Traps : 60 secs
Number of MAC Addresses Added : 4
Number of MAC Addresses Removed : 4
Number of Notifications sent to NMS : 3
Maximum Number of entries configured in History Table : 100
Current History Table Length : 3
MAC Notification Traps are Enabled
History Table contents
----------------------
History Index 0, Entry Timestamp 1032254, Despatch Timestamp 1032254
MAC Changed Message :
Operation: Added Vlan: 2 MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0001 Module: 0 Port: 1
 
History Index 1, Entry Timestamp 1038254, Despatch Timestamp 1038254
MAC Changed Message :
Operation: Added Vlan: 2 MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0000 Module: 0 Port: 1
Operation: Added Vlan: 2 MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0002 Module: 0 Port: 1
Operation: Added Vlan: 2 MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0003 Module: 0 Port: 1
 
History Index 2, Entry Timestamp 1074254, Despatch Timestamp 1074254
MAC Changed Message :
Operation: Deleted Vlan: 2 MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0000 Module: 0 Port: 1
Operation: Deleted Vlan: 2 MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0001 Module: 0 Port: 1
Operation: Deleted Vlan: 2 MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0002 Module: 0 Port: 1
Operation: Deleted Vlan: 2 MAC Addr: 0000.0000.0003 Module: 0 Port: 1

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear mac address-table notification

Clears the MAC address notification global counters.

mac address-table notification

Enables the MAC address notification feature for MAC address changes, moves, or address-table thresholds.

show mac address-table address

Displays MAC address table information for the specified MAC address.

show mac address-table aging-time

Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table count

Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table dynamic

Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified interface.

show mac address-table static

Displays static MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table vlan

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table static

To display only static MAC address table entries, use the show mac address-table static command in EXEC mode.

show mac address-table static [ address mac-address ] [ interface interface-id ] [ vlan vlan-id ]

 
Syntax Description

address mac-address

(Optional) Specifies a 48-bit MAC address; the valid format is H.H.H (available in privileged EXEC mode only).

interface interface-id

(Optional) Specifies an interface to match; valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays addresses for a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table static command:

Switch> show mac address-table static
Mac Address Table
------------------------------------------
 
Vlan Mac Address Type Ports
---- ----------- ---- -----
All 0100.0ccc.cccc STATIC CPU
All 0180.c200.0000 STATIC CPU
All 0100.0ccc.cccd STATIC CPU
All 0180.c200.0001 STATIC CPU
All 0180.c200.0004 STATIC CPU
All 0180.c200.0005 STATIC CPU
4 0001.0002.0004 STATIC Drop
6 0001.0002.0007 STATIC Drop
Total Mac Addresses for this criterion: 8

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mac address-table static

Adds static addresses to the MAC address table.

mac address-table static drop

Enables unicast MAC address filtering and configures the switch to drop traffic with a specific source or destination MAC address.

show mac address-table address

Displays MAC address table information for the specified MAC address.

show mac address-table aging-time

Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table count

Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table dynamic

Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified interface.

show mac address-table notification

Displays the MAC address notification settings for all interfaces or the specified interface.

show mac address-table vlan

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table vlan

To display the MAC address table information for the specified VLAN, use the show mac address-table vlan command in EXEC mode.

show mac address-table vlan vlan-id

 
Syntax Description

vlan-id

(Optional) Displays addresses for a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mac address-table vlan 1 command:

Switch> show mac address-table vlan 1
Mac Address Table
------------------------------------------
 
Vlan Mac Address Type Ports
---- ----------- ---- -----
1 0100.0ccc.cccc STATIC CPU
1 0180.c200.0000 STATIC CPU
1 0100.0ccc.cccd STATIC CPU
1 0180.c200.0001 STATIC CPU
1 0180.c200.0002 STATIC CPU
1 0180.c200.0003 STATIC CPU
1 0180.c200.0005 STATIC CPU
1 0180.c200.0006 STATIC CPU
1 0180.c200.0007 STATIC CPU
Total Mac Addresses for this criterion: 9

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show mac address-table address

Displays MAC address table information for the specified MAC address.

show mac address-table aging-time

Displays the aging time in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table count

Displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or the specified VLAN.

show mac address-table dynamic

Displays dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for the specified interface.

show mac address-table notification

Displays the MAC address notification settings for all interfaces or the specified interface.

show mac address-table static

Displays static MAC address table entries only.

show mls qos

To display global quality of service (QoS) configuration information, use the show mls qos command in EXEC mode.

show mls qos


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the LAN Base image.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mls qos command when QoS is enabled and DSCP transparency is enabled:

Switch> show mls qos
QoS is enabled
QoS ip packet dscp rewrite is enabled

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mls qos

Enables QoS for the entire switch.

show mls qos aggregate-policer

To display the quality of service (QoS) aggregate policer configuration, use the show mls qos aggregate-policer command in EXEC mode. A policer defines a maximum permissible rate of transmission, a maximum burst size for transmissions, and an action to take if either maximum is exceeded.

show mls qos aggregate-policer [ aggregate-policer-name ]


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the LAN Base image.


 
Syntax Description

aggregate-policer-name

(Optional) The policer configuration for the specified name.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mls qos aggregate-policer command:

Switch> show mls qos aggregate-policer policer1
aggregate-policer policer1 1000000 2000000 exceed-action drop
Not used by any policy map

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mls qos aggregate-policer

Defines policer parameters that can be shared by multiple classes within a policy map.

show mls qos input-queue

To display quality of service (QoS) settings for the ingress queues, use the show mls qos input-queue command in EXEC mode.

show mls qos input-queue


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the LAN Base image.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no keyword or arguments.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mls qos input-queue command:

Switch> show mls qos input-queue
Queue : 1 2
----------------------------------------------
buffers : 90 10
bandwidth : 4 4
priority : 0 10
threshold1: 100 100
threshold2: 100 100

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mls qos srr-queue input bandwidth

Assigns shaped round robin (SRR) weights to an ingress queue.

mls qos srr-queue input buffers

Allocates the buffers between the ingress queues.

mls qos srr-queue input cos-map

Maps assigned class of service (CoS) values to an ingress queue and assigns CoS values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map

Maps assigned Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) values to an ingress queue and assigns DSCP values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos srr-queue input priority-queue

Configures the ingress priority queue and guarantees bandwidth.

mls qos srr-queue input threshold

Assigns weighted tail-drop (WTD) threshold percentages to an ingress queue.

show mls qos interface

To display quality of service (QoS) information at the port level, use the show mls qos interface command in EXEC mode.

show mls qos interface [ interface-id ] [ buffers | queueing | statistics ]


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the LAN Base image.


 
Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) The specified port. Valid interfaces include physical ports.

buffers

(Optional) Displays the buffer allocation among the queues.

queueing

(Optional) Displays the queueing strategy (shared or shaped) and the weights corresponding to the queues.

statistics

(Optional) Displays statistics for sent and received Differentiated Services Code Points (DSCPs) and class of service (CoS) values, the number of packets enqueued or dropped per egress queue, and the number of in-profile and out-of-profile packets for each policer.


Note Though visible in the command-line help string, the policer keyword is not supported.


 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mls qos interface interface-id command when VLAN-based QoS is enabled:

Switch> show mls qos interface gigabitethernet1/1
GigabitEthernet1/1
trust state:not trusted
trust mode:not trusted
trust enabled flag:ena
COS override:dis
default COS:0
DSCP Mutation Map:Default DSCP Mutation Map
Trust device:none
qos mode:vlan-based
 

This is an example of output from the show mls qos interface interface-id command when VLAN-based QoS is disabled:

Switch> show mls qos interface gigabitethernet1/2
GigabitEthernet1/2
trust state:not trusted
trust mode:not trusted
trust enabled flag:ena
COS override:dis
default COS:0
DSCP Mutation Map:Default DSCP Mutation Map
Trust device:none
qos mode:port-based
 

This is an example of output from the show mls qos interface interface-id buffers command:

Switch> show mls qos interface gigabitethernet1/2 buffers
GigabitEthernet1/2
The port is mapped to qset : 1
The allocations between the queues are : 25 25 25 25
 

This is an example of output from the show mls qos interface interface-id queueing command. The egress expedite queue overrides the configured shaped round robin (SRR) weights.

Switch> show mls qos interface gigabitethernet1/2 queueing
GigabitEthernet1/2
Egress Priority Queue :enabled
Shaped queue weights (absolute) : 25 0 0 0
Shared queue weights : 25 25 25 25
The port bandwidth limit : 100 (Operational Bandwidth:100.0)
The port is mapped to qset : 1
 

This is an example of output from the show mls qos interface interface-id statistics command. Table 0-13 describes the fields in this display.

Switch> show mls qos interface gigabitethernet1/2 statistics
GigabitEthernet1/2
 
dscp: incoming
-------------------------------
 
0 - 4 : 4213 0 0 0 0
5 - 9 : 0 0 0 0 0
10 - 14 : 0 0 0 0 0
15 - 19 : 0 0 0 0 0
20 - 24 : 0 0 0 0 0
25 - 29 : 0 0 0 0 0
30 - 34 : 0 0 0 0 0
35 - 39 : 0 0 0 0 0
40 - 44 : 0 0 0 0 0
45 - 49 : 0 0 0 6 0
50 - 54 : 0 0 0 0 0
55 - 59 : 0 0 0 0 0
60 - 64 : 0 0 0 0
dscp: outgoing
-------------------------------
 
0 - 4 : 363949 0 0 0 0
5 - 9 : 0 0 0 0 0
10 - 14 : 0 0 0 0 0
15 - 19 : 0 0 0 0 0
20 - 24 : 0 0 0 0 0
25 - 29 : 0 0 0 0 0
30 - 34 : 0 0 0 0 0
35 - 39 : 0 0 0 0 0
40 - 44 : 0 0 0 0 0
45 - 49 : 0 0 0 0 0
50 - 54 : 0 0 0 0 0
55 - 59 : 0 0 0 0 0
60 - 64 : 0 0 0 0
cos: incoming
-------------------------------
 
0 - 4 : 132067 0 0 0 0
5 - 9 : 0 0 0
cos: outgoing
-------------------------------
 
0 - 4 : 739155 0 0 0 0
5 - 9 : 90 0 0
 
Policer: Inprofile: 0 OutofProfile: 0
 

 

Table 0-13 show mls qos interface statistics Field Descriptions

Field
 
Description

DSCP

incoming

Number of packets received for each DSCP value.

outgoing

Number of packets sent for each DSCP value.

CoS

incoming

Number of packets received for each CoS value.

outgoing

Number of packets sent for each CoS value.

Policer

Inprofile

Number of in profile packets for each policer.

Outofprofile

Number of out-of-profile packets for each policer.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mls qos queue-set output buffers

Allocates buffers to a queue-set.

mls qos queue-set output threshold

Configures the weighted tail-drop (WTD) thresholds, guarantees the availability of buffers, and configures the maximum memory allocation to a queue-set.

mls qos srr-queue input bandwidth

Assigns SRR weights to an ingress queue.

mls qos srr-queue input buffers

Allocates the buffers between the ingress queues.

mls qos srr-queue input cos-map

Maps CoS values to an ingress queue or maps CoS values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map

Maps DSCP values to an ingress queue or maps DSCP values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos srr-queue input priority-queue

Configures the ingress priority queue and guarantees bandwidth.

mls qos srr-queue input threshold

Assigns WTD threshold percentages to an ingress queue.

mls qos srr-queue output cos-map

Maps CoS values to an egress queue or maps CoS values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map

Maps DSCP values to an egress queue or maps DSCP values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map.

priority-queue

Enables the egress expedite queue on a port.

queue-set

Maps a port to a queue-set.

srr-queue bandwidth limit

Limits the maximum output on a port.

srr-queue bandwidth shape

Assigns the shaped weights and enables bandwidth shaping on the four egress queues mapped to a port.

srr-queue bandwidth share

Assigns the shared weights and enables bandwidth sharing on the four egress queues mapped to a port.

show mls qos maps

To display quality of service (QoS) mapping information, use the show mls qos maps command in EXEC mode. During classification, QoS uses the mapping tables to represent the priority of the traffic and to derive a corresponding class of service (CoS) or Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value from the received CoS, DSCP, or IP precedence value.

show mls qos maps [ cos-dscp | cos-input-q | cos-output-q | dscp-cos | dscp-input-q | dscp-mutation dscp-mutation-name | dscp-output-q | ip-prec-dscp | policed-dscp ]


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the LAN Base image.


 
Syntax Description

cos-dscp

(Optional) Displays class of service (CoS)-to-DSCP map.

cos-input-q

(Optional) Displays the CoS input queue threshold map.

cos-output-q

(Optional) Displays the CoS output queue threshold map.

dscp-cos

(Optional) Displays DSCP-to-CoS map.

dscp-input-q

(Optional) Displays the DSCP input queue threshold map.

dscp-mutation dscp-mutation-name

(Optional) Displays the specified DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map.

dscp-output-q

(Optional) Displays the DSCP output queue threshold map.

ip-prec-dscp

(Optional) Displays the IP-precedence-to-DSCP map.

policed-dscp

(Optional) Displays the policed-DSCP map.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

The policed-DSCP, DSCP-to-CoS, and the DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation maps appear as a matrix. The d1 column specifies the most-significant digit in the DSCP. The d2 row specifies the least-significant digit in the DSCP. The intersection of the d1 and d2 values provides the policed-DSCP, the CoS, or the mutated-DSCP value. For example, in the DSCP-to-CoS map, a DSCP value of 43 corresponds to a CoS value of 5.

The DSCP input queue threshold and the DSCP output queue threshold maps appear as a matrix. The d1 column specifies the most-significant digit of the DSCP number. The d2 row specifies the least-significant digit in the DSCP number. The intersection of the d1 and the d2 values provides the queue ID and threshold ID. For example, in the DSCP input queue threshold map, a DSCP value of 43 corresponds to queue 2 and threshold 1 (02-01).

The CoS input queue threshold and the CoS output queue threshold maps show the CoS value in the top row and the corresponding queue ID and threshold ID in the second row. For example, in the CoS input queue threshold map, a CoS value of 5 corresponds to queue 2 and threshold 1 (2-1).

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mls qos maps command:

Switch> show mls qos maps
Policed-dscp map:
d1 : d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
---------------------------------------
0 : 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
1 : 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
2 : 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
3 : 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
4 : 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
5 : 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
6 : 60 61 62 63
 
Dscp-cos map:
d1 : d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
---------------------------------------
0 : 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01
1 : 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 02 02
2 : 02 02 02 02 03 03 03 03 03 03
3 : 03 03 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04
4 : 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 06 06
5 : 06 06 06 06 06 06 07 07 07 07
6 : 07 07 07 07
 
Cos-dscp map:
cos: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
--------------------------------
dscp: 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56
 
IpPrecedence-dscp map:
ipprec: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
--------------------------------
dscp: 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56
 
Dscp-outputq-threshold map:
d1 :d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
--------------------------------------------------------------------
0 : 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01
1 : 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 03-01 03-01 03-01 03-01
2 : 03-01 03-01 03-01 03-01 03-01 03-01 03-01 03-01 03-01 03-01
3 : 03-01 03-01 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01
4 : 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 04-01 04-01
5 : 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01
6 : 04-01 04-01 04-01 04-01
 
Dscp-inputq-threshold map:
d1 :d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
--------------------------------------------------------------------
0 : 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01
1 : 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01
2 : 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01
3 : 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01
4 : 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 02-01 01-01 01-01
5 : 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01
6 : 01-01 01-01 01-01 01-01
 
Cos-outputq-threshold map:
cos: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
------------------------------------
queue-threshold: 2-1 2-1 3-1 3-1 4-1 1-1 4-1 4-1
 
Cos-inputq-threshold map:
cos: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
------------------------------------
queue-threshold: 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 2-1 1-1 1-1
 
Dscp-dscp mutation map:
Default DSCP Mutation Map:
d1 : d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
---------------------------------------
0 : 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
1 : 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
2 : 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
3 : 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
4 : 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
5 : 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
6 : 60 61 62 63

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mls qos map

Defines the CoS-to-DSCP map, DSCP-to-CoS map, DSCP-to-DSCP-mutation map, IP-precedence-to-DSCP map, and the policed-DSCP map.

mls qos srr-queue input cos-map

Maps CoS values to an ingress queue or maps CoS values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos srr-queue input dscp-map

Maps DSCP values to an ingress queue or maps DSCP values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos srr-queue output cos-map

Maps CoS values to an egress queue or maps CoS values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map

Maps DSCP values to an egress queue or maps DSCP values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

show mls qos queue-set

To display quality of service (QoS) settings for the egress queues, use the show mls qos queue-set command in EXEC mode.

show mls qos queue-set [ qset-id ]


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the LAN Base image.


 
Syntax Description

qset-id

(Optional) ID of the queue-set. Each port belongs to a queue-set, which defines all the characteristics of the four egress queues per port. The range is 1 to 2.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.nway

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mls qos queue-set command:

Switch> show mls qos queue-set
Queueset: 1
Queue : 1 2 3 4
----------------------------------------------
buffers : 25 25 25 25
threshold1: 100 200 100 100
threshold2: 100 200 100 100
reserved : 50 50 50 50
maximum : 400 400 400 400
Queueset: 2
Queue : 1 2 3 4
----------------------------------------------
buffers : 25 25 25 25
threshold1: 100 200 100 100
threshold2: 100 200 100 100
reserved : 50 50 50 50
maximum : 400 400 400 400

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mls qos queue-set output buffers

Allocates buffers to the queue-set.

mls qos queue-set output threshold

Configures the weighted tail-drop (WTD) thresholds, guarantees the availability of buffers, and configures the maximum memory allocation of the queue-set.

show mls qos vlan

To display the policy maps attached to a switch virtual interface (SVI), use the show mls qos vlan command in EXEC mode.

show mls qos vlan vlan-id


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the LAN Base image.


 
Syntax Description

vlan-id

The VLAN ID of the SVI to display the policy maps. The range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The output from the show mls qos vlan command is meaningful only when VLAN-based quality of service (QoS) is enabled and when hierarchical policy maps are configured.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mls qos vlan command:

Switch> show mls qos vlan 10
Vlan10
Attached policy-map for Ingress:pm-test-pm-2

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports and enters policy-map configuration mode.

show monitor

To display information about all Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) and Remote SPAN (RSPAN) sessions on the switch, use the show monitor command in EXEC mode. Use the command with keywords to show a specific session, all sessions, all local sessions, or all remote sessions.

show monitor [ session { session_number | all | local | range list | remote } [ detail ]]

 
Syntax Description

session

(Optional) Displays information about specified SPAN sessions.

session_number

Specifies the number of the SPAN or RSPAN session. The range is 1 to 66.

all

Displays all SPAN sessions.

local

Displays only local SPAN sessions.

range list

Displays a range of SPAN sessions, where list is the range of valid sessions, e ither a single session or a range of sessions described by two numbers, the lower one first, separated by a hyphen. Do not enter any spaces between comma-separated parameters or in hyphen-specified ranges.

Note This keyword is available only in privileged EXEC mode.

remote

Displays only remote SPAN sessions.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed information about the specified sessions.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

The output is the same for the show monitor command and the show monitor session all command.

Examples

This is an example of output for the show monitor EXEC command:

Switch# show monitor
Session 1
---------
Type : Local Session
Source Ports :
RX Only : Fa1/1
Both : Fa2/2-3,Fa2/5-6
Destination Ports : Fa1/2
Encapsulation : Replicate
Ingress : Disabled
 
Session 2
---------
Type : Remote Source Session
Source VLANs :
TX Only : 10
Both : 1-9
Dest RSPAN VLAN : 105
 

This is an example of output for the show monitor EXEC command for local SPAN source session 1:

Switch# show monitor session 1
Session 1
---------
Type : Local Session
Source Ports :
RX Only : Fa1/1
Both : Fa2/2-3,Fa2/5-6
Destination Ports : Fa2/8
Encapsulation : Replicate
Ingress : Disabled
 

This is an example of output for the show monitor session all EXEC command when ingress traffic forwarding is enabled:

Switch# show monitor session all
Session 1
---------
Type : Local Session
Source Ports :
Both : Fa1/2
Destination Ports : Fa1/3
Encapsulation : Native
Ingress : Enabled, default VLAN = 5
Ingress encap : DOT1Q
 
Session 2
---------
Type : Local Session
Source Ports :
Both : Fa1/5
Destination Ports : Fa1/8
Encapsulation : Replicate
Ingress : Enabled, default VLAN = 4
Ingress encap : Untagged

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

monitor session

Starts or modifies a SPAN or RSPAN session.

show mvr

To display the current Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) global parameter values, including whether or not MVR is enabled, the MVR multicast VLAN, the maximum query response time, the number of multicast groups, and the MVR mode (dynamic or compatible), use the show mvr command in Privileged EXEC mode without keywords.

show mvr

 
Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mvr command:

Switch# show mvr
MVR Running: TRUE
MVR multicast VLAN: 1
MVR Max Multicast Groups: 256
MVR Current multicast groups: 0
MVR Global query response time: 5 (tenths of sec)
MVR Mode: compatible
 

In the preceding display, the maximum number of multicast groups is fixed at 256. The MVR mode is either compatible (for interoperability with Catalyst 2900 XL and Catalyst 3500 XL switches) or dynamic (where operation is consistent with IGMP snooping operation and dynamic MVR membership on source ports is supported).

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mvr (global configuration)

Enables and configures multicast VLAN registration on the switch.

mvr (interface configuration)

Configures MVR ports.

show mvr interface

Displays the configured MVR interfaces, status of the specified interface, or all multicast groups to which the interface belongs when the interface and members keywords are appended to the command.

show mvr members

Displays all ports that are members of an MVR multicast group or, if there are no members, means the group is inactive.

show mvr interface

To display the Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) receiver and source ports, use the show mvr interface command in Privileged EXEC mode without keywords. Use the command with keywords to display MVR parameters for a specific receiver port.

show mvr interface [ interface-id [ members [ vlan vlan-id ]]]

 
Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) Specified interface.

Valid interfaces include physical ports (including type, module, and port number.

members

(Optional) Displays all MVR groups to which the specified interface belongs.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays all MVR group members on this VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If the entered port identification is a non-MVR port or a source port, the command returns an error message. For receiver ports, it displays the port type, per port status, and Immediate-Leave setting.

If you enter the members keyword, all MVR group members on the interface appear. If you enter a VLAN ID, all MVR group members in the VLAN appear.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mvr interface command:

Switch# show mvr interface
Port Type Status Immediate Leave
---- ---- ------- ---------------
Gi1/1 SOURCE ACTIVE/UP DISABLED
Gi1/2 RECEIVER ACTIVE/DOWN DISABLED
 

In the preceding display, Status is defined as follows:

  • Active means the port is part of a VLAN.
  • Up/Down means that the port is forwarding/nonforwarding.
  • Inactive means that the port is not yet part of any VLAN.

This is an example of output from the show mvr interface command for a specified port:

Switch# show mvr interface gigabitethernet1/2
Type: RECEIVER Status: ACTIVE Immediate Leave: DISABLED
 

This is an example of output from the show mvr interface interface-id members command:

Switch# show mvr interface gigabitethernet1/2 members
239.255.0.0 DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.1 DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.2 DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.3 DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.4 DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.5 DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.6 DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.7 DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.8 DYNAMIC ACTIVE
239.255.0.9 DYNAMIC ACTIVE

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mvr (global configuration)

Enables and configures multicast VLAN registration on the switch.

mvr (interface configuration)

Configures MVR ports.

show mvr

Displays the global MVR configuration on the switch.

show mvr members

Displays all receiver ports that are members of an MVR multicast group.

show mvr members

To display all receiver and source ports that are currently members of an IP multicast group, use the show mvr members command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show mvr member s [ ip-address ]

 
Syntax Description

ip-address

(Optional) The IP multicast address. If the address is entered, all receiver and source ports that are members of the multicast group appear. If no address is entered, all members of all Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) groups are listed. If a group has no members, the group is listed as Inactive.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The show mvr members command applies to receiver and source ports. For MVR-compatible mode, all source ports are members of all multicast groups.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mvr members command:

Switch# show mvr members
MVR Group IP Status Members
------------ ------ -------
239.255.0.1 ACTIVE Gi1/1(d), Gi1/2(s)
239.255.0.2 INACTIVE None
239.255.0.3 INACTIVE None
239.255.0.4 INACTIVE None
239.255.0.5 INACTIVE None
239.255.0.6 INACTIVE None
239.255.0.7 INACTIVE None
239.255.0.8 INACTIVE None
239.255.0.9 INACTIVE None
239.255.0.10 INACTIVE None
 
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show mvr members ip-address command. It displays the members of the IP multicast group with that address:

Switch# show mvr members 239.255.0.2
239.255.003.--22 ACTIVE Gi1/1(d), Gi1/2(d), Gi1/3(d),
Gi1/4(d), Gi1/5(s)

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mvr (global configuration)

Enables and configures multicast VLAN registration on the switch.

mvr (interface configuration)

Configures MVR ports.

show mvr

Displays the global MVR configuration on the switch.

show mvr interface

Displays the configured MVR interfaces, status of the specified interface, or all multicast groups to which the interface belongs when the members keyword is appended to the command.

show network-policy profile

To display the network-policy profiles, use the show network policy profile command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show network-policy profile [ profile number ] [ detail ]


Note To use this command, the switch must be running the LAN Base image.


 
Syntax Description

profile number

(Optional) Displays the network-policy profile number. If no profile is entered, all network-policy profiles appear.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed status and statistics information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show network-policy profile command:

Switch# show network-policy profile
Network Policy Profile 10
voice vlan 17 cos 4
Interface:
none
Network Policy Profile 30
voice vlan 30 cos 5
Interface:
none
Network Policy Profile 36
voice vlan 4 cos 3
Interface:
Interface_id
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

network-policy

Applies a network-policy to an interface.

network-policy profile (global configuration)

Creates the network-policy profile.

network-policy profile (network-policy configuration)

Configures the attributes of network-policy profiles.

show nmsp

To display the Network Mobility Services Protocol (NMSP) information for the switch, use the show nmsp command in Privileged EXEC mode. This command is available only when your switch is running the cryptographic (encrypted) software image.

show nmsp { attachment suppress interface | capability | notification interval | statistics { connection | summary } | status | subscription { detail | summary} }

 
Syntax Description

attachment suppress interface

Displays attachment suppress interfaces.

capability

Displays switch capabilities including the supported services and subservices.

notification interval

Displays the notification intervals of the supported services.

statistics connection | summary

Displays the NMSP statistics information.

  • connection —Displays the message counters on each connection.
  • summary —Displays the global counters.

status

Displays information about the NMSP connections.

subscription detail | summary

Displays the subscription information on each NMSP connection.

  • detail —Displays all services and subservices subscribed on each connection.
  • summary —Displays all services subscribed on each connection.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show nmsp attachment suppress interface command:

Switch# show nmsp attachment suppress interface
NMSP Attachment Suppression Interfaces
--------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/1
GigabitEthernet1/2
 

This is an example of output from the show nmsp capability command:

Switch# show nmsp capability
NMSP Switch Capability
------------------------------
Service Subservice
----------- --------------
Attachment Wired Station
Location Subscription
 

This is an example of output from the show nmsp notification interval command:

Switch# show nmsp notification interval
NMSP Notification Intervals
----------------------------------
Attachment notify interval: 30 sec (default)
Location notify interval: 30 sec (default)
 

This is an example of output from the show nmsp statistics connection and show nmsp statistics summary commands:

Switch# show nmsp statistics connection
NMSP Connection Counters
----------------------------------
Connection 1:
Connection status: UP
Freed connection: 0
 
Tx message count Rx message count
----------------------- -----------------------
Subscr Resp: 1 Subscr Req: 1
Capa Notif: 1 Capa Notif: 1
Atta Resp: 1 Atta Req: 1
Atta Notif: 0
Loc Resp: 1 Loc Req: 1
Loc Notif: 0
Unsupported msg: 0
 
Switch# show nmsp statistics summary
NMSP Global Counters
----------------------------
Send too big msg: 0
Failed socket write: 0
Partial socket write: 0
Socket write would block: 0
Failed socket read: 0
Socket read would block: 0
Transmit Q full: 0
Max Location Notify Msg: 0
Max Attachment Notify Msg: 0
Max Tx Q Size: 0
 

This is an example of output from the show nmsp status command:

Switch# show nmsp status
NMSP Status
----------------
NMSP: enabled
MSE IP Address TxEchoResp RxEchoReq TxData RxData
172.19.35.109 5 5 4 4
 

This is an example of output from the show nmsp show subscription detail and the show nmsp show subscription summary commands:

Switch# show nmsp subscription detail
Mobility Services Subscribed by 172.19.35.109:
Services Subservices
----------------- -------------------
Attachment: Wired Station
Location: Subscription
 
Switch# show nmsp subscription summary
Mobility Services Subscribed:
MSE IP Address Services
-------------------- ---------------------
172.19.35.109 Attachment, Location
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear nmsp statistics

Clears the NMSP statistic counters.

nmsp

Enables Network Mobility Services Protocol (NMSP) on the switch.

show pagp

To display Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) channel-group information, use the show pagp command in EXEC mode.

show pagp [ channel-group-number ] { counters | dual-active | internal | neighbor }

 
Syntax Description

channel-group - number

(Optional) Number of the channel group. The range is 1 to 6.

counters

Displays traffic information.

dual-active

Displays the dual-active status.

internal

Displays internal information.

neighbor

Displays neighbor information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You can enter any show pagp command to display the active channel-group information. To display the nonactive information, enter the show pagp command with a channel-group number.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output are appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show pagp 1 counters command:

Switch> show pagp 1 counters
Information Flush
Port Sent Recv Sent Recv
--------------------------------------
Channel group: 1
Gi1/1 45 42 0 0
Gi1/2 45 41 0 0
 

This is an example of output from the show pagp 1 internal command:

Switch> show pagp 1 internal
Flags: S - Device is sending Slow hello. C - Device is in Consistent state.
A - Device is in Auto mode.
Timers: H - Hello timer is running. Q - Quit timer is running.
S - Switching timer is running. I - Interface timer is running.
 
Channel group 1
Hello Partner PAgP Learning Group
Port Flags State Timers Interval Count Priority Method Ifindex
Gi1/1 SC U6/S7 H 30s 1 128 Any 16
Gi1/2 SC U6/S7 H 30s 1 128 Any 16
 

This is an example of output from the show pagp 1 neighbor command:

Switch> show pagp 1 neighbor
Flags: S - Device is sending Slow hello. C - Device is in Consistent state.
A - Device is in Auto mode. P - Device learns on physical port.
 
Channel group 1 neighbors
Partner Partner Partner Partner Group
Port Name Device ID Port Age Flags Cap.
Gi1/1 switch-p2 0002.4b29.4600 Gi0/1 9s SC 10001
Gi1/2 switch-p2 0002.4b29.4600 Gi0/2 24s SC 10001
 

This is an example of output from the show pagp dual-active command:

Switch> show pagp dual-active
PAgP dual-active detection enabled: Yes
PAgP dual-active version: 1.1
 
Channel group 1
Dual-Active Partner Partner Partner
Port Detect Capable Name Port Version
Gi1/1 No Switch Gi1/3 N/A
 
<output truncated>

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear pagp

Clears PAgP channel-group information.

show parser macro

To display the parameters for all configured macros or for one macro on the switch, use the show parser macro command in EXEC mode.

show parser macro [ { brief | description [ interface interface-id ] | name word }]

 
Syntax Description

brief

(Optional) Displays the name of each macro.

description interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays all macro descriptions or the description of a specific interface.

name word

(Optional) Displays information about a single macro identified by the macro name.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is a partial output example from the show parser macro command. The output for the Cisco-default macros varies depending on the switch platform and the software image running on the switch:

 
Switch# show parser macro
<output truncated>
 
Macro name : cisco-ie-global
Macro type : default global
#global macro name cisco-ie-global macro
#macro description cisco-ie-global
# Access List and Policy May for CIP QoS
access-list 101 permit udp any eq 2222 any dscp 55
access-list 102 permit udp any eq 2222 any dscp 47
access-list 103 permit udp any eq 2222 any dscp 43
access-list 104 permit udp any eq 2222 any
access-list 105 permit udp any eq 44818 any
access-list 105 permit tcp any eq 44818 any
access-list 106 permit udp any eq 319 any
access-list 107 permit udp any eq 320 any
 
class-map match-all CIP-Implicit_dscp_55
match access-group 101
class-map match-all CIP-Implicit_dscp_47
match access-group 102
class-map match-all CIP-Implicit_dscp_43
match access-group 103
class-map match-all CIP-Implicit_dscp_any
match access-group 104
class-map match-all CIP-Other
match access-group 105
class-map match-all 1588-PTP-Event
match access-group 106
class-map match-all 1588-PTP-General
match access-group 107
<output truncated>
--------------------------------------------------------------
Macro name : cisco-ethernetip
Macro type : default interface
#macro keywords $access_vlan
#macro name cisco-ethernetip
#macro description cisco-ethernetip
switchport host
switchport access vlan $access_vlan
storm-control broadcast level 3.00 1.00
service-policy input CIP-PTP-Traffic
priority-queue out
srr-queue bandwidth share 1 19 40 40
<output truncated>
--------------------------------------------------------------
Macro name : cisco-ie-desktop
Macro type : default interface
# macro keywords $access_vlan
#macro name cisco-ie-desktop
switchport mode access
switchport access vlan $access_vlan
switchport port-security
switchport port-security maximum 1
switchport port-security aging time 2
switchport port-security violation restrict
no switchport port-security aging type inactivity
no switchport access vlan
no switchport mode access
no spanning-tree portfast
no spanning-tree bpduguard enable
no macro description
--------------------------------------------------------------
Macro name : cisco-ie-switch
Macro type : default interface
# macro keywords $native_vlan
#macro name: cisco-ie-switch
switchport mode trunk
switchport trunk native vlan $native_vlan
spanning-tree link-type point-to-point
mls qos trust cos
service-policy input CIP-PTP-Traffic
priority-queue out
srr-queue bandwidth share 1 19 40 40
no macro description
macro description cisco-ie-switch
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show parser macro name command:

Switch# show parser macro name standard-switch10
Macro name : standard-switch10
Macro type : customizable
macro description standard-switch10
# Trust QoS settings on VOIP packets
auto qos voip trust
# Allow port channels to be automatically formed
channel-protocol pagp
 

This is an example of output from the show parser macro brief command:

Switch# show parser macro brief
<output truncated>
default global : cisco-ie-global
default interface: cisco-ethernetip
default interface: cisco-ie-desktop
default interface: cisco-ie-switch
default interface: cisco-ie-router
default interface: cisco-ie-phone
default interface: cisco-ie-wireless
Switch#
 

This is an example of output from the show parser description command:

Switch# show parser macro description
Global Macro(s): cisco-global
Interface Macro Description(s)
--------------------------------------------------------------
Gi1/1 standard-switch10
Gi1/2 this is test macro
--------------------------------------------------------------
 

This is an example of output from the show parser description interface command:

Switch# show parser macro description interface gigabitethernet1/2
Interface Macro Description
--------------------------------------------------------------
Gi1/2 this is test macro
--------------------------------------------------------------

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

macro apply

Applies a macro on an interface or applies and traces a macro on an interface.

macro description

Adds a description about the macros that are applied to an interface.

macro global

Applies a macro on a switch or applies and traces a macro on a switch.

macro global description

Adds a description about the macros that are applied to the switch.

macro name

Creates a macro.

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration, including defined macros. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

show policy-map

To display quality of service (QoS) policy maps, which define classification criteria for incoming traffic, use the show policy-map command in EXEC mode. Policy maps can include policers that specify the bandwidth limitations and the action to take if the limits are exceeded.

show policy-map [ policy-map-name [ class class-map-name ]]

 
Syntax Description

policy-map-name

(Optional) The specified policy-map name.

class class-map-name

(Optional) Displays QoS policy actions for a individual class.


Note Though visible in the command-line help string, the control-plane and interface keywords are not supported, and the statistics shown in the display should be ignored.


 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show policy-map command:

Switch> show policy-map
Policy Map videowizard_policy2
class videowizard_10-10-10-10
set dscp 34
police 100000000 2000000 exceed-action drop
 
Policy Map mypolicy
class dscp5
set dscp 6

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

show port-security

To display port-security settings for an interface or for the switch, use the show port-security command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show port-security [ interface interface-id ] [ address | vlan ]

 
Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays port security settings for the specified interface. Valid interfaces include physical ports (including type, module, and port number).

address

(Optional) Displays all secure MAC addresses on all ports or a specified port.

vlan

(Optional) Displays port security settings for all VLANs on the specified interface.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If you enter the command without keywords, the output includes the administrative and operational status of all secure ports on the switch.

If you enter an interface-id, the command displays port security settings for the interface.

If you enter the address keyword, the command displays the secure MAC addresses for all interfaces and the aging information for each secure address.

If you enter an interface-id and the address keyword, the command displays all the MAC addresses for the interface with aging information for each secure address. You can also use this command to display all the MAC addresses for an interface even if you have not enabled port security on it.

If you enter the vlan keyword, the command displays the configured maximum and the current number of secure MAC addresses for all VLANs on the interface.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of the output from the show port-security command:

Switch# show port-security
Secure Port MaxSecureAddr CurrentAddr SecurityViolation Security Action
(Count) (Count) (Count)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Gi1/1 1 0 0 Shutdown
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Addresses in System (excluding one mac per port) : 1
Max Addresses limit in System (excluding one mac per port) : 6272
 

This is an example of output from the show port-security interface interface-id command:

Switch# show port-security interface gigabitethernet1/1
Port Security : Enabled
Port status : SecureUp
Violation mode : Shutdown
Maximum MAC Addresses : 1
Total MAC Addresses : 0
Configured MAC Addresses : 0
Aging time : 0 mins
Aging type : Absolute
SecureStatic address aging : Disabled
Security Violation count : 0
 

This is an example of output from the show port-security address command:

Switch# show port-security address
Secure Mac Address Table
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Vlan Mac Address Type Ports Remaining Age
(mins)
---- ----------- ---- ----- -------------
1 0006.0700.0800 SecureConfigured Gi1/2 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Addresses in System (excluding one mac per port) : 1
Max Addresses limit in System (excluding one mac per port) : 6272
 

This is an example of output from the show port-security interface gigabitethernet 1 /2 address command:

Switch# show port-security interface gigabitethernet1/2 address
Secure Mac Address Table
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Vlan Mac Address Type Ports Remaining Age
(mins)
---- ----------- ---- ----- -------------
1 0006.0700.0800 SecureConfigured Gi1/2 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Addresses: 1
 

This is an example of output from the show port-security interface interface-id vlan command:

Switch# show port-security interface gigabitethernet1/2 vlan
Default maximum:not set, using 5120
VLAN Maximum Current
5 default 1
10 default 54
11 default 101
12 default 101
13 default 201
14 default 501

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear port-security

Deletes from the MAC address table a specific type of secure address or all the secure addresses on the switch or an interface.

switchport port-security

Enables port security on a port, restricts the use of the port to a user-defined group of stations, and configures secure MAC addresses.

show profinet

To display information about the PROFINET sessions on the switch, use the show profinet command in EXEC mode.

show profinet { alarm | lldp | session | status }

 
Syntax Description

alarm

Displays PROFINET alarms.

lldp

Displays PROFINET Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).

session

Displays PROFINET sessions.

status

Displays PROFINET status.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When LLDP and PROFINET are enabled, this command shows the physical ports that are sending and receiving PROFINET-formatted LLDP packets.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output are not displayed, but the lines that contain Output are displayed.

Examples

This example shows how to display PROFINET alarms:

Switch> show profinet alarm
Monitoring of Profinet Switch Alarms
RPS Alarm: -
CF Alarm: -
Primary Temperature Alarm: -
Secondary Temperature Alarm: -
Major Relay Alarm: -
Minor Relay Alarm: -
Monitoring of Profinet Port Alarms
Port Link Fault Not Forwarding Not Operating FCS Error
Fa1/1 - - - -
Fa1/2 - - - -
Fa1/3 - - - -
Fa1/4 - - - -
Fa1/5 - - - -
Fa1/6 - - - -
Fa1/7 - - - -
Fa1/8 - - - -
Gi1/1 - - - -
Gi1/2 - - - -
 

This example shows how to display PROFINET LLDP:

Switch> show profinet lldp
Fa1/1 port-003 Off
Fa1/2 port-004 Off
Fa1/3 port-005 Off
Fa1/4 port-006 Off
Fa1/5 port-007 Off
Fa1/6 port-008 Off
Fa1/7 port-009 Off
Fa1/8 port-010 Off
Gi1/1 port-001 Off
Gi1/2 port-002 Off
Switch>
 

This example shows how to display a PROFINET session:

Switch> show profinet session
Session #1
----------
Connected: No
Number Of IO CR's: 0
Number Of DiffModules: 0
 

This example shows how to display the PROFINET status:

Switch> show profinet status
State : Enabled
Vlan : 1
Id : IE2000-8TC
Connected : Yes
ReductRatio : 512
GSD version : Match
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

debug profinet alarm

Enables debugging of the PROFINET alarms.

debug profinet cyclic

Displays the function calls related to sending and receiving PROFINET cyclic packets.

debug profinet error

Enables debugging of the PROFINET session errors.

debug profinet packet

Enables debugging of the PROFINET packets.

debug profinet platform

Enables debugging of the interaction between the Cisco IOS software and PROFINET.

debug profinet topology

Displays the received PROFINET topology packets.

debug profinet trace

Displays a group of traced debug output logs.

profinet

Enables the PROFINET feature on the switch.

show debugging

Displays information about the types of debugging that are enabled. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

show psp config

To display the status of protocol storm protection configured for a specific protocol on a VLAN, use the show psp config command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show psp config { arp | dhcp | igmp }

 
Syntax Description

arp

Displays protocol storm protection status for ARP and ARP snooping.

dhcp

Displays protocol storm protection status for DHCP and DHCP snooping.

igmp

Displays protocol storm protection status for IGMP and IGMP snooping.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show psp config dhcp command with protocol storm protection configured to drop packets when the incoming rate exceeds 35 packets per second.

Switch# show psp config dhcp
 
-----------------------------------
PSP Protocol Configuration Summary:
-----------------------------------
 
DHCP Rate Limit : 35 packets/sec
PSP Action : Packet Drop

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear psp counter

Clears the counter of dropped packets.

psp { arp | dhcp | igmp } pps value

Configures protocol storm protection for ARP, DHCP, or IGMP.

show psp statistics

Displays the number of dropped packets when protocol storm protection is configured.

show psp statistics

To display the number of packets dropped for all protocols when protocol storm protection is configured, use the show psp statistics command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show psp statistics [ arp | dhcp | igmp ]

 
Syntax Description

arp

(Optional) Displays the number of packets dropped for ARP and ARP snooping.

dhcp

(Optional) Displays the number of packets dropped for DHCP and DHCP snooping.

igmp

(Optional) Displays the number of packets dropped for IGMP and IGMP snooping.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show psp statistics dhcp command when protocol storm protection is configured for DHCP. The output shows that 13 packets were dropped.

Switch# show psp statistics dhcp
 
----------------------------------
PSP Protocol Drop Counter Summary:
----------------------------------
DHCP Drop Counter: 13

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear psp counter

Clears the counter of dropped packets.

psp { arp | dhcp | igmp } pps value

Configures protocol storm protection for ARP, DHCP, or IGMP.

show psp config

Displays the protocol storm protection configuration.

show ptp

To view the global Precision Time Protocol (PTP) properties. use the show ptp command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show ptp { clock | foreign-master-record | parent | time-property }

 
Syntax Description

clock

Displays the PTP clock properties.

foreign-master-record

Displays the foreign master data set.

parent

Displays the parent and grandmaster properties.

time-property

Displays the PTP time properties.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Default

There are no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The show ptp foreign-master-record command applies to boundary clock mode, even though the command also appears in end-to-end transparent mode.

If you enter the show ptp clock or show ptp port privileged EXEC command when the switch is in PTP forward mode, an error message states that no information is available.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ptp clock command:

Switch# show ptp clock
PTP CLOCK INFO
PTP Device Type: Boundary clock
Clock Identity: 0x0:9:B7:FF:FE:FF:F3:0
Clock Domain: 0
Number of PTP ports: 10
Priority1: 128
Priority2: 128
Clock Quality:
Class: 248
Accuracy: Unknown
Offset (log variance): N/A
Offset From Master: 0
Mean Path Delay: 490
Steps Removed: 1
Local clock time: 18:49:38 UTC Mar 7 1993
 

This is an example of output from the show ptp parent command:

Switch# show ptp parent
PTP PARENT PROPERTIES
Parent Clock:
Parent Clock Identity: 0x0:1E:13:FF:FE:0:28:0
Parent Port Number: 1
Observed Parent Offset (log variance): N/A
Observed Parent Clock Phase Change Rate: N/A
 
Grandmaster Clock:
Grandmaster Clock Identity: 0x0:1E:13:FF:FE:0:28:0
Grandmaster Clock Quality:
Class: 248
Accuracy: Unknown
Offset (log variance): N/A
Priority1: 127
Priority2: 128
 

This is an example of output from the show ptp time-property command:

Switch# show ptp time-property
PTP CLOCK TIME PROPERTY:
Current UTC Offset valid: 0
Current UTC Offset: 0
Leap59: 0
Leap61: 0
Time Traceable: 16
Frequency Traceable: 32
PTP Timescale: 1
Time Source: Internal Oscillator
 

This is an example of output from the show ptp foreign-master-record command:

Switch# show ptp foreign-master-record
PTP FOREIGN MASTER RECORDS
Interface FastEthernet1/1
Foreign Master Clock Identity: FF:EE:DD:FF:FE:CC:BB:AA
Foreign Master Port Number: 4
Number of Announce Messages: 3
Message Received Port: 1
Most Recent Time stamps: 73097688078005270, 73097687836293940
Interface FastEthernet1/2
Empty
Interface FastEthernet1/3
Empty
Interface FastEthernet1/4
Empty
Interface GigabitEthernet1/1
Empty
Interface GigabitEthernet1/2
Foreign Master Clock Identity: 00:09:B7:FF:FE:FF:7D:80
Foreign Master Port Num: 6
Number of Announce messages: 3
Message received port: 6
Most Recent Time stamps: 73097687967991270, 73097687725402960

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

debug ptp

Enables debugging of PTP activity.

ptp (global configuration)

Sets the global PTP clock properties.

ptp (interface configuration)

Sets the PTP clock properties on an interface.

show ptp port

Displays the PTP properties on a port.

show ptp port

To view the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) port properties. use the show ptp port command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show ptp port [ FastEthernet interface | GigabitEthernet interface ]

 
Syntax Description

FastEthernet interface

(Optional) Displays the PTP FastEthernet properties on the specified port.

GigabitEthernet interface

(Optional) Displays the PTP Gigabit Ethernet properties on the specified port.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Default

There are no defaults.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ptp port FastEthernet 1/1 command:

Switch# show ptp port FastEthernet 1/1
PTP PORT DATASET: FastEthernet1/1
Port identity: clock identity: 0x0:9:B7:FF:FE:FF:F3:0
Port identity: port number: 1
PTP version: 2
Port state: SLAVE
Delay request interval(log mean): 5
Announce receipt time out: 3
Peer mean path delay: 0
Announce interval(log mean): 1
Sync interval(log mean): 0
Delay Mechanism: End to End
Peer delay request interval(log mean): 0
Sync fault limit: 50000

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

ptp (interface configuration)

Sets the PTP clock properties.

show ptp

Sets the PTP clock properties on a port.

debug ptp

Enables debugging of PTP activity.

show rep topology

To display Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) topology information for a segment or for all segments, including the primary and secondary edge ports in the segment, use the show rep topology command in EXEC mode.

show rep topology [ segment segment_id ] [ archive ] [ detail ]

 
Syntax Description

segment segment-id

(Optional) Displays REP topology information for the specified segment. The ID range is from 1 to 1024.

archive

(Optional) Displays the previous topology of the segment. This keyword can be useful for troubleshooting a link failure.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed REP topology information.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

In the show rep topology command output, ports configured as edge no-neighbor are designated with an asterisk (*) in front of Pri or Sec. In the output of the show rep topology detail command, No-Neighbor is spelled out.

The output of this command is also included in the show tech-support privileged EXEC command output.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output are not displayed, but the lines that contain Output are displayed.

Examples

This is a sample output from the show rep topology segment privileged EXEC command:

Switch # show rep topology segment 1
REP Segment 1
BridgeName PortName Edge Role
---------------- ---------- ---- ----
sw1_multseg_3750 Gi1/1/1 Pri Alt
sw3_multseg_3400 Gi1/13 Open
sw3_multseg_3400 Gi1/14 Alt
sw4_multseg_3400 Gi0/13 Open
sw4_multseg_3400 Gi0/14 Open
sw5_multseg_3400 Gi1/13 Open
sw5_multseg_3400 Gi1/14 Open
sw2_multseg_3750 Gi1/0/2 Open
sw2_multseg_3750 Gi1/0/1 Open
sw1_multseg_3750 Gi1/0/2 Sec Open
 

This is a sample output from the show rep topology command when the edge ports are configured to have no REP neighbor:

Switch # show rep topology
REP Segment 2
BridgeName PortName Edge Role
---------------- ---------- ---- ----
sw8-ts8-51 Gi1/2 Pri* Open
sw9-ts11-50 Gi1/0/4 Open
sw9-ts11-50 Gi1/0/2 Open
sw1-ts11-45 Gi0/2 Alt
sw1-ts11-45 Po1 Open
sw8-ts8-51 Gi1/1 Sec* Open
 

This example shows output from the show rep topology detail command:

Switch# show rep topology detail
REP Segment 2
repc_2_24ts, Fa0/2 (Primary Edge)
Alternate Port, some vlans blocked
Bridge MAC: 0019.e714.5380
Port Number: 004
Port Priority: 080
Neighbor Number: 1 / [-10]
repc_3_12cs, Gi1/1 (Intermediate)
Open Port, all vlans forwarding
Bridge MAC: 001a.a292.3580
Port Number: 001
Port Priority: 000
Neighbor Number: 2 / [-9]
repc_3_12cs, Po10 (Intermediate)
Open Port, all vlans forwarding
Bridge MAC: 001a.a292.3580
Port Number: 080
Port Priority: 000
Neighbor Number: 3 / [-8]
repc_4_12cs, Po10 (Intermediate)
Open Port, all vlans forwarding
Bridge MAC: 001a.a19d.7c80
Port Number: 080
Port Priority: 000
Neighbor Number: 4 / [-7]
repc_4_12cs, Gi0/2 (Intermediate)
Alternate Port, some vlans blocked
Bridge MAC: 001a.a19d.7c80
Port Number: 002
Port Priority: 040
Neighbor Number: 5 / [-6]

<output truncated>
 

This example shows output from the show rep topology segment archive command:

Switch# show rep topology segment 1 archive
REP Segment 1
BridgeName PortName Edge Role
---------------- ---------- ---- ----
sw1_multseg_3750 Gi1/1/1 Pri Open
sw3_multseg_3400 Gi1/13 Open
sw3_multseg_3400 Gi1/14 Open
sw4_multseg_3400 Gi1/13 Open
sw4_multseg_3400 Gi1/14 Open
sw5_multseg_3400 Gi1/13 Open
sw5_multseg_3400 Gi1/14 Open
sw2_multseg_3750 Gi1/1/2 Alt
sw2_multseg_3750 Gi1/1/1 Open
sw1_multseg_3750 Gi1/1/2 Sec Open

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

rep segment

Enables REP on an interface and assigns a segment ID. This command is also used to configure a port as an edge port, a primary edge port, or a preferred port.

show sdm prefer

To display information about the Switch Database Management (SDM) templates that can be used to maximize allocating system resources for a particular feature, use the show sdm prefer command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show sdm prefer [ default | dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 { default | routing } qos | routing ]

 
Syntax Description

default

(Optional) Displays the template that balances system resources among features.

dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 default | routing

(Optional) Displays the dual templates that support both IPv4 and IPv6.

  • default— Displays the default dual template configuration.
  • routing— Displays the routing dual template configuration.

qos

(Optional) Displays the template that maximizes system resources for quality of service (QoS) access control entries (ACEs).

routing

(Optional) Displays the template that maximizes system resources for IPv4 routing.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When you change the SDM template by using the sdm prefer global configuration command, you must reload the switch for the configuration to take effect. If you enter the show sdm prefer command before you enter the reload privileged EXEC command, the show sdm prefer command shows the template currently in use and the template that will become active after a reload.

The numbers displayed for each template represent an approximate maximum number for each feature resource. The actual number might vary, depending on the actual number of other features configured.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show sdm prefer default command:

Switch# show sdm prefer default
"default" template:
The selected template optimizes the resources in the switch to support this level of features for
8 routed interfaces and 1024 VLANs.
number of unicast mac addresses: 12K
number of IPv4 IGMP groups + multicast routes: 1K
number of IPv4 unicast routes: 0
number of IPv4 policy based routing aces: 0
number of IPv4/MAC qos aces: 0.75K
number of IPv4/MAC security aces: 1K
 

This is an example of output from the show sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 command:

Switch# show sdm prefer qos
"qos" template:
The selected template optimizes the resources in
the switch to support this level of features for
0 routed interfaces and 1024 VLANs.
 
number of unicast mac addresses: 8K
number of IPv4 IGMP groups: 0.25K
number of IPv4/MAC qos aces: 0.625k
number of IPv4/MAC security aces: 0.125k
 

This is an example of output from the show sdm prefer routing command:

Switch# show sdm prefer routing
"routing" template:
The selected template optimizes the resources in
the switch to support this level of features for
8 routed interfaces and 1024 VLANs.
 
number of unicast mac addresses: 2K
number of IPv4 IGMP groups + multicast routes: 1K
number of IPv4 unicast routes: 4K
number of directly-connected IPv4 hosts: 2K
number of indirect IPv4 routes: 2K
number of IPv4 policy based routing aces: 0.5K
number of IPv4/MAC qos aces: 0.625k
number of IPv4/MAC security aces: 0.375k
 

This is an example of output from the show sdm prefer dual-ip4-and-ipv6 routing command:

Switch# show sdm prefer dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 routing
"dual-ipv4-and-ipv6 routing" template:
The selected template optimizes the resources in
the switch to support this level of features for
8 routed interfaces and 1024 VLANs.
 
number of unicast mac addresses: 1K
number of IPv4 IGMP groups + multicast routes: 0.5K
number of IPv4 unicast routes: 2K
number of directly-connected IPv4 hosts: 1K
number of indirect IPv4 routes: 1K
number of IPv6 multicast groups: 0.625k
number of directly-connected IPv6 addresses: 1K
number of indirect IPv6 unicast routes: 0.375k
number of IPv4 policy based routing aces: 0.125k
number of IPv4/MAC qos aces: 0.375k
number of IPv4/MAC security aces: 0.125k
number of IPv6 policy based routing aces: 0.125k
number of IPv6 qos aces: 0.125k
number of IPv6 security aces: 0.125k

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

sdm prefer

Sets the SDM template to maximize resources.

 

show setup express

To display if Express Setup mode is active on the switch, use the show setup express command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show setup express

 
Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show setup express co mmand:

Switch# show setup express
express setup mode is active

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

setup express

Enables Express Setup mode.

show spanning-tree

To display spanning-tree state information, use the show spanning-tree command in EXEC mode.

show spanning-tree [ bridge-group | active [ detail ] | backbonefast | blockedports | bridge | detail [ active ] | inconsistentports | interface interface-id | mst | pathcost method | root | summary [ totals ] | uplinkfast | vlan vlan-id ]

show spanning-tree bridge-group [ active [ detail ] | blockedports | bridge | detail [ active ] | inconsistentports | interface interface-id | root | summary ]

show spanning-tree vlan vlan-id [ active [ detail ] | blockedports | bridge | detail [ active ] | inconsistentports | interface interface-id | root | summary ]

show spanning-tree { vlan vlan-id | bridge-group } bridge [ address | detail | forward-time | hello-time | id | max-age | priority [ system-id ] | protocol ] ]

show spanning-tree { vlan vlan-id | bridge-group } root [ address | cost | detail | forward-time | hello-time | id | max-age | port | priority [ system-id ] ]

show spanning-tree interface interface-id [ active [ detail ] | cost | detail [ active ] | inconsistency | portfast | priority | rootcost | state ]

show spanning-tree mst [ configuration [digest]] | [ instance-id [ detail | interface interface-id [ detail ]]

 
Syntax Description

bridge-group

(Optional) The bridge group number. The range is 1 to 255.

active [ detail ]

(Optional) Displays spanning-tree information only on active interfaces (available only in privileged EXEC mode).

backbonefast

(Optional) Displays spanning-tree BackboneFast status.

blockedports

(Optional) Displays blocked port information (available only in privileged EXEC mode).

bridge [ address | detail | forward-time | hello-time | id | max-age | priority [ system-id ] | protocol ]

(Optional) Displays status and configuration of this switch (optional keywords available only in privileged EXEC mode).

detail [ active ]

(Optional) Displays a detailed summary of interface information (active keyword available only in privileged EXEC mode).

inconsistentports

(Optional) Displays inconsistent port information (available only in privileged EXEC mode).

interface interface-id [ active [ detail ] | cost | detail [ active ] | inconsistency | portfast | priority | rootcost | state ]

(Optional) Displays spanning-tree information for the specified interface (all options except portfast and state available only in privileged EXEC mode). Enter each interface separated by a space. Ranges are not supported. Valid interfaces include physical ports, VLANs, and port channels. The VLAN range is 1 to 4094. The port-channel range is 1 to 6.

mst [ configuration [ digest ]] [ instance-id [ detail | interface interface-id [ detail ]]

(Optional) Displays the multiple spanning-tree (MST) region configuration and status (available only in privileged EXEC mode).

The keywords have these meanings:

  • digest —(Optional) Displays the MD5 digest included in the current MST configuration identifier (MSTCI). Two separate digests, one for standard and one for prestandard switches, appear (available only in privileged EXEC mode).

The terminology was updated for the implementation of the IEEE standard, and the txholdcoun t field was added.

The new master role appears for boundary ports.

The word pre-standard or Pre-STD appears when an IEEE standard bridge sends prestandard BPDUs on a port.

The word pre-standard (config) or Pre-STD-Cf appears when a port has been configured to transmit prestandard BPDUs and no prestandard BPDU has been received on that port.

The word pre-standard (rcvd) or Pre-STD-Rx appears when a prestandard BPDU has been received on a port that has not been configured to transmit prestandard BPDUs.

A dispute flag appears when a designated port receives inferior designated information until the port returns to the forwarding state or ceases to be designated.

  • instance-id — Specifies a single instance ID, a range of IDs separated by a hyphen, or a series of IDs separated by a comma. The range is 1 to 4094. The display shows the number of currently configured instances.
  • interface interface-id —(Optional) Specifies valid interfaces, which include physical ports, VLANs, and port channels. The VLAN range is 1 to 4094. The port-channel range is 1 to 6.
  • detail —(Optional) Displays detailed information for the instance or interface.

pathcost method

(Optional) Displays the default path cost method (available only in privileged EXEC mode).

root [ address | cost | detail | forward-time | hello-time | id | max-age | port | priority [ system-id ] ]

(Optional) Displays root switch status and configuration (all keywords available only in privileged EXEC mode).

summary [ totals ]

(Optional) Displays a summary of port states or the total lines of the spanning-tree state section. The words IEEE Standard identify the MST version running on a switch.

uplinkfast

(Optional) Displays spanning-tree UplinkFast status.

vlan vlan-id [ active [ detail ] | backbonefast | blockedports | bridge [ address | detail | forward-time | hello-time | id | max-age | priority [ system-id ] | protocol ]

(Optional) Displays spanning-tree information for the specified VLAN (some keywords available only in privileged EXEC mode). You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma. The range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If the vlan-id variable is omitted, the command applies to the spanning-tree instance for all VLANs.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show spanning-tree active command:

Switch# show spanning-tree active
VLAN0001
Spanning tree enabled protocol ieee
Root ID Priority 32768
Address 0001.42e2.cdd0
Cost 3038
Port 24 (GigabitEthernet1/1)
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
 
Bridge ID Priority 49153 (priority 49152 sys-id-ext 1)
Address 0003.fd63.9580
Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec
Aging Time 300
Uplinkfast enabled
 
Interface Role Sts Cost Prio.Nbr Type
---------------- ---- --- --------- -------- --------------------------------
Gi1/1 Root FWD 3019 128.24 P2p
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show spanning-tree detail command:

Switch# show spanning-tree detail
VLAN0001 is executing the ieee compatible Spanning Tree protocol
Bridge Identifier has priority 49152, sysid 1, address 0003.fd63.9580
Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Current root has priority 32768, address 0001.42e2.cdd0
Root port is 1 (GigabitEthernet1/1), cost of root path is 3038
Topology change flag not set, detected flag not set
Number of topology changes 0 last change occurred 1d16h ago
Times: hold 1, topology change 35, notification 2
hello 2, max age 20, forward delay 15
Timers: hello 0, topology change 0, notification 0, aging 300
Uplinkfast enabled
 
Port 1 (GigabitEthernet1/1) of VLAN0001 is forwarding
Port path cost 3019, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.24.
Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.42e2.cdd0
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00d0.bbf5.c680
Designated port id is 128.25, designated path cost 19
Timers: message age 2, forward delay 0, hold 0
Number of transitions to forwarding state: 1
Link type is point-to-point by default
BPDU: sent 0, received 72364
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show spanning-tree interface interface-id command:

Switch# show spanning-tree interface gigabitethernet1/1
Vlan Role Sts Cost Prio.Nbr Type
---------------- ---- --- --------- -------- --------------------------------
VLAN0001 Root FWD 3019 128.24 P2p
 
Switch# show spanning-tree summary
Switch is in pvst mode
Root bridge for: none
EtherChannel misconfiguration guard is enabled
Extended system ID is enabled
Portfast is disabled by default
PortFast BPDU Guard is disabled by default
Portfast BPDU Filter is disabled by default
Loopguard is disabled by default
UplinkFast is enabled
BackboneFast is enabled
Pathcost method used is short
 
Name Blocking Listening Learning Forwarding STP Active
---------------------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- ----------
VLAN0001 1 0 0 11 12
VLAN0002 3 0 0 1 4
VLAN0004 3 0 0 1 4
VLAN0006 3 0 0 1 4
VLAN0031 3 0 0 1 4
VLAN0032 3 0 0 1 4
<output truncated>
---------------------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- ----------
37 vlans 109 0 0 47 156
Station update rate set to 150 packets/sec.
 
UplinkFast statistics
-----------------------
Number of transitions via uplinkFast (all VLANs) : 0
Number of proxy multicast addresses transmitted (all VLANs) : 0
 
BackboneFast statistics
-----------------------
Number of transition via backboneFast (all VLANs) : 0
Number of inferior BPDUs received (all VLANs) : 0
Number of RLQ request PDUs received (all VLANs) : 0
Number of RLQ response PDUs received (all VLANs) : 0
Number of RLQ request PDUs sent (all VLANs) : 0
Number of RLQ response PDUs sent (all VLANs) : 0
 

This is an example of output from the show spanning-tree mst configuration command:

Switch# show spanning-tree mst configuration
Name [region1]
Revision 1
Instance Vlans Mapped
-------- ------------------
0 1-9,21-4094
1 10-20
----------------------------
 

This is an example of output from the show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id command:

Switch# show spanning-tree mst interface gigabitethernet1/1
GigabitEthernet1/1 of MST00 is root forwarding
Edge port: no (default) port guard : none (default)
Link type: point-to-point (auto) bpdu filter: disable (default)
Boundary : boundary (STP) bpdu guard : disable (default)
Bpdus sent 5, received 74
 
Instance role state cost prio vlans mapped
0 root FWD 200000 128 1,12,14-4094
 

This is an example of output from the show spanning-tree mst 0 command:

Switch# show spanning-tree mst 0
###### MST00 vlans mapped: 1-9,21-4094
Bridge address 0002.4b29.7a00 priority 32768 (32768 sysid 0)
Root address 0001.4297.e000 priority 32768 (32768 sysid 0)
port Gi0/1 path cost 200038
port Gi1/1 path cost 200038
IST master *this switch
Operational hello time 2, forward delay 15, max age 20, max hops 20
Configured hello time 2, forward delay 15, max age 20, max hops 20
 
Interface role state cost prio type
-------------------- ---- ----- --------- ---- --------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/1 root FWD 200000 128 P2P bound(STP)
GigabitEthernet1/2 desg FWD 200000 128 P2P bound(STP)
Port-channel1 desg FWD 200000 128 P2P bound(STP)

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear spanning-tree counters

Clears the spanning-tree counters.

clear spanning-tree detected-protocols

Restarts the protocol migration process.

spanning-tree backbonefast

Enables the BackboneFast feature.

spanning-tree bpdufilter

Prevents an interface from sending or receiving bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).

spanning-tree bpduguard

Puts an interface in the error-disabled state when it receives a BPDU.

spanning-tree cost

Sets the path cost for spanning-tree calculations.

spanning-tree extend system-id

Enables the extended system ID feature.

spanning-tree guard

Enables the root guard or the loop guard feature for all the VLANs associated with the selected interface.

spanning-tree link-type

Overrides the default link-type setting for rapid spanning-tree transitions to the forwarding state.

spanning-tree loopguard default

Prevents alternate or root ports from becoming the designated port because of a failure that leads to a unidirectional link.

spanning-tree mst configuration

Enters multiple spanning-tree (MST) configuration mode through which the MST region configuration occurs.

spanning-tree mst cost

Sets the path cost for MST calculations.

spanning-tree mst forward-time

Sets the forward-delay time for all MST instances.

spanning-tree mst hello-time

Sets the interval between hello BPDUs sent by root switch configuration messages.

spanning-tree mst max-age

Sets the interval between messages that the spanning tree receives from the root switch.

spanning-tree mst max-hops

Sets the number of hops in an MST region before the BPDU is discarded and the information held for an interface is aged.

spanning-tree mst port-priority

Configures an interface priority.

spanning-tree mst priority

Configures the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance.

spanning-tree mst root

Configures the MST root switch priority and timers based on the network diameter.

spanning-tree port-priority

Configures an interface priority.

spanning-tree portfast (global configuration)

Globally enables the BPDU filtering or the BPDU guard feature on Port Fast-enabled interfaces or enables the Port Fast feature on all nontrunking interfaces.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration)

Enables the Port Fast feature on an interface and all its associated VLANs.

spanning-tree uplinkfast

Accelerates the choice of a new root port when a link or switch fails or when the spanning tree reconfigures itself.

spanning-tree vlan

Configures spanning tree on a per-VLAN basis.

show storm-control

To display broadcast, multicast, or unicast storm control settings on the switch or on the specified interface or to display storm-control history, use the show storm-control command in EXEC mode.

show storm-control [ interface-id ] [ broadcast | multicast | unicast ]

 
Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) Interface ID for the physical port (including type, module, and port number).

broadcast

(Optional) Displays broadcast storm threshold setting.

multicast

(Optional) Displays multicast storm threshold setting.

unicast

(Optional) Displays unicast storm threshold setting.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When you enter an interface-id, the storm control thresholds appear for the specified interface.

If you do not enter an interface-id, settings appear for one traffic type for all ports on the switch.

If you do not enter a traffic type, settings appear for broadcast storm control.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of a partial output from the show storm-control command when no keywords are entered. Because no traffic-type keyword was entered, the broadcast storm control settings appear.

Switch> show storm-control
Interface Filter State Upper Lower Current
--------- ------------- ---------- --------- ---------
Gi1/1 Forwarding 20 pps 10 pps 5 pps
Gi1/2 Forwarding 50.00% 40.00% 0.00%
<output truncated>
 

This is an example of output from the show storm-control command for a specified interface. Because no traffic-type keyword was entered, the broadcast storm control settings appear.

Switch> show storm-control gigabitethernet 1/1
Interface Filter State Upper Lower Current
--------- ------------- ---------- --------- ---------
Gi1/1 Forwarding 20 pps 10 pps 5 pps
 

Table 0-14 describes the fields in the show storm-control display.

 

Table 0-14 show storm-control Field Descriptions

Field
Description

Interface

Displays the ID of the interface.

Filter State

Displays the status of the filter:

  • Blocking—Storm control is enabled, and a storm has occurred.
  • Forwarding—Storm control is enabled, and no storms have occurred.
  • Inactive—Storm control is disabled.

Upper

Displays the rising suppression level as a percentage of total available bandwidth in packets per second or in bits per second.

Lower

Displays the falling suppression level as a percentage of total available bandwidth in packets per second or in bits per second.

Current

Displays the bandwidth usage of broadcast traffic or the specified traffic type (broadcast, multicast, or unicast) as a percentage of total available bandwidth. This field is only valid when storm control is enabled.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

storm-control

Sets the broadcast, multicast, or unicast storm control levels for the switch.

show system mtu

To display the global maximum transmission unit (MTU) or maximum packet size set for the switch, use the show system mtu command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show system mtu

 
Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If you have used the system mtu or system mtu jumbo global configuration command to change the MTU setting, the new setting does not take effect until you reset the switch.

The system MTU refers to ports operating at 10/100 Mb/s; the system jumbo MTU refers to Gigabit ports; the system routing MTU refers to routed ports.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show system mtu command:

Switch# show system mtu
System MTU size is 1500 bytes
System Jumbo MTU size is 1550 bytes
Routing MTU size is 1500 bytes.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

system mtu

Sets the MTU size for the Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, or routed ports.

show udld

To display UniDirectional Link Detection (UDLD) administrative and operational status for all ports or the specified port, use the show udld command in EXEC mode.

show udld [ interface-id ]

 
Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) ID of the interface and port number. Valid interfaces include physical ports and VLANs. The VLAN range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If you do not enter an interface-id, administrative and operational UDLD status for all interfaces appear.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show udld interface-id command. For this display, UDLD is enabled on both ends of the link, and UDLD detects that the link is bidirectional. Table 0-15 describes the fields in this display.

Switch> show udld gigabitethernet1/1
Interface gi1/1
---
Port enable administrative configuration setting: Follows device default
Port enable operational state: Enabled
Current bidirectional state: Bidirectional
Current operational state: Advertisement - Single Neighbor detected
Message interval: 60
Time out interval: 5
Entry 1
Expiration time: 146
Device ID: 1
Current neighbor state: Bidirectional
Device name: Switch-A
Port ID: Gi1/1
Neighbor echo 1 device: Switch-B
Neighbor echo 1 port: Gi1/2
Message interval: 5
CDP Device name: Switch-A
 

 

Table 0-15 show udld Field Descriptions

Field
Description

Interface

The interface on the local device configured for UDLD.

Port enable administrative configuration setting

How UDLD is configured on the port. If UDLD is enabled or disabled, the port enable configuration setting is the same as the operational enable state. Otherwise, the enable operational setting depends on the global enable setting.

Port enable operational state

Operational state that shows whether UDLD is actually running on this port.

Current bidirectional state

The bidirectional state of the link. An unknown state appears if the link is down or if it is connected to an UDLD-incapable device. A bidirectional state appears if the link is a normal two-way connection to a UDLD-capable device. All other values mean miswiring.

Current operational state

The current phase of the UDLD state machine. For a normal bidirectional link, the state machine is most often in the Advertisement phase.

Message interval

How often advertisement messages are sent from the local device. Measured in seconds.

Time out interval

The time period, in seconds, that UDLD waits for echoes from a neighbor device during the detection window.

Entry 1

Information from the first cache entry, which contains a copy of echo information received from the neighbor.

Expiration time

The amount of time in seconds remaining before this cache entry is aged out.

Device ID

The neighbor device identification.

Current neighbor state

The neighbor’s current state. If both the local and neighbor devices are running UDLD normally, the neighbor state and local state should be bidirectional. If the link is down or the neighbor is not UDLD-capable, no cache entries appear.

Device name

The device name or the system serial number of the neighbor. The system serial number appears if the device name is not set or is set to the default (Switch).

Port ID

The neighbor port ID enabled for UDLD.

Neighbor echo 1 device

The device name of the neighbors’ neighbor from which the echo originated.

Neighbor echo 1 port

The port number ID of the neighbor from which the echo originated.

Message interval

The rate, in seconds, at which the neighbor is sending advertisement messages.

CDP device name

The CDP device name or the system serial number. The system serial number appears if the device name is not set or is set to the default (Switch).

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

udld

Enables aggressive or normal mode in UDLD or sets the configurable message timer time.

udld port

Enables UDLD on an individual interface or prevents a fiber-optic interface from being enabled by the udld global configuration command.

udld reset

Resets all interfaces shutdown by UDLD and permits traffic to begin passing through them again.

show version

To display version information for the hardware and firmware, use the show version command in EXEC mode.

show version

 
Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples


Note Though visible in the show version output, the configuration register information is not supported on the switch.


This is an example of output from the show version command:

switch# show version
Cisco IOS Software, IES Software (IES-LANBASE-M), Version 15.0(1)EY, RELEASE SOFTWARE (fc2) Copyright (c) 1986-2008 by Cisco Systems, Inc.
Compiled Mon 19-May-08 12:47 by weiliu
Image text-base: 0x00003000, data-base: 0x01400000
 
ROM: Bootstrap program is IE 2000 boot loader
BOOTLDR: IES Boot Loader (IES-HBOOT-M), Version 15.0 [mchou-v122ldr0328 102]
 
Switch uptime is 2 days, 1 hour, 36 minutes System returned to ROM by power-on System image file is ''flash:/ies-lanbase-mz.122-44.EX/ies-lanbase-mz.122-44.EX.bin''
 
cisco IE-3000-4TC (PowerPC405) processor with 126976K/4088K bytes of memory.
Processor board ID FHK1152UZRW
Last reset from power-on
1 Virtual Ethernet interface
20 FastEthernet interfaces
2 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces
The password-recovery mechanism is enabled.
 
64K bytes of flash-simulated non-volatile configuration memory.
Base ethernet MAC Address : 00:1E:13:00:2D:00
Motherboard assembly number : 73-10855-07
Motherboard serial number : FOC115040S9
Motherboard revision number : 04
Model number : IE-3000-4TC
System serial number : FHK1152UZRW
Top Assembly Part Number : 800-28491-01
Hardware Board Revision Number : 0x02
CIP Serial Number : 0x43313135
SKU Brand Name : Cisco
 
Switch Ports Model SW Version SW Image
------ ----- ----- ---------- ----------
* 1 22 IE-3000-4TC 15.0(1)EY IES-LANBASE-M
 
Configuration register is 0xF
 

show vlan

To display the parameters for all configured VLANs or one VLAN (if the VLAN ID or name is specified) on the switch, use the show vlan command in EXEC mode.

show vlan [ brief | id vlan-id | internal usage | mtu | name vlan-name | remote-span | summary ]

 
Syntax Description

brief

(Optional) Displays one line for each VLAN with the VLAN name, status, and its ports.

id vlan-id

(Optional) Displays information about a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number. For vlan-id, the range is 1 to 4094.

internal usage

(Optional) Displays a list of VLANs being used internally by the switch. These VLANs are always from the extended range (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4094), and you cannot create VLANs with these IDS by using the vlan global configuration command until you remove them from internal use.

mtu

(Optional) Displays a list of VLANs and the minimum and maximum transmission unit (MTU) sizes configured on ports in the VLAN.

name vlan-name

(Optional) Displays information about a single VLAN identified by VLAN name. The VLAN name is an ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.

remote-span

(Optional) Displays information about Remote SPAN (RSPAN) VLANs.

summary

(Optional) Displays VLAN summary information.


Note Though visible in the command-line help string, the ifindex keyword is not supported.


 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

In the show vlan mtu command output, the MTU_Mismatch column shows whether all the ports in the VLAN have the same MTU. When yes appears in this column, it means that the VLAN has ports with different MTUs, and packets that are switched from a port with a larger MTU to a port with a smaller MTU might be dropped. If the VLAN does not have an SVI, the hyphen (-) symbol appears in the SVI_MTU column. If the MTU-Mismatch column displays yes, the names of the port with the MinMTU and the port with the MaxMTU appear.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show vlan command. Table 0-16 describes the fields in the display.

Switch> show vlan
VLAN Name Status Ports
---- -------------------------------- --------- -------------------------------
1 default active Fa1/1, Fa1/2, Fa1/3, Fa1/4
Fa2/1, Fa2/2, Fa2/3, Fa2/4
Fa2/5, Fa2/6, Fa2/7, Fa2/8
Fa3/1, Fa3/2, Fa3/3, Fa3/4
Fa3/5, Fa3/6, Fa3/7, Fa3/8
Gi1/1, Gi1/2
2 Tes active Fa1/3, Fa2/5, Fa2/6
1002 fddi-default act/unsup
1003 token-ring-default act/unsup
1004 fddinet-default act/unsup
1005 trnet-default act/unsup
 
VLAN Type SAID MTU Parent RingNo BridgeNo Stp BrdgMode Trans1 Trans2
---- ----- ---------- ----- ------ ------ -------- ---- -------- ------ ------
1 enet 100001 1500 - - - - - 0 0
2 enet 100002 1500 - - - - - 0 0
1002 fddi 101002 1500 - - - - - 0 0
1003 tr 101003 1500 - - - - - 0 0
1004 fdnet 101004 1500 - - - ieee - 0 0
1005 trnet 101005 1500 - - - ibm - 0 0
 
Remote SPAN VLANs
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
Primary Secondary Type Ports
------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------
20 25 isolated Fa1/13, Fa1/20, Fa1/22, Gi1/1,
20 30 community Fa1/1, Fa1/20, Fa1/21, Gi1/1,
 
VLAN Name Status Ports
---- -------------------------------- --------- -------------------------------
1 default active Fa0/1, Fa0/2, Fa0/3
Fa0/4, Fa0/5, Fa0/6
Fa0/7, Fa0/8, Fa0/9
Fa0/10, Fa0/11, Fa0/12
Fa0/13, Fa0/14, Fa0/15
Fa0/16, Fa0/17, Fa0/18
Fa0/19, Fa0/20, Fa0/21
Fa0/24, Gi0/1, Gi0/2
<output truncated>
 
2 VLAN0002 active
3 VLAN0003 active
 
<output truncated>
 
1000 VLAN1000 active
1002 fddi-default active
1003 token-ring-default active
1004 fddinet-default active
1005 trnet-default active
 
VLAN Type SAID MTU Parent RingNo BridgeNo Stp BrdgMode Trans1 Trans2
---- ----- ---------- ----- ------ ------ -------- ---- -------- ------ ------
1 enet 100001 1500 - - - - - 1002 1003
2 enet 100002 1500 - - - - - 0 0
3 enet 100003 1500 - - - - - 0 0
 
<output truncated>
 
1005 trnet 101005 1500 - - - ibm - 0 0
 
Remote SPAN VLANs
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
Primary Secondary Type Ports
------ --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------
 
Primary Secondary Type Ports
------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------
20 25 isolated Fa0/13, Fa0/20, Fa0/22, Gi0/1,
20 30 community Fa0/13, Fa0/20, Fa0/21, Gi0/1
20 35 community Fa0/13, Fa0/20, Fa0/23, Fa0/33, Gi0/1
 
<output truncated>
 

 

Table 0-16 show vlan Command Output Fields

Field
Description

VLAN

VLAN number.

Name

Name, if configured, of the VLAN.

Status

Status of the VLAN (active or suspend).

Ports

Ports that belong to the VLAN.

Type

Media type of the VLAN.

SAID

Security association ID value for the VLAN.

MTU

Maximum transmission unit size for the VLAN.

Parent

Parent VLAN, if one exists.

RingNo

Ring number for the VLAN, if applicable.

BrdgNo

Bridge number for the VLAN, if applicable.

Stp

Spanning Tree Protocol type used on the VLAN.

BrdgMode

Bridging mode for this VLAN—possible values are source-route bridging (SRB) and source-route transparent (SRT); the default is SRB.

Trans1

Translation bridge 1.

Trans2

Translation bridge 2.

Remote SPAN VLANs

Identifies any RSPAN VLANs that have been configured.

This is an example of output from the show vlan summary command:

Switch> show vlan summary
Number of existing VLANs : 45
Number of existing VTP VLANs : 45
Number of existing extended VLANs : 0
 

This is an example of output from the show vlan id command.

Switch# show vlan id 2
VLAN Name Status Ports
---- -------------------------------- --------- -------------------------------
2 VLAN0200 active Fa1/3, Fa2/5, Fa2/6
 
2 VLAN0200 active Fa1/3, Fa2/5, Fa2/6
VLAN Type SAID MTU Parent RingNo BridgeNo Stp BrdgMode Trans1 Trans2
---- ----- ---------- ----- ------ ------ -------- ---- -------- ------ ------
2 enet 100002 1500 - - - - - 0 0
 
Remote SPAN VLAN
----------------
Disabled
 

This is an example of output from the show vlan internal usage command. It shows that VLANs 1025 and 1026 are being used as internal VLANs for Fast Ethernet routed ports 23 and 24. If you want to use one of these VLAN IDs, you must first shut down the routed port, which releases the internal VLAN, and then create the extended-range VLAN. When you start up the routed port, another internal VLAN number is assigned to it.

Switch> show vlan internal usage
VLAN Usage
---- -------------
1025 FastEthernet1/23
1026 FastEthernet1/24

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

switchport mode

Configures the VLAN membership mode of a port.

vlan

Enables VLAN configuration mode where you can configure VLANs 1 to 4094.

show vlan access-map

To display information about a particular VLAN access map or for all VLAN access maps, use the show vlan access-map command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show vlan access-map [ mapname ]


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the IP services image.


 
Syntax Description

mapname

(Optional) Name of a specific VLAN access map.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show vlan access-map command:

Switch# show vlan access-map
Vlan access-map "SecWiz" 10
Match clauses:
ip address: SecWiz_Gi0_3_in_ip
ip address: SecWiz_Fa10_3_in_ip
 
Action:
forward

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show vlan filter

Displays information about all VLAN filters or about a particular VLAN or VLAN access map.

vlan access-map

Creates a VLAN map entry for VLAN packet filtering.

vlan filter

Applies a VLAN map to one or more VLANs.

show vlan filter

To display information about all VLAN filters or about a particular VLAN or VLAN access map, use the show vlan filter command in Privileged EXEC mode.

show vlan filter [ access-map name | vlan vlan-id ]


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the IP services image.


 
Syntax Description

access-map name

(Optional) Displays filtering information for the specified VLAN access map.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays filtering information for the specified VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show vlan filter command:

Switch# show vlan filter
VLAN Map map_1 is filtering VLANs:
20-22

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show vlan access-map

Displays information about a particular VLAN access map or for all VLAN access maps.

vlan access-map

Creates a VLAN map entry for VLAN packet filtering.

vlan filter

Applies a VLAN map to one or more VLANs.

show vmps

To display the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) version, reconfirmation interval, retry count, VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) IP addresses, and the current and primary servers, or use the statistics keyword to display client-side statistics, use the show vmps command in EXEC mode without keywords.

show vmps [ statistics ]

 
Syntax Description

statistics

(Optional) Displays VQP client-side statistics and counters.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show vmps command:

Switch> show vmps
VQP Client Status:
--------------------
VMPS VQP Version: 1
Reconfirm Interval: 60 min
Server Retry Count: 3
VMPS domain server:
 
Reconfirmation status
---------------------
VMPS Action: other
 

This is an example of output from the show vmps statistics command. Table 0-17 describes each field in the display.

Switch> show vmps statistics
VMPS Client Statistics
----------------------
VQP Queries: 0
VQP Responses: 0
VMPS Changes: 0
VQP Shutdowns: 0
VQP Denied: 0
VQP Wrong Domain: 0
VQP Wrong Version: 0
VQP Insufficient Resource: 0
 

 

Table 0-17 show vmps statistics Field Descriptions

Field
Description

VQP Queries

Number of queries sent by the client to the VMPS.

VQP Responses

Number of responses sent to the client from the VMPS.

VMPS Changes

Number of times that the VMPS changed from one server to another.

VQP Shutdowns

Number of times the VMPS sent a response to shut down the port. The client disables the port and removes all dynamic addresses on this port from the address table. You must administratively reenable the port to restore connectivity.

VQP Denied

Number of times the VMPS denied the client request for security reasons. When the VMPS response denies an address, no frame is forwarded to or from the workstation with that address (broadcast or multicast frames are delivered to the workstation if the port has been assigned to a VLAN). The client keeps the denied address in the address table as a blocked address to prevent more queries from being sent to the VMPS for each new packet received from this workstation. The client ages the address if no new packets are received from this workstation on this port within the aging time period.

VQP Wrong Domain

Number of times the management domain in the request does not match the one for the VMPS. Any previous VLAN assignments of the port are not changed. This response means that the server and the client have not been configured with the same VTP management domain.

VQP Wrong Version

Number of times the version field in the query packet contains a value that is higher than the version supported by the VMPS. The VLAN assignment of the port is not changed. The switches send only VMPS Version 1 requests.

VQP Insufficient Resource

Number of times the VMPS is unable to answer the request because of a resource availability problem. If the retry limit has not yet been reached, the client repeats the request with the same server or with the next alternate server, depending on whether the per-server retry count has been reached.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear vmps statistics

Clears the statistics maintained by the VQP client.

vmps reconfirm (privileged EXEC)

Sends VQP queries to reconfirm all dynamic VLAN assignments with the VMPS.

vmps retry

Configures the per-server retry count for the VQP client.

vmps server

Configures the primary VMPS and up to three secondary servers.

show vtp

To display general information about the VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) management domain, status, and counters, use the show vtp command in EXEC mode.

show vtp { counters | devices [ conflicts ] | interface [ interface-id ] | password | status }

 
Syntax Description

counters

Displays the VTP statistics for the switch.

password

Displays the configured VTP password.

devices

Displays information about all VTP version 3 devices in the domain. This keyword applies only if the switch is not running VTP version 3.

conflicts

(Optional) Displays information about VTP version 3 devices that have conflicting primary servers. This command is ignored when the switch is in VTP transparent or VPT off mode.

interface [ interface-id ]

Displays VTP status and configuration for all interfaces or the specified interface. The interface-id can be a physical interface or a port channel.

status

Displays general information about the VTP management domain status.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When you enter the show vtp password command when the switch is running VTP version 3, the display follows these rules:

  • If the password password global configuration command did not specify the hidden keyword and encryption is not enabled on the switch, the password appears in clear text.
  • If the password password command did not specify the hidden keyword and encryption is enabled on the switch, the encrypted password appears.
  • If the password password command included the hidden keyword, the hexadecimal secret key is displayed.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show vtp devices command. A Yes in the Conflict column means that the responding server is in conflict with the local server for the feature; that is, when two switches in the same domain do not have the same primary server for a database.

Switch# show vtp devices

Retrieving information from the VTP domain. Waiting for 5 seconds.
VTP Database Conf switch ID Primary Server Revision System Name
lict
------------ ---- -------------- -------------- ---------- ----------------------
VLAN Yes 00b0.8e50.d000 000c.0412.6300 12354 main.cisco.com
MST No 00b0.8e50.d000 0004.AB45.6000 24 main.cisco.com
VLAN Yes 000c.0412.6300=000c.0412.6300 67 qwerty.cisco.com
 

This is an example of output from the show vtp counters command. Table 0-18 describes the fields in the display.

Switch> show vtp counters
 
VTP statistics:
Summary advertisements received : 0
Subset advertisements received : 0
Request advertisements received : 0
Summary advertisements transmitted : 6970
Subset advertisements transmitted : 0
Request advertisements transmitted : 0
Number of config revision errors : 0
Number of config digest errors : 0
Number of V1 summary errors : 0
 
VTP pruning statistics:
 
Trunk Join Transmitted Join Received Summary advts received from
non-pruning-capable device
---------------- ---------------- ---------------- ---------------------------
Fa1/7 0 0 0
Fa1/8 0 0 0
Gi1/1 0 0 0
Gi1/2 0 0 0
 

 

Table 0-18 show vtp counters Field Descriptions

Field
Description

Summary advertisements received

Number of summary advertisements received by this switch on its trunk ports. Summary advertisements contain the management domain name, the configuration revision number, the update timestamp and identity, the authentication checksum, and the number of subset advertisements to follow.

Subset advertisements received

Number of subset advertisements received by this switch on its trunk ports. Subset advertisements contain all the information for one or more VLANs.

Request advertisements received

Number of advertisement requests received by this switch on its trunk ports. Advertisement requests normally request information on all VLANs. They can also request information on a subset of VLANs.

Summary advertisements transmitted

Number of summary advertisements sent by this switch on its trunk ports. Summary advertisements contain the management domain name, the configuration revision number, the update timestamp and identity, the authentication checksum, and the number of subset advertisements to follow.

Subset advertisements transmitted

Number of subset advertisements sent by this switch on its trunk ports. Subset advertisements contain all the information for one or more VLANs.

Request advertisements transmitted

Number of advertisement requests sent by this switch on its trunk ports. Advertisement requests normally request information on all VLANs. They can also request information on a subset of VLANs.

Number of configuration revision errors

Number of revision errors.

Whenever you define a new VLAN, delete an existing one, suspend or resume an existing VLAN, or modify the parameters on an existing VLAN, the configuration revision number of the switch increments.

Revision errors increment whenever the switch receives an advertisement whose revision number matches the revision number of the switch, but the MD5 digest values do not match. This error means that the VTP password in the two switches is different or that the switches have different configurations.

These errors means that the switch is filtering incoming advertisements, which causes the VTP database to become unsynchronized across the network.

Number of configuration digest errors

Number of MD5 digest errors.

Digest errors increment whenever the MD5 digest in the summary packet and the MD5 digest of the received advertisement calculated by the switch do not match. This error usually means that the VTP password in the two switches is different. To solve this problem, make sure the VTP password on all switches is the same.

These errors mean that the switch is filtering incoming advertisements, which causes the VTP database to become unsynchronized across the network.

Number of V1 summary errors

Number of Version 1 errors.

Version 1 summary errors increment whenever a switch in VTP V2 mode receives a VTP Version 1 frame. These errors mean that at least one neighboring switch is either running VTP Version 1 or VTP Version 2 with V2-mode disabled. To solve this problem, change the configuration of the switches in VTP V2-mode to disabled.

Join Transmitted

Number of VTP pruning messages sent on the trunk.

Join Received

Number of VTP pruning messages received on the trunk.

Summary Advts Received from non-pruning-capable device

Number of VTP summary messages received on the trunk from devices that do not support pruning.

This is an example of output from the show vtp status command for a switch running VTP version 2. Table 0-19 describes the fields in the display.

Switch> show vtp status
VTP Version : 2
Configuration Revision : 0
Maximum VLANs supported locally : 1005
Number of existing VLANs : 45
VTP Operating Mode : Transparent
VTP Domain Name : shared_testbed1
VTP Pruning Mode : Disabled
VTP V2 Mode : Disabled
VTP Traps Generation : Enabled
MD5 digest : 0x3A 0x29 0x86 0x39 0xB4 0x5D 0x58 0xD7
 

 

Table 0-19 show vtp status Field Descriptions

Field
Description

VTP Version

Displays the VTP version operating on the switch. By default, the switch implements Version 1 but can be set to Version 2.

Configuration Revision

Current configuration revision number on this switch.

Maximum VLANs Supported Locally

Maximum number of VLANs supported locally.

Number of Existing VLANs

Number of existing VLANs.

VTP Operating Mode

Displays the VTP operating mode, which can be server, client, or transparent.

Server—A switch in VTP server mode is enabled for VTP and sends advertisements. You can configure VLANs on it. The switch guarantees that it can recover all the VLAN information in the current VTP database from NVRAM after reboot. By default, every switch is a VTP server.

Note The switch automatically changes from VTP server mode to VTP client mode if it detects a failure while writing the configuration to NVRAM and cannot return to server mode until the NVRAM is functioning.

Client—A switch in VTP client mode is enabled for VTP, can send advertisements, but does not have enough nonvolatile storage to store VLAN configurations. You cannot configure VLANs on it. When a VTP client starts up, it does not send VTP advertisements until it receives advertisements to initialize its VLAN database.

Transparent—A switch in VTP transparent mode is disabled for VTP, does not send or learn from advertisements sent by other devices, and cannot affect VLAN configurations on other devices in the network. The switch receives VTP advertisements and forwards them on all trunk ports except the one on which the advertisement was received.

VTP Domain Name

Name that identifies the administrative domain for the switch.

VTP Pruning Mode

Displays whether pruning is enabled or disabled. Enabling pruning on a VTP server enables pruning for the entire management domain. Pruning restricts flooded traffic to those trunk links that the traffic must use to access the appropriate network devices.

VTP V2 Mode

Displays if VTP Version 2 mode is enabled. All VTP Version 2 switches operate in Version 1 mode by default. Each VTP switch automatically detects the capabilities of all the other VTP devices. A network of VTP devices should be configured to Version 2 only if all VTP switches in the network can operate in Version 2 mode.

VTP Traps Generation

Displays whether VTP traps are sent to a network management station.

MD5 Digest

A 16-byte checksum of the VTP configuration.

Configuration Last Modified

Displays the date and time of the last configuration modification. Displays the IP address of the switch that caused the configuration change to the database.

This is an example of output from the show vtp status command for a switch running VTP version 3:

Switch> show vtp status
VTP Version capable : 1 to 3
VTP version running : 3
VTP Domain Name : Cisco
VTP Pruning Mode : Disabled
VTP Traps Generation : Disabled
Device ID : 0021.1bcd.c700
 
Feature VLAN:
--------------
VTP Operating Mode : Server
Number of existing VLANs : 7
Number of existing extended VLANs : 0
Configuration Revision : 0
Primary ID : 0000.0000.0000
Primary Description :
MD5 digest : 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Feature MST:
--------------
VTP Operating Mode : Client
Configuration Revision : 0
Primary ID : 0000.0000.0000
Primary Description :
MD5 digest : 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
 
Feature UNKNOWN:
--------------
VTP Operating Mode : Transparent

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear vtp counters

Clears the VTP and pruning counters.

vtp (global configuration)

Configures the VTP filename, interface name, domain name, and mode.

shutdown

To disable an interface. Use the no form of this command to restart a disabled interface, use the shutdown interface configuration command.

shutdown

no shutdown

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

The port is enabled (not shut down).

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The shutdown command causes a port to stop forwarding. You can enable the port with the no shutdown command.

The no shutdown command has no effect if the port is a static-access port assigned to a VLAN that has been deleted, suspended, or shut down. The port must first be a member of an active VLAN before it can be reenabled.

The shutdown command disables all functions on the specified interface.

This command also marks the interface as unavailable. To see if an interface is disabled, use the show interfaces privileged EXEC command. An interface that has been shut down is shown as administratively down in the display.

Examples

These examples show how to disable and reenable a port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/2
Switch(config-if)# shutdown
 
Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/2
Switch(config-if)# no shutdown
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces

Displays the statistical information specific to all interfaces or to a specific interface.

shutdown vlan

To shut down (suspend) local traffic on the specified VLAN. Use the no form of this command to restart local traffic on the VLAN, use the shutdown vlan global configuration command.

shutdown vlan vlan-id

no shutdown vlan vlan-id

 
Syntax Description

vlan-id

ID of the VLAN to be locally shut down. The range is 2 to 1001. VLANs defined as default VLANs under the VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP), as well as extended-range VLANs (greater than 1005) cannot be shut down. The default VLANs are 1 and 1002 to 1005.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The shutdown vlan command does not change the VLAN information in the VTP database. The command shuts down local traffic, but the switch still advertises VTP information.

Examples

This example shows how to shut down traffic on VLAN 2:

Switch(config)# shutdown vlan 2
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show vlan privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

shutdown (config-vlan mode)

Shuts down local traffic on the VLAN when in config-VLAN mode (accessed by the vlan vlan-id global configuration command). For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

small-frame violation rate

To configure the rate (threshold) for an interface to be error-disabled when it receives VLAN-tagged packets that are small frames (67 bytes or less) at the specified rate, use the small-frame violation rate interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

small-frame violation rate pps

no small-frame violation rate pps

 
Syntax Description

pps

Specifies the threshold at which an interface receiving small frames will be error-disabled. The range is 1 to 10,000 packets per second (pps).

 
Defaults

This feature is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command enables the rate (threshold) for a port to be error-disabled when it receives small frames. Small frames are considered packets that are 67 frames or less.

Use the errdisable detect cause small-frame global configuration command to globally enable the small-frames threshold for each port.

You can configure the port to be automatically reenabled by using the errdisable recovery cause small-frame global configuration command. You configure the recovery time by using the errdisable recovery interval interval global configuration command.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the small-frame arrival rate feature so that the port is error-disabled if incoming small frames arrived at 10,000 pps:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# small-frame violation rate 10000
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

errdisable detect cause small-frame

Allows any switch port to be put into the error-disabled state if an incoming frame is smaller than the minimum size and arrives at the specified rate (threshold).

errdisable recovery cause small-frame

Enables the recovery timer.

show interfaces

Displays the interface settings on the switch, including input and output flow control.

snmp-server enable traps

To enable the switch to send Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) notifications for various traps or inform requests to the network management system (NMS), use the snmp-server enable traps global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

snmp-server enable traps [ bgp | bridge [ newroot ] [ topologychange ] | cluster | config | copy-config | cpu [ threshold ] | dot1x [auth-fail-vlan | guest-vlan | no-auth-fail-vlan | no-guest-vlan] | entity | envmon [ fan | shutdown | status | supply | temperature ] | errdisable [ notification-rate value ] | flash [ insertion | removal ] | hsrp | ipmulticast | mac-notification [ change ] [ move ] [ threshold ] | ospf [ cisco-specific | errors | lsa | rate-limit | retransmit | state-change ] | pim [ invalid-pim-message | neighbor-change | rp-mapping-change ] | port-security [ trap-rate value ] | rtr | snmp [ authentication | coldstart | linkdown | linkup | warmstart ] | storm-contro l trap-rate value | stpx [ inconsistency ] [ root-inconsistency ] [ loop-inconsistency ] | syslog | tty | vlan-membership | vlancreate | vlandelete | vtp]

no snmp-server enable traps [ bgp | bridge [ newroot ] [ topologychange ] | cluster | config | copy-config | cpu [ threshold ] | dot1x [auth-fail-vlan | guest-vlan | no-auth-fail-vlan | no-guest-vlan] | entity | envmon [ fan | shutdown | status | supply | temperature ] | errdisable [ notification-rate value ] | flash [ insertion | removal ] | hsrp | ipmulticast | mac-notification [ change ] [ move ] [ threshold ] | ospf [ cisco-specific | errors | lsa | rate-limit | retransmit | state-change ] | pim [ invalid-pim-message | neighbor-change | rp-mapping-change ] | port-security [ trap-rate value ] | rtr | snmp [ authentication | coldstart | linkdown | linkup | warmstart ] | storm-contro l trap-rate value | stpx [ inconsistency ] [ root-inconsistency ] [ loop-inconsistency ] | syslog | tty | vlan-membership | vlancreate | vlandelete | vtp]

 
Syntax Description

bgp

(Optional) Enables Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) state-change traps.

Note This keyword is available only when the IP services image is installed on the switch.

bridge [ newroot ] [ topologychange ]

(Optional) Generates STP bridge MIB traps.

  • newroot —(Optional) Enables SNMP STP Bridge MIB new root traps.
  • topologychange —(Optional) Enables SNMP STP Bridge MIB topology change traps.

cluster

(Optional) Enables cluster traps.

config

(Optional) Enables SNMP configuration traps.

config-ctid

(Optional) Enables SNMP CTID traps.

copy-config

(Optional) Enables SNMP copy-configuration traps.

cpu

(Optional) Allows CPU-related traps. The optional threshold keyword enables the threshold violation traps.

dot1x [auth-fail-vlan | guest-vlan | no-auth-fail-vlan | no-guest-vlan]

(Optional) Enables IEEE 802.1x traps.

  • auth-fail-vlan—(Optional) Generates a trap when the port moves to the configured restricted VLAN.
  • guest-vlan—(Optional) Generates a trap when the port moves to the configured guest VLAN.
  • no-auth-fail-vlan—(Optional) Generates a trap when a port tries to enter the restricted VLAN, but cannot because the restricted VLAN is not configured.
  • no-guest-vlan—(Optional) Generates a trap when a port tries to enter the guest VLAN, but cannot because the guest VLAN is not configured.

Note When the snmp-server enable traps dot1x command is entered (without any other keywords specified), all the IEEE 802.1x traps are enabled.

entity

(Optional) Enables SNMP entity traps.

envmon [ fan | shutdown | status | supply | temperature ]

Optional) Enables SNMP environmental traps.

  • fan —(Optional) Enables fan traps.
  • shutdown — (Optional) Enables environmental monitor shutdown traps.
  • status —(Optional) Enables SNMP environmental status-change traps.
  • supply — (Optional) Enables environmental monitor powersupply traps.
  • temperature — (Optional) Enables environmental monitor temperature traps.

errdisable [ notification-rate value ]

(Optional) Enables errdisable traps. Use notification-rate keyword to set the maximum value of errdisable traps sent per minute. The range is 0 to 10000; the default is 0 (no limit imposed; a trap is sent at every occurrence).

flash

(Optional) Enables SNMP FLASH notifications.

  • insertion—(Optional) Enables flash insertion notifications.
  • removal—(Optional) Enables flash removal notifications.

hsrp

(Optional) Enables Hot Standby Router Protocol (HSRP) traps.

mac-notification

(Optional) Enables MAC address notification traps.

  • change—Enables MAC address change notification traps.
  • move—Enables MAC address move notification traps.
  • threshold—Enables MAC address table threshold traps.

ospf [ cisco-specific | errors | lsa | rate-limit | retransmit | state-change ]

(Optional) Enables Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) traps. The keywords have these meanings:

  • cisco-specific — (Optional) Enables Cisco-specific traps.
  • errors — (Optional) Enables error traps.
  • lsa — (Optional) Enables link-state advertisement (LSA) traps.
  • rate-limit — (Optional) Enables rate-limit traps.
  • retransmit — (Optional) Enables packet-retransmit traps.
  • state-change — (Optional) Enables state-change traps.

pim [ invalid-pim-message | neighbor-change | rp-mapping-change ]

(Optional) Enables Protocol-Independent Multicast (PIM) traps.

  • invalid-pim-message — (Optional) Enables invalid PIM message traps.
  • neighbor-change — (Optional) Enables PIM neighbor-change traps.
  • rp-mapping-change — (Optional) Enables rendezvous point (RP)-mapping change traps.

port-security
[ trap-rate value ]

(Optional) Enables port security traps. Use the trap-rat e keyword to set the maximum number of port-security traps sent per second. The range is from 0 to 1000; the default is 0 (no limit imposed; a trap is sent at every occurrence).

rtr

(Optional) Enables SNMP Response Time Reporter traps.

snmp [ authentication | coldstart | linkdown | linkup | warmstart ]

(Optional) Enables SNMP traps.

  • authentication — (Optional) Enables authentication trap.
  • coldstart — (Optional) Enables cold start trap.
  • linkdown — (Optional) Enables linkdown trap.
  • linkup — (Optional) Enables linkup trap.
  • warmstart — (Optional) Enables warmstart trap.

storm-control trap-rate value

(Optional) Enables storm-control traps. Use the trap-rat e keyword to set the maximum number of storm-control traps sent per minute. The range is 0 to 1000; the default is 0 (no limit is imposed; a trap is sent at every occurrence).

stpx [ inconsistency | root-inconsistency | loop-inconsistency ]

(Optional) Enables SNMP STPX MIB traps. The keywords have these meanings:

  • inconsistency — (Optional) Enables SNMP STPX MIB Inconsistency Update traps.
  • root-inconsistency — (Optional) Enables SNMP STPX MIB Root Inconsistency Update traps.
  • loop-inconsistency — (Optional) Enables SNMP STPX MIB Loop Inconsistency Update traps.

syslog

(Optional) Enables SNMP syslog traps.

tty

(Optional) Send TCP connection traps. This is enabled by default.

vlan-membership

(Optional) Enables SNMP VLAN membership traps.

vlancreate

(Optional) Enables SNMP VLAN-created traps.

vlandelete

(Optional) Enables SNMP VLAN-deleted traps.

vtp

(Optional) Enables VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) traps.


Note Though visible in the command-line help strings, the insertion, and removal keywords are not supported. The snmp-server enable informs global configuration command is not supported. To enable the sending of SNMP inform notifications, use the snmp-server enable traps global configuration command combined with the snmp-server host host-addr informs global configuration command.


 
Defaults

The sending of SNMP traps is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Specifies the host (NMS) that receives the traps by using the snmp-server host global configuration command. If no trap types are specified, all types are sent.

When supported, use the snmp-server enable traps command to enable sending of traps or informs.


Note Informs are not supported in SNMPv1.


To enable more than one type of trap, you must enter a separate snmp-server enable traps command for each trap type.

To set the CPU threshold notification types and values, use the process cpu threshold type global configuration command.

Examples

This example shows how to send VTP traps to the NMS:

Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps vtp

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the running configuration on the switch. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

snmp-server host

Specifies the host that receives SNMP traps.

snmp-server host

To specify the recipient (host) of a Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) notification operation, use the snmp-server host global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to remove the specified host.

snmp-server host host-addr [ udp-port port | informs | traps ] [ version { 1 | 2c | 3 { auth | noauth | priv }] [ vrf vrf-instance ] { community-string [ notification-type ]}

no snmp-server host host-addr [ informs | traps ] [ version { 1 | 2c | 3 { auth | noauth | priv }] [ vrf vrf-instance ] community-string

 
Syntax Description

host-addr

Name or Internet address of the host (the targeted recipient).

udp-port port

(Optional) Configures the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number of the host to receive the traps. The range is 0 to 65535.

informs | traps

(Optional) Sends SNMP traps or informs to this host.

version 1 | 2c | 3

(Optional) Specifies version of the SNMP used to send the traps.

These keywords are supported:

1 —SNMPv1. This option is not available with informs.

2c —SNMPv2C.

3 —SNMPv3. These optional keywords can follow the Version 3 keyword:

  • auth (Optional)—Enables Message Digest 5 (MD5) and Secure Hash Algorithm (SHA) packet authentication.
  • noauth (Default)—The noAuthNoPriv security level. This is the default if the [ auth | noauth | priv ] keyword choice is not specified.
  • priv (Optional)—Enables Data Encryption Standard (DES) packet encryption (also called privacy).

Note The priv keyword is available only when the cryptographic (encrypted) software image is installed.

vrf vrf-instance

(Optional) Specifies virtual private network (VPN) routing instance and name for this host.

community-string

Password-like community string sent with the notification operation. Though you can set this string by using the snmp-server host command, we recommend that you define this string by using the snmp-server community global configuration command before using the snmp-server host command.

Note The @ symbol is used for delimiting the context information. Avoid using the @ symbol as part of the SNMP community string when configuring this command.

notification-type

(Optional) Type of notification to be sent to the host. If no type is specified, all notifications are sent. The notification type can include: alarms, auth-framework, bridge, and cluster. You can obtain a complete list by using CLI online help.

 
Defaults

This command is disabled by default. No notifications are sent.

15.0(1)EYIf you enter this command with no keywords, the default is to send all trap types to the host. No informs are sent to this host.

If no version keyword is present, the default is Version 1.

If Version 3 is selected and no authentication keyword is entered, the default is the noauth (noAuthNoPriv) security level.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

SNMP notifications can be sent as traps or inform requests. Traps are unreliable because the receiver does not send acknowledgments when it receives traps. The sender cannot determine if the traps were received. However, an SNMP entity that receives an inform request acknowledges the message with an SNMP response PDU. If the sender never receives the response, the inform request can be sent again. Thus, informs are more likely to reach their intended destinations.

However, informs consume more resources in the agent and in the network. Unlike a trap, which is discarded as soon as it is sent, an inform request must be held in memory until a response is received or the request times out. Traps are also sent only once, but an inform might be retried several times. The retries increase traffic and contribute to a higher overhead on the network.

If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent. To configure the switch to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server host command. If you enter the command with no keywords, all trap types are enabled for the host. To enable multiple hosts, you must enter a separate snmp-server host command for each host. You can specify multiple notification types in the command for each host.

If a local user is not associated with a remote host, the switch does not send informs for the auth (authNoPriv) and the priv (authPriv) authentication levels.

When multiple snmp-server host commands are given for the same host and kind of notification (trap or inform), each succeeding command overwrites the previous command. Only the last snmp-server host command is in effect. For example, if you enter an snmp-server host inform command for a host and then enter another snmp-server host inform command for the same host, the second command replaces the first.

The snmp-server host command is used with the snmp-server enable traps global configuration command. Use the snmp-server enable traps command to specify which SNMP notifications are sent globally. For a host to receive most notifications, at least one snmp-server enable traps command and the snmp-server host command for that host must be enabled. Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp-server enable traps command. For example, some notification types are always enabled. Other notification types are enabled by a different command.

The no snmp-server host command with no keywords disables traps, but not informs, to the host. To disable informs, use the no snmp-server host informs command.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a unique SNMP community string named comaccess for traps and prevent SNMP polling access with this string through access-list 10:

Switch(config)# snmp-server community comaccess ro 10
Switch(config)# snmp-server host 172.20.2.160 comaccess
Switch(config)# access-list 10 deny any
 

This example shows how to send the SNMP traps to the host specified by the name myhost.cisco.com. The community string is defined as comaccess:

Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps
Switch(config)# snmp-server host myhost.cisco.com comaccess snmp
 

This example shows how to enable the switch to send all traps to the host myhost.cisco.com by using the community string public:

Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps
Switch(config)# snmp-server host myhost.cisco.com public

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the running configuration on the switch. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

snmp-server enable traps

Enables SNMP notification for various trap types or inform requests.

snmp trap mac-notification change

To enable the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) MAC address change notification trap on a specific Layer 2 interface, use the snmp trap mac-notification change interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

snmp trap mac-notification change { added | removed }

no snmp trap mac-notification change { added | removed }

 
Syntax Description

added

Enables the MAC notification trap when a MAC address is added on this interface.

removed

Enables the MAC notification trap when a MAC address is removed from this interface.

 
Defaults

By default, the traps for both address addition and address removal are disabled.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Even though you enable the notification trap for a specific interface by using the snmp trap mac-notification change command, the trap is generated only when you enter the snmp-server enable traps mac-notification change and the mac address-table notification change global configuration commands.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the MAC notification trap when a MAC address is added to a port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/2
Switch(config-if)# snmp trap mac-notification change added
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show mac address-table notification change interface privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear mac address-table notification

Clears the MAC address notification global counters.

mac address-table notification

Enables the MAC address notification feature.

show mac address-table notification

Displays the MAC address notification settings for all interfaces or on the specified interface when the interface keyword is appended.

snmp-server enable traps

Sends the SNMP MAC notification traps when the mac-notification keyword is appended.

spanning-tree backbonefast

To enable the BackboneFast feature. Use the no form of the command to return to the default setting, use the spanning-tree backbonefast global configuration command.

spanning-tree backbonefast

no spanning-tree backbonefast

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

BackboneFast is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You can configure the BackboneFast feature for rapid PVST+ or for multiple spanning-tree (MST) mode, but the feature remains disabled (inactive) until you change the spanning-tree mode to PVST+.

BackboneFast starts when a root port or blocked port on a switch receives inferior BPDUs from its designated switch. An inferior BPDU identifies a switch that declares itself as both the root bridge and the designated switch. When a switch receives an inferior BPDU, it means that a link to which the switch is not directly connected (an indirect link) has failed (that is, the designated switch has lost its connection to the root switch. If there are alternate paths to the root switch, BackboneFast causes the maximum aging time on the interfaces on which it received the inferior BPDU to expire and allows a blocked port to move immediately to the listening state. BackboneFast then transitions the interface to the forwarding state. For more information, see the software configuration guide for this release.

Enable BackboneFast on all supported switches to allow the detection of indirect link failures and to start the spanning-tree reconfiguration sooner.

Examples

This example shows how to enable BackboneFast on the switch:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree backbonefast
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show spanning-tree summary privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree summary

Displays a summary of the spanning-tree interface states.

spanning-tree bpdufilter

To prevent an interface from sending or receiving bridge protocol data units (BPDUs), use the spanning-tree bpdufilter interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree bpdufilter { disable | enable }

no spanning-tree bpdufilter

 
Syntax Description

disable

Disables BPDU filtering on the specified interface.

enable

Enables BPDU filtering on the specified interface.

 
Defaults

BPDU filtering is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You can enable the BPDU filtering feature when the switch is operating in the per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (PVST+), rapid-PVST+, or the multiple spanning-tree (MST) mode.


Caution Enabling BPDU filtering on an interface is the same as disabling spanning tree on it and can result in spanning-tree loops.

You can globally enable BPDU filtering on all Port Fast-enabled interfaces by using the spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default global configuration command.

You can use the spanning-tree bpdufilter interface configuration command to override the setting of the spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default global configuration command.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the BPDU filtering feature on a port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree bpdufilter enable
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

spanning-tree portfast (global configuration)

Globally enables the BPDU filtering or the BPDU guard feature on Port Fast-enabled interface or enables the Port Fast feature on all nontrunking interfaces.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration)

Enables the Port Fast feature on an interface and all its associated VLANs.

spanning-tree bpduguard

To put an interface in the error-disabled state when it receives a bridge protocol data unit (BPDU), use the spanning-tree bpduguard interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree bpduguard { disable | enable }

no spanning-tree bpduguard

 
Syntax Description

disable

Disables BPDU guard on the specified interface.

enable

Enables BPDU guard on the specified interface.

 
Defaults

BPDU guard is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The BPDU guard feature provides a secure response to invalid configurations because you must manually put the interface back in service. Use the BPDU guard feature in a service-provider network to prevent an interface from being included in the spanning-tree topology.

You can enable the BPDU guard feature when the switch is operating in the per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (PVST+), rapid PVST+ (RPVST+), or the multiple spanning tree (MST) mode.

You can globally enable BPDU guard on all Port Fast-enabled interfaces by using the spanning-tree portfast bpduguard default global configuration command.

You can use the spanning-tree bpduguard interface configuration command to override the setting of the spanning-tree portfast bpduguard default global configuration command.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the BPDU guard feature on a port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree bpduguard enable
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

spanning-tree portfast (global configuration)

Globally enables the BPDU filtering or the BPDU guard feature on Port Fast-enabled interfaces or enables the Port Fast feature on all nontrunking interfaces.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration)

Enables the Port Fast feature on an interface and all its associated VLANs.

spanning-tree cost

To set the path cost for spanning-tree calculations. If a loop occurs, spanning tree considers the path cost when selecting an interface to place in the forwarding state, use the spanning-tree cost interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree [ vlan vlan-id ] cost cost

no spanning-tree [ vlan vlan-id ] cost

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN range associated with a spanning-tree instance. You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma. The range is 1 to 4094.

cost

Specifies the path cost. The range is 1 to 200000000, with higher values meaning higher costs.

 
Defaults

The default path cost is computed from the interface bandwidth setting. These are the IEEE default path cost values:

  • 1000 Mb/s—4
  • 100 Mb/s—19
  • 10 Mb/s—100

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When you configure the cost, higher values represent higher costs.

If you configure an interface with both the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id cost cost command and the spanning-tree cost cost command, the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id cost cost command takes effect.

Examples

This example shows how to set the path cost to 250 on a port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree cost 250
 

This example shows how to set a path cost to 300 for VLANs 10, 12 to 15, and 20:

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree vlan 10,12-15,20 cost 300
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show spanning-tree interface interface-id privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree interface interface-id

Displays spanning-tree information for the specified interface.

spanning-tree port-priority

Configures an interface priority.

spanning-tree vlan priority

Sets the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance.

spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig

To display an error message when the switch detects an EtherChannel misconfiguration, use the spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to disable the feature.

spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig

no spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

EtherChannel guard is enabled on the switch.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When the switch detects an EtherChannel misconfiguration, this error message appears:

PM-4-ERR_DISABLE: Channel-misconfig error detected on [chars], putting [chars] in err-disable state.
 

To show switch ports that are in the misconfigured EtherChannel, use the show interfaces status err-disabled privileged EXEC command. To verify the EtherChannel configuration on a remote device, use the show etherchannel summary privileged EXEC command on the remote device.

When a port is in the error-disabled state because of an EtherChannel misconfiguration, you can bring it out of this state by entering the errdisable recovery cause channel-misconfig global configuration command, or you can manually reenable it by entering the shutdown and no shut down interface configuration commands.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the EtherChannel guard misconfiguration feature:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show spanning-tree summary privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

errdisable recovery cause channel-misconfig

Enables the timer to recover from the EtherChannel misconfiguration error-disabled state.

show etherchannel summary

Displays EtherChannel information for a channel as a one-line summary per channel group.

show interfaces status err-disabled

Displays the interfaces in the error-disabled state.

spanning-tree extend system-id

To enable the extended system ID feature, use the spanning-tree extend system-id global configuration command.

spanning-tree extend system-id


Note Though visible in the command-line help strings, the no version of this command is not supported. You cannot disable the extended system ID feature.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

The extended system ID is enabled.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The switch supports the IEEE 802.1t spanning-tree extensions. Some of the bits previously used for the switch priority are now used for the extended system ID (VLAN identifier for the per-VLAN spanning-tree plus [PVST+] and rapid PVST+ or as an instance identifier for the multiple spanning tree [MST]).

The spanning tree uses the extended system ID, the switch priority, and the allocated spanning-tree MAC address to make the bridge ID unique for each VLAN or multiple spanning-tree instance.

Support for the extended system ID affects how you manually configure the root switch, the secondary root switch, and the switch priority of a VLAN. For more information, see the “spanning-tree mst root” and the “spanning-tree vlan” sections.

If your network consists of switches that do not support the extended system ID and switches that do support it, it is unlikely that the switch with the extended system ID support will become the root switch. The extended system ID increases the switch priority value every time the VLAN number is greater than the priority of the connected switches.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree summary

Displays a summary of spanning-tree interface states.

spanning-tree mst root

Configures the MST root switch priority and timers based on the network diameter.

spanning-tree vlan priority

Sets the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance.

spanning-tree guard

To enable root guard or loop guard on all the VLANs associated with the selected interface, use the spanning-tree guard interface configuration command. Root guard restricts which interface is allowed to be the spanning-tree root port or the path-to-the root for the switch. Loop guard prevents alternate or root ports from becoming designated ports when a failure creates a unidirectional link. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree guard { loop | none | root }

no spanning-tree guard

 
Syntax Description

loop

Enables loop guard.

none

Disables root guard or loop guard.

root

Enables root guard.

 
Defaults

Root guard is disabled.

Loop guard is configured according to the spanning-tree loopguard default global configuration command (globally disabled).

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You can enable root guard or loop guard when the switch is operating in the per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+), rapid PVST+ (RPVST+), or the multiple spanning tree (MST) mode.

When root guard is enabled, if spanning-tree calculations cause an interface to be selected as the root port, the interface transitions to the root-inconsistent (blocked) state to prevent the customer’s switch from becoming the root switch or being in the path to the root. The root port provides the best path from the switch to the root switch.

When the no spanning-tree guard or the no spanning-tree guard none command is entered, root guard is disabled for all VLANs on the selected interface. If this interface is in the root-inconsistent (blocked) state, it automatically transitions to the listening state.

Do not enable root guard on interfaces that will be used by the UplinkFast feature. With UplinkFast, the backup interfaces (in the blocked state) replace the root port in the case of a failure. However, if root guard is also enabled, all the backup interfaces used by the UplinkFast feature are placed in the root-inconsistent state (blocked) and prevented from reaching the forwarding state. The UplinkFast feature is not available when the switch is operating in the rapid-PVST+ or MST mode.

Loop guard is most effective when it is configured on the entire switched network. When the switch is operating in PVST+ or rapid-PVST+ mode, loop guard prevents alternate and root ports from becoming designated ports, and spanning tree does not send bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) on root or alternate ports. When the switch is operating in MST mode, BPDUs are not sent on nonboundary interfaces if the interface is blocked by loop guard in all MST instances. On a boundary interface, loop guard blocks the interface in all MST instances.

To disable root guard or loop guard, use the spanning-tree guard none interface configuration command. You cannot enable both root guard and loop guard at the same time.

You can override the setting of the spanning-tree loopguard default global configuration command by using the spanning-tree guard loop interface configuration command.

Examples

This example shows how to enable root guard on all the VLANs associated with the specified port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/2
Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree guard root
 

This example shows how to enable loop guard on all the VLANs associated with the specified port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/2
Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree guard loop
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

spanning-tree cost

Sets the path cost for spanning-tree calculations.

spanning-tree loopguard default

Prevents alternate or root ports from becoming designated ports because of a failure that leads to a unidirectional link.

spanning-tree mst cost

Configures the path cost for MST calculations.

spanning-tree mst port-priority

Configures an interface priority.

spanning-tree mst root

Configures the MST root switch priority and timers based on the network diameter.

spanning-tree port-priority

Configures an interface priority.

spanning-tree vlan priority

Sets the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance.

spanning-tree link-type

To override the default link-type setting, which is determined by the duplex mode of the interface, and to enable rapid spanning-tree transitions to the forwarding state, use the spanning-tree link-type interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree link-type { point-to-point | shared }

no spanning-tree link-type

 
Syntax Description

point-to-point

Specifies that the link type of an interface is point-to-point.

shared

Specifies that the link type of an interface is shared.

 
Defaults

The switch derives the link type of an interface from the duplex mode. A full-duplex interface is considered a point-to-point link, and a half-duplex interface is considered a shared link.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You can override the default setting of the link type by using the spanning-tree link-type command. For example, a half-duplex link can be physically connected point-to-point to a single interface on a remote switch running the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) or the rapid per-VLAN plus (rapid-PVST+) spanningtree protocol and be enabled for rapid transitions.

Examples

This example shows how to specify the link type as shared (regardless of the duplex setting) and to prevent rapid transitions to the forwarding state:

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree link-type shared
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id or the show spanning-tree interface interface-id privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear spanning-tree detected-protocols

Restarts the protocol migration process (force the renegotiation with neighboring switches) on all interfaces or on the specified interface.

show spanning-tree interface interface-id

Displays spanning-tree state information for the specified interface.

show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id

Displays MST information for the specified interface.

spanning-tree loopguard default

To prevent alternate or root ports from becoming designated ports because of a failure that leads to a unidirectional link, use the spanning-tree loopguard default global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree loopguard default

no spanning-tree loopguard default

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

Loop guard is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You can enable the loop guard feature when the switch is operating in the per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+), rapid PVST+ (RPVST+), or the multiple spanning tree (MST) mode.

Loop guard is most effective when it is configured on the entire switched network. When the switch is operating in PVST+ or RPVST+ mode, loop guard prevents alternate and root ports from becoming designated ports, and spanning tree does not send bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) on root or alternate ports. When the switch is operating in MST mode, BPDUs are not sent on nonboundary interfaces if the interface is blocked by loop guard in all MST instances. On a boundary interface, loop guard blocks the interface in all MST instances.

Loop guard operates only on interfaces that the spanning tree identifies as point-to-point.

You can override the setting of the spanning-tree loopguard default global configuration command by using the spanning-tree guard loop interface configuration command.

Examples

This example shows how to globally enable loop guard:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree loopguard default
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC comm and.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

spanning-tree guard loop

Enables the loop guard feature on all the VLANs associated with the specified interface.

spanning-tree mode

To enable per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+), rapid PVST+ (RPVST+), or multiple spanning tree (MST) on your switch, use the spanning-tree mode global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree mode { mst | pvst | rapid-pvst }

no spanning-tree mode

 
Syntax Description

mst

Enables MST and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) (based on IEEE 802.1s and IEEE 802.1w).

pvst

Enables PVST+ (based on IEEE 802.1D).

rapid-pvst

Enables rapid PVST+ (based on IEEE 802.1w).

 
Defaults

The default mode is PVST+.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The switch supports PVST+, RPVST+, and MSTP, but only one version can be active at any time: All VLANs run PVST+, all VLANs run RPVST+, or all VLANs run MSTP.

When you enable the MST mode, RSTP is automatically enabled.


Caution Changing spanning-tree modes can disrupt traffic because all spanning-tree instances are stopped for the previous mode and restarted in the new mode.

Examples

This example shows to enable MST and RSTP on the switch:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mode mst
 

This example shows to enable RPVST+ on the switch:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mode rapid-pvst
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

spanning-tree mst configuration

To enter multiple spanning-tree (MST) configuration mode through which you configure the MST region, use the spanning-tree mst configuration global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default settings.

spanning-tree mst configuration

no spanning-tree mst configuration

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

The default mapping is that all VLANs are mapped to the common and internal spanning-tree (CIST) instance (instance 0).

The default name is an empty string.

The revision number is 0.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The spanning-tree mst configuration command enables the MST configuration mode. These configuration commands are available:

  • abort —Exits the MST region configuration mode without applying configuration changes.
  • exit —Exits the MST region configuration mode and applies all configuration changes.
  • instance instance-id vlan vlan-range —Maps VLANs to an MST instance. The range for the instance-id is 1 to 4094. The range for vlan-range is 1 to 4094. You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma.
  • name name —Sets the configuration name. The name string has a maximum length of 32 characters and is case sensitive.
  • no —Negates the instance, name, and revision commands or sets them to their defaults.
  • private-vlan —Though visible in the command-line help strings, this command is not supported.
  • revision version —Sets the configuration revision number. The range is 0 to 65535.
  • show [ current | pending ] —Displays the current or pending MST region configuration.

In MST mode, the switch supports up to 65 MST instances. The number of VLANs that can be mapped to a particular MST instance is unlimited.

When you map VLANs to an MST instance, the mapping is incremental, and VLANs specified in the command are added to or removed from the VLANs that were previously mapped. To specify a range, use a hyphen; for example, instance 1 vlan 1-63 maps VLANs 1 to 63 to MST instance 1. To specify a series, use a comma; for example, instance 1 vlan 10, 20, 30 maps VLANs 10, 20, and 30 to MST instance 1.

All VLANs that are not explicitly mapped to an MST instance are mapped to the common and internal spanning tree (CIST) instance (instance 0) and cannot be unmapped from the CIST by using the no form of the command.

For two or more switches to be in the same MST region, they must have the same VLAN mapping, the same configuration revision number, and the same name.

Examples

This example shows how to enter MST configuration mode, map VLANs 10 to 20 to MST instance 1, name the region region1, set the configuration revision to 1, display the pending configuration, apply the changes, and return to global configuration mode:

Switch# spanning-tree mst configuration
Switch(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan 10-20
Switch(config-mst)# name region1
Switch(config-mst)# revision 1
Switch(config-mst)# show pending
Pending MST configuration
Name [region1]
Revision 1
Instance Vlans Mapped
-------- ---------------------
0 1-9,21-4094
1 10-20
-------------------------------
 
Switch(config-mst)# exit
Switch(config)#
 

This example shows how to add VLANs 1 to 100 to the ones already mapped (if any) to instance 2, to move VLANs 40 to 60 that were previously mapped to instance 2 to the CIST instance, to add VLAN 10 to instance 10, and to remove all the VLANs mapped to instance 2 and map them to the CIST instance:

Switch(config-mst)# instance 2 vlan 1-100
Switch(config-mst)# no instance 2 vlan 40-60
Switch(config-mst)# instance 10 vlan 10
Switch(config-mst)# no instance 2
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show pending MST configuration command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree mst configuration

Displays the MST region configuration.

spanning-tree mst cost

To set the path cost for multiple spanning-tree (MST) calculations, use the spanning-tree mst cost interface configuration command. If a loop occurs, spanning tree considers the path cost when selecting an interface to put in the forwarding state. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree mst instance-id cost cost

no spanning-tree mst instance-id cost

 
Syntax Description

instance-id

Range of spanning-tree instances. You can specify a single instance, a range of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances separated by a comma. The range is 0 to 4094.

cost

Path cost is 1 to 200000000, with higher values meaning higher costs.

 
Defaults

The default path cost is computed from the interface bandwidth setting. These are the IEEE default path cost values:

  • 1000 Mb/s—20000
  • 100 Mb/s—200000
  • 10 Mb/s—2000000

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When you configure the cost, higher values represent higher costs.

Examples

This example shows how to set a path cost of 250 on a port associated with instances 2 and 4:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/2
Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 2,4 cost 250
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id

Displays MST information for the specified interface.

spanning-tree mst port-priority

Configures an interface priority.

spanning-tree mst priority

Configures the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance.

spanning-tree mst forward-time

To set the forward-delay time for all multiple spanning-tree (MST) instances, use the spanning-tree mst forward-time global configuration command. The forwarding time specifies how long each of the listening and learning states last before the interface begins forwarding. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree mst forward-time seconds

no spanning-tree mst forward-time

 
Syntax Description

seconds

Length of the listening and learning states. The range is 4 to 30 seconds.

 
Defaults

The default is 15 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Changing the spanning-tree mst forward-time command affects all spanning-tree instances.

Examples

This example shows how to set the spanning-tree forwarding time to 18 seconds for all MST instances:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst forward-time 18
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show spanning-tree mst privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST information.

spanning-tree mst hello-time

Sets the interval between hello bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) sent by root switch configuration messages.

spanning-tree mst max-age

Sets the interval between messages that the spanning tree receives from the root switch.

spanning-tree mst max-hops

Sets the number of hops in a region before the BPDU is discarded.

spanning-tree mst hello-time

To set the interval between hello bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) sent by root switch configuration messages, use the spanning-tree mst hello-time global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree mst hello-time seconds

no spanning-tree mst hello-time

 
Syntax Description

seconds

Interval between hello BPDUs sent by root switch configuration messages. The range is 1 to 10 seconds.

 
Defaults

The default is 2 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

After you set the spanning-tree mst max-age seconds global configuration command, if a switch does not receive BPDUs from the root switch within the specified interval, the switch recomputes the spanning-tree topology. The max-age setting must be greater than the hello-time setting.

Changing the spanning-tree mst hello-time command affects all spanning-tree instances.

Examples

This example shows how to set the spanning-tree hello time to 3 seconds for all multiple spanning-tree (MST) instances:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst hello-time 3
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show spanning-tree mst privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST information.

spanning-tree mst forward-time

Sets the forward-delay time for all MST instances.

spanning-tree mst max-age

Sets the interval between messages that the spanning tree receives from the root switch.

spanning-tree mst max-hops

Sets the number of hops in a region before the BPDU is discarded.

spanning-tree mst max-age

To set the interval between messages that the spanning tree receives from the root switch, use the spanning-tree mst max-age global configuration command. If a switch does not receive a bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) message from the root switch within this interval, it recomputes the spanning-tree topology. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree mst max-age seconds

no spanning-tree mst max-age

 
Syntax Description

seconds

Interval between messages the spanning tree receives from the root switch. The range is 6 to 40 seconds.

 
Defaults

The default is 20 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

After you set the spanning-tree mst max-age seconds global configuration command, if a switch does not receive BPDUs from the root switch within the specified interval, the switch recomputes the spanning-tree topology. The max-age setting must be greater than the hello-time setting.

Changing the spanning-tree mst max-age command affects all spanning-tree instances.

Examples

This example shows how to set the spanning-tree max-age to 30 seconds for all multiple spanning-tree (MST) instances:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst max-age 30
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show spanning-tree mst privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST information.

spanning-tree mst forward-time

Sets the forward-delay time for all MST instances.

spanning-tree mst hello-time

Sets the interval between hello BPDUs sent by root switch configuration messages.

spanning-tree mst max-hops

Sets the number of hops in a region before the BPDU is discarded.

spanning-tree mst max-hops

To set the number of hops in a region before the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) is discarded and the information held for an interface is aged. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting, use the spanning-tree mst max-hops global configuration command.

spanning-tree mst max-hops hop-count

no spanning-tree mst max-hops

 
Syntax Description

hop-count

Number of hops in a region before the BPDU is discarded. The range is 1 to 255 hops.

 
Defaults

The default is 20 hops.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The root switch of the instance always sends a BPDU (or M-record) with a cost of 0 and the hop count set to the maximum value. When a switch receives this BPDU, it decrements the received remaining hop count by one and propagates the decremented count as the remaining hop count in the generated M-records. A switch discards the BPDU and ages the information held for the interface when the count reaches 0.

Changing the spanning-tree mst max-hops command affects all spanning-tree instances.

Examples

This example shows how to set the spanning-tree max-hops to 10 for all multiple spanning-tree (MST) instances:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst max-hops 10
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show spanning-tree mst privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST information.

spanning-tree mst forward-time

Sets the forward-delay time for all MST instances.

spanning-tree mst hello-time

Sets the interval between hello BPDUs sent by root switch configuration messages.

spanning-tree mst max-age

Sets the interval between messages that the spanning tree receives from the root switch.

spanning-tree mst port-priority

To configure an interface priority, use the spanning-tree mst port-priority interface configuration command. If a loop occurs, the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) can find the interface to put in the forwarding state. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree mst instance-id port-priority priority

no spanning-tree mst instance-id port-priority

 
Syntax Description

instance-id

Range of spanning-tree instances. You can specify a single instance, a range of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances separated by a comma. The range is 0 to 4094.

priority

The range is 0 to 240 in increments of 16. Valid priority values are 0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176, 192, 208, 224, and 240. All other values are rejected. The lower the number, the higher the priority.

 
Defaults

The default is 128.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You can assign higher priority values (lower numerical values) to interfaces that you want selected first and lower priority values (higher numerical values) that you want selected last. If all interfaces have the same priority value, the multiple spanning tree (MST) puts the interface with the lowest interface number in the forwarding state and blocks other interfaces.

Examples

This example shows how to increase the likelihood that the interface associated with spanning-tree instances 20 and 22 is placed into the forwarding state if a loop occurs:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/2
Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 20,22 port-priority 0
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree mst interface interface-id

Displays MST information for the specified interface.

spanning-tree mst cost

Sets the path cost for MST calculations.

spanning-tree mst priority

Sets the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance.

spanning-tree mst pre-standard

To configure a port to send only prestandard bridge protocol data units (BPDUs), use the spanning-tree mst pre-standard interface configuration command.

spanning-tree mst pre-standard

no spanning-tree mst pre-standard

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

The default state is automatic detection of prestandard neighbors.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The port can accept both prestandard and standard BPDUs. If the neighbor types are mismatched, only the common and internal spanning tree (CIST) runs on this interface.


Note If a switch port is connected to a switch running prestandard Cisco IOS software, you must use the spanning-tree mst pre-standard interface configuration command on the port. If you do not configure the port to send only prestandard BPDUs, the Multiple STP (MSTP) performance might diminish.


When the port is configured to automatically detect prestandard neighbors, the prestandard flag always appears in the show spanning-tree mst commands.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a port to send only prestandard BPDUs:

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree mst pre-standard
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show spanning-tree mst privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree mst instance-id

Displays multiple spanning-tree (MST) information, including the prestandard flag, for the specified interface.

spanning-tree mst priority

To set the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance, use the spanning-tree mst priority global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree mst instance-id priority priority

no spanning-tree mst instance-id priority

 
Syntax Description

instance-id

Range of spanning-tree instances. You can specify a single instance, a range of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances separated by a comma. The range is 0 to 4094.

priority

Sets the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance. This setting affects the likelihood that the switch is selected as the root switch. A lower value increases the probability that the switch is selected as the root switch.

The range is 0 to 61440 in increments of 4096. Valid priority values are 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, and 61440. All other values are rejected.

 
Defaults

The default is 32768.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to set the spanning-tree priority to 8192 for multiple spanning-tree instances (MST) 20 to 21:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst 20-21 priority 8192
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show spanning-tree mst instance-id privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree mst instance-id

Displays MST information for the specified interface.

spanning-tree mst cost

Sets the path cost for MST calculations.

spanning-tree mst port-priority

Configures an interface priority.

spanning-tree mst root

To configure the multiple spanning-tree (MST) root switch priority and timers based on the network diameter, use the spanning-tree mst root global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default settings.

spanning-tree mst instance-id root { primary | secondary } [ diameter net-diameter
[ hello-time seconds ]]

no spanning-tree mst instance-id root

 
Syntax Description

instance-id

Range of spanning-tree instances. You can specify a single instance, a range of instances separated by a hyphen, or a series of instances separated by a comma. The range is 0 to 4094.

primary

Forces this switch to be the root switch.

secondary

Sets this switch to be the root switch should the primary root switch fail.

diameter net-diameter

(Optional) Sets the maximum number of switches between any two end stations. The range is 2 to 7. This keyword is available only for MST instance 0.

hello-time seconds

(Optional) Sets the interval between hello bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) sent by the root switch configuration messages. The range is 1 to 10 seconds. This keyword is available only for MST instance 0.

 
Defaults

The primary root switch priority is 24576.

The secondary root switch priority is 28672.

The hello time is 2 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use the spanning-tree mst instance-id root command only on backbone switches.

Whe n you enter the spanning-tree mst instance-id root command, the software tries to set a high enough priority to make this switch the root of the spanning-tree instance. Because of the extended system ID support, the switch sets the switch priority for the instance to 24576 if this value will cause this switch to become the root for the specified instance. If any root switch for the specified instance has a switch priority lower than 24576, the switch sets its own priority to 4096 less than the lowest switch priority. (4096 is the value of the least-significant bit of a 4-bit switch priority value.)

When y ou enter the spanning-tree mst instance-id root secondary command, because of support for the extended system ID, the software changes the switch priority from the default value (32768) to 28672. If the root switch fails, this switch becomes the next root switch (if the other switches in the network use the default switch priority of 32768 and are unlikely to become the root switch).

Examples

This example shows how to configure the switch as the root switch for instance 10 with a network diameter of 4:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst 10 root primary diameter 4
 

This example shows how to configure the switch as the secondary root switch for instance 10 with a network diameter of 4:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst 10 root secondary diameter 4
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show spanning-tree mst instance-id privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree mst instance-id

Displays MST information for the specified instance.

spanning-tree mst forward-time

Sets the forward-delay time for all MST instances.

spanning-tree mst hello-time

Sets the interval between hello BPDUs sent by root switch configuration messages.

spanning-tree mst max-age

Sets the interval between messages that the spanning tree receives from the root switch.

spanning-tree mst max-hops

Sets the number of hops in a region before the BPDU is discarded.

spanning-tree port-priority

To configure an interface priority, use the spanning-tree port-priority interface configuration command. If a loop occurs, spanning tree can find the interface to put in the forwarding state. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree [ vlan vlan-id ] port-priority priority

no spanning-tree [ vlan vlan-id ] port-priority

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN range associated with a spanning-tree instance. You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma. The range is 1 to 4094.

priority

Number from 0 to 240, in increments of 16. Valid values are 0, 16, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 176, 192, 208, 224, and 240. All other values are rejected. The lower the number, the higher the priority.

 
Defaults

The default is 128.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If the variable vlan-id is omitted, the command applies to the spanning-tree instance associated with VLAN 1.

You can set the priority on a VLAN that has no interfaces assigned to it. The setting takes effect when you assign the interface to the VLAN.

If you configure an interface with both the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id port-priority priority command and the spanning-tree port-priority priority command, the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id port-priority priority command takes effect.

Examples

This example shows how to increase the likelihood that a port will be put in the forwarding state if a loop occurs:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/2
Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree vlan 20 port-priority 0
 

This example shows how to set the port-priority value on VLANs 20 to 25:

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree vlan 20-25 port-priority 0
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show spanning-tree interface interface-id privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree interface interface-id

Displays spanning-tree information for the specified interface.

spanning-tree cost

Sets the path cost for spanning-tree calculations.

spanning-tree vlan priority

Sets the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance.

spanning-tree portfast (global configuration)

To globally enable bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) filtering on Port Fast-enabled interfaces, the BPDU guard feature on Port Fast-enabled interfaces, or the Port Fast feature on all nontrunking interfaces, use the spanning-tree portfast global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default settings.

spanning-tree portfast { bpdufilter default | bpduguard default | default }

no spanning-tree portfast { bpdufilter default | bpduguard default | default }

 
Syntax Description

bpdufilter default

Globally enables BPDU filtering on Port Fast-enabled interfaces and prevent the switch interface connected to end stations from sending or receiving BPDUs.

bpduguard default

Globally enables the BPDU guard feature on Port Fast-enabled interfaces and place the interfaces that receive BPDUs in an error-disabled state.

default

Globally enables the Port Fast feature on all nontrunking interfaces. When the Port Fast feature is enabled, the interface changes directly from a blocking state to a forwarding state without making the intermediate spanning-tree state changes.

 
Defaults

The BPDU filtering, the BPDU guard, and the Port Fast features are disabled on all interfaces unless they are individually configured.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The BPDU filtering feature prevents the switch interface from sending or receiving BPDUs. The BPDU guard feature puts Port Fast-enabled interfaces that receive BPDUs in an error-disabled state.

You can enable these features when the switch is operating in the per-VLAN spanning-tree plus (PVST+) rapid PVST+ (RPVST+), or the multiple spanningtree (MST) mode.

Use the spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default global configuration command to globally enable BPDU filtering on interfaces that are Port Fast-enabled (the interfaces are in a Port Fast-operational state). The interfaces still send a few BPDUs at linkup before the switch begins to filter outbound BPDUs. You should globally enable BPDU filtering on a switch so that hosts connected to switch interfaces do not receive BPDUs. If a BPDU is received on a Port Fast-enabled interface, the interface loses its Port Fast-operational status and BPDU filtering is disabled.

You can override the spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default global configuration command by using the spanning-tree bdpufilter interface configuration command.


Caution Enabling BPDU filtering on an interface is the same as disabling spanning tree on it and can result in spanning-tree loops.

Use the spanning-tree portfast bpduguard default global configuration command to globally enable BPDU guard on interfaces that are in a Port Fast-operational state. In a valid configuration, Port Fast-enabled interfaces do not receive BPDUs. Receiving a BPDU on a Port Fast-enabled interface signals an invalid configuration, such as the connection of an unauthorized device, and the BPDU guard feature puts the interface in the error-disabled state. The BPDU guard feature provides a secure response to invalid configurations because you must manually put the interface back in service. Use the BPDU guard feature in a service-provider network to prevent an access port from participating in the spanning tree.

You can override the spanning-tree portfast bpduguard default global configuration command by using the spanning-tree bdpuguard interface configuration command.

Use the spanning-tree portfast default global configuration command to globally enable the Port Fast feature on all nontrunking interfaces. Configure Port Fast only on interfaces that connect to end stations; otherwise, an accidental topology loop could cause a data packet loop and disrupt switch and network operation. A Port Fast-enabled interface moves directly to the spanning-tree forwarding state when linkup occurs without waiting for the standard forward-delay time.

You can override the spanning-tree portfast default global configuration command by using the spanning-tree portfast interface configuration command. You can use the no spanning-tree portfast default global configuration command to disable Port Fast on all interfaces unless they are individually configured with the spanning-tree portfast interface configuration command.

Examples

This example shows how to globally enable the BPDU filtering feature:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree portfast bpdufilter default
 

This example shows how to globally enable the BPDU guard feature:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree portfast bpduguard default
 

This example shows how to globally enable the Port Fast feature on all nontrunking interfaces:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree portfast default
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

spanning-tree bpdufilter

Prevents an interface from sending or receiving BPDUs.

spanning-tree bpduguard

Puts an interface in the error-disabled state when it receives a BPDU.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration)

Enables the Port Fast feature on an interface in all its associated VLANs.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration)

To enable the Port Fast feature on an interface in all its associated VLANs. use the spanning-tree portfast interface configuration command. When the Port Fast feature is enabled, the interface changes directly from a blocking state to a forwarding state without making the intermediate spanning-tree state changes. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree portfast [ disable | trunk ]

no spanning-tree portfast

 
Syntax Description

disable

(Optional) Disables the Port Fast feature on the specified interface.

trunk

(Optional) Enables the Port Fast feature on a trunking interface.

 
Defaults

The Port Fast feature is disabled on all interfaces; however, it is automatically enabled on dynamic-access ports.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this feature only on interfaces that connect to end stations; otherwise, an accidental topology loop could cause a data packet loop and disrupt switch and network operation.

To enable Port Fast on trunk ports, you must use the spanning-tree portfast trunk interface configuration command. The spanning-tree portfast command is not supported on trunk ports.

You can enable this feature when the switch is operating in the per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+), rapid-PVST+ (RPVST+), or the multiple spanning tree (MST) mode.

This feature affects all VLANs on the interface.

An interface with the Port Fast feature enabled is moved directly to the spanning-tree forwarding state without the standard forward-time delay.

You can use the spanning-tree portfast default global configuration command to globally enable the Port Fast feature on all nontrunking interfaces. However, the spanning-tree portfast interface configuration command can override the global setting.

If you configure the spanning-tree portfast default global configuration command, you can disable Port Fast on an interface that is not a trunk interface by using the spanning-tree portfast disable interface configuration command.

Examples

This example shows how to enable the Port Fast feature on a port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/2
Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

spanning-tree bpdufilter

Prevents an interface from sending or receiving bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).

spanning-tree bpduguard

Puts an interface in the error-disabled state when it receives a BPDU.

spanning-tree portfast (global configuration)

Globally enables the BPDU filtering or the BPDU guard feature on Port Fast-enabled interfaces or enables the Port Fast feature on all nontrunking interfaces.

spanning-tree transmit hold-count

To configure the number of bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) sent every second, use the spanning-tree transmit hold-count global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree transmit hold-count [ value ]

no spanning-tree transmit hold-count [ value ]

 
Syntax Description

value

(Optional) Numbers of BPDUs sent every second. The range is 1 to 20.

 
Defaults

The default is 6.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Increasing the transmit hold-count value can have a significant impact on CPU utilization when the switch is in RPVST+ mode. Decreasing this value might slow down convergence. We recommend using the default setting.

Examples

This example shows how to set the transmit hold count to 8:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree transmit hold-count 8
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show spanning-tree mst privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays the multiple spanning tree (MST) region configuration and status, including the transmit hold count.

spanning-tree uplinkfast

To accelerate the choice of a new root port when a link or switch fails or when the spanning tree reconfigures itself, use the spanning-tree uplinkfast global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree uplinkfast [ max-update-rate pkts-per-second ]

no spanning-tree uplinkfast [ max-update-rate ]

 
Syntax Description

max-update-rate pkts-per-second

(Optional) The number of packets per second at which update packets are sent. The range is 0 to 32000.

 
Defaults

UplinkFast is disabled.

The update rate is 150 packets per second.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command only on access switches.

You can configure the UplinkFast feature for rapid PVST+ (RPVST+) or for multiple spanning tree (MST) mode, but the feature remains disabled (inactive) until you change the spanning tree mode to PVST+.

When you enable UplinkFast, it is enabled for the entire switch and cannot be enabled for individual VLANs.

When UplinkFast is enabled, the switch priority of all VLANs is set to 49152. If you change the path cost to a value less than 3000 and you enable UplinkFast or UplinkFast is already enabled, the path cost of all interfaces and VLAN trunks is increased by 3000 (if you change the path cost to 3000 or above, the path cost is not altered). The changes to the switch priority and the path cost reduce the chance that a switch will become the root switch.

When UplinkFast is disabled, the switch priorities of all VLANs and path costs of all interfaces are set to default values if you did not modify them from their defaults.

When spanning tree detects that the root port has failed, UplinkFast immediately changes to an alternate root port, changing the new root port directly to forwarding state. During this time, a topology change notification is sent.

Do not enable the root guard on interfaces that will be used by the UplinkFast feature. With UplinkFast, the backup interfaces (in the blocked state) replace the root port in the case of a failure. However, if root guard is also enabled, all the backup interfaces used by the UplinkFast feature are placed in the root-inconsistent state (blocked) and prevented from reaching the forwarding state.

If you set the max-update-rate to 0, station-learning frames are not generated, so the spanning-tree topology converges more slowly after a loss of connectivity.

Examples

This example shows how to enable UplinkFast:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree uplinkfast
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show spanning-tree summary privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree summary

Displays a summary of the spanning-tree interface states.

spanning-tree vlan root primary

Forces this switch to be the root switch.

spanning-tree vlan

To configure spanning tree on a per-VLAN basis, use the spanning-tree vlan global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

spanning-tree vlan vlan-id [ forward-time seconds | hello-time seconds | max-age seconds |
priority priority | root { primary | secondary } [ diameter net-diameter
[ hello-time seconds ]]]

no spanning-tree vlan vlan-id [ forward-time | hello-time | max-age | priority | root ]

 
Syntax Description

vlan-id

VLAN range associated with a spanning-tree instance. You can specify a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number, a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen, or a series of VLANs separated by a comma. The range is 1 to 4094.

forward-time seconds

(Optional) Sets the forward-delay time for the specified spanning-tree instance. The forwarding time specifies how long each of the listening and learning states last before the interface begins forwarding. The range is 4 to 30 seconds.

hello-time seconds

(Optional) Sets the interval between hello bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) sent by the root switch configuration messages. The range is 1 to 10 seconds.

max-age seconds

(Optional) Sets the interval between messages the spanning tree receives from the root switch. If a switch does not receive a BPDU message from the root switch within this interval, it recomputes the spanning-tree topology. The range is 6 to 40 seconds.

priority priority

(Optional) Sets the switch priority for the specified spanning-tree instance. This setting affects the likelihood that this switch is selected as the root switch. A lower value increases the probability that the switch is selected as the root switch.

The range is 0 to 61440 in increments of 4096. Valid priority values are 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, and 61440. All other values are rejected.

root primary

(Optional) Forces this switch to be the root switch.

root secondary

(Optional) Sets this switch to be the root switch should the primary root switch fail.

diameter net-diameter

(Optional) Sets the maximum number of switches between any two end stations. The range is 2 to 7.

 
Defaults

Spanning tree is enabled on all VLANs.

The forward-delay time is 15 seconds.

The hello time is 2 seconds.

The max-age is 20 seconds.

The primary root switch priority is 24576.

The secondary root switch priority is 28672.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Disabling the STP causes the VLAN to stop participating in the spanning-tree topology. Interfaces that are administratively down remain down. Received BPDUs are forwarded like other multicast frames. The VLAN does not detect and prevent loops when STP is disabled.

You can disable the STP on a VLAN that is not currently active and verify the change by using the show running-config or the show spanning-tree vlan vlan-id privileged EXEC command. The setting takes effect when the VLAN is activated.

When disabling or reenabling the STP, you can specify a range of VLANs that you want to disable or enable.

When a VLAN is disabled and then enabled, all assigned VLANs continue to be its members. However, all spanning-tree bridge parameters are returned to their previous settings (the last setting before the VLAN was disabled).

You can enable spanning-tree options on a VLAN that has no interfaces assigned to it. The setting takes effect when you assign interfaces to it.

When setting the max-age seconds, if a switch does not receive BPDUs from the root switch within the specified interval, it recomputes the spanning-tree topology. The max-age setting must be greater than the hello-time setting.

The spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root command should be used only on backbone switches.

When you enter the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root command, the software checks the switch priority of the current root switch for each VLAN. Because of the extended system ID support, the switch sets the switch priority for the specified VLAN to 24576 if this value will cause this switch to become the root for the specified VLAN. If any root switch for the specified VLAN has a switch priority lower than 24576, the switch sets its own priority for the specified VLAN to 4096 less than the lowest switch priority. (4096 is the value of the least-significant bit of a 4-bit switch priority value.)

When you enter the spanning-tree vlan vlan-id root secondary command, because of support for the extended system ID, the software changes the switch priority from the default value (32768) to 28672. If the root switch fails, this switch becomes the next root switch (if the other switches in the network use the default switch priority of 32768, and are unlikely to become the root switch).

Examples

This example shows how to disable the STP on VLAN 5:

Switch(config)# no spanning-tree vlan 5
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show spanning-tree privileged EXEC command. In this instance, VLAN 5 does not appear in the list.

This example shows how to set the spanning-tree forwarding time to 18 seconds for VLANs 20 and 25:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree vlan 20,25 forward-time 18
 

This example shows how to set the spanning-tree hello-delay time to 3 seconds for VLANs 20 to 24:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree vlan 20-24 hello-time 3
 

This example shows how to set spanning-tree max-age parameter to 30 seconds for VLAN 20:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree vlan 20 max-age 30
 

This example shows how to reset the max-age parameter to the default value for spanning-tree instance 100 and 105 to 108:

Switch(config)# no spanning-tree vlan 100, 105-108 max-age
 

This example shows how to set the spanning-tree priority to 8192 for VLAN 20:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree vlan 20 priority 8192
 

This example shows how to configure the switch as the root switch for VLAN 10 with a network diameter of 4:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree vlan 10 root primary diameter 4
 

This example shows how to configure the switch as the secondary root switch for VLAN 10 with a network diameter of 4:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree vlan 10 root secondary diameter 4
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show spanning-tree vlan vlan-id privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show spanning-tree vlan

Displays spanning-tree information.

spanning-tree cost

Sets the path cost for spanning-tree calculations.

spanning-tree guard

Enables the root guard or the loop guard feature for all the VLANs associated with the selected interface.

spanning-tree port-priority

Sets an interface priority.

spanning-tree portfast (global configuration)

Globally enables the BPDU filtering or the BPDU guard feature on Port Fast-enabled interfaces or enables the Port Fast feature on all nontrunking interfaces.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration)

Enables the Port Fast feature on an interface in all its associated VLANs.

spanning-tree uplinkfast

Enables the UplinkFast feature, which accelerates the choice of a new root port.

speed

To specify the speed of a 10/100 Mb/s or 10/100/1000 Mb/s port, use the speed interface configuration command. Use the no or default form of this command to return the port to its default value.

speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto [ 10 | 100 | 1000 ] | nonegotiate }

no speed

 
Syntax Description

10

Specifies 10 Mb/s.

100

Specifies 100 Mb/s.

1000

Specifies 1000 Mb/s. This option is valid and visible only on 10/100/1000 Mb/s-ports.

auto

Automatically detects the speed it should run at based on the port at the other end of the link. If you use the 10, 100, or 1000 keywords with the auto keyword, the port only autonegotiates at the specified speeds.

nonegotiate

Disabled autonegotiation, and the port runs at 1000 Mb/s. (The 1000BASE-T SFP does not support the nonegotiate keyword.)

 
Defaults

The default is auto.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Except for the 1000BASE-T SFP modules, if an SFP module port is connected to a device that does not support autonegotiation, you can configure the speed to not negotiate (nonegotiate ).

If the speed is set to auto, the switch negotiates with the device at the other end of the link for the speed setting and then forces the speed setting to the negotiated value. The duplex setting remains as configured on each end of the link, which could result in a duplex setting mismatch.

If both ends of the line support autonegotiation, we highly recommend the default autonegotiation settings. If one interface supports autonegotiation and the other end does not, use the auto setting on the supported side, but set the duplex and speed on the other side.


Caution Changing the interface speed and duplex mode configuration might shut down and reenable the interface during the reconfiguration.

For guidelines on setting the switch speed and duplex parameters, see the “Configuring Interface Characteristics” chapter in the software configuration guide for this release.

Examples

This example shows how to set the speed on a port to 100 Mb/s:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# speed 100
 

This example shows how to set a port to autonegotiate at only 10 Mb/s:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# speed auto 10
 

This example shows how to set a port to autonegotiate at only 10 or 100 Mb/s:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# speed auto 10 100
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

duplex

Specifies the duplex mode of operation.

show interfaces

Displays the statistical information specific to all interfaces or to a specific interface.

srr-queue bandwidth limit

To limit the maximum output on a port. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting, use the srr-queue bandwidth limit interface configuration command.

srr-queue bandwidth limit weight1

no srr-queue bandwidth limit

 
Syntax Description

weight1

Percentage of the port speed to which the port should be limited. The range is 10 to 90.

 
Defaults

The port is not rate limited and is set to 100 percent.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If you configure this command to 80 percent, the port is idle 20 percent of the time. The line rate drops to 80 percent of the connected speed. These values are not exact because the hardware adjusts the line rate in increments of six.


Note The egress queue default settings are suitable for most situations. You should change them only when you have a thorough understanding of the egress queues and if these settings do not meet your quality of service (QoS) solution.


Examples

This example shows how to limit a port to 80 Mb/s:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# srr-queue bandwidth limit 80
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show mls qos interface [ interface-id ] queueing privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mls qos queue-set output buffers

Allocates buffers to the queue set.

mls qos srr-queue output cos-map

Maps class of service (CoS) values to egress queue or maps CoS values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map

Maps Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) values to an egress queue or maps DSCP values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos queue-set output threshold

Configures the weighted tail-drop (WTD) thresholds, guarantees the availability of buffers, and configures the maximum memory allocation for the queue set.

queue-set

Maps a port to a queue set.

show mls qos interface queueing

Displays QoS information.

srr-queue bandwidth shape

Assigns the shaped weights and enables bandwidth shaping on the four egress queues mapped to a port.

srr-queue bandwidth share

Assigns the shared weights and enables bandwidth sharing on the four egress queues mapped to a port.

srr-queue bandwidth shape

To assign the shaped weights and to enable bandwidth shaping on the four egress queues mapped to a port, use the srr-queue bandwidth shape interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

srr-queue bandwidth shape weight1 weight2 weight3 weight4

no srr-queue bandwidth shape

 
Syntax Description

weight1 weight2 weight3 weight4

Assigns the weights to specify the percentage of the port that is shaped. The inverse ratio (1/ weight) specifies the shaping bandwidth for this queue. Separate each value with a space. The range is 0 to 65535.

 
Defaults

Weight1 is set to 25. Weight2, weight3, and weight4 are set to 0, and these queues are in shared mode.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

In shaped mode, the queues are guaranteed a percentage of the bandwidth, and they are rate-limited to that amount. Shaped traffic does not use more than the allocated bandwidth even if the link is idle. Use shaping to smooth bursty traffic or to provide a smoother output over time.

The shaped mode overrides the shared mode.

If you configure a shaped queue weight to 0 by using the srr-queue bandwidth shape interface configuration command, this queue participates in shared mode. The weight specified with the srr-queue bandwidth shape command is ignored, and the weights specified with the srr-queue bandwidth share interface configuration command for a queue come into effect.

When configuring queues for the same port for both shaping and sharing, make sure that you configure the lowest numbered queue for shaping.


Note The egress queue default settings are suitable for most situations. You should change them only when you have a thorough understanding of the egress queues and if these settings do not meet your QoS solution.


Examples

This example shows how to configure the queues for the same port for both shaping and sharing. Because the weight ratios for queues 2, 3, and 4 are set to 0, these queues operate in shared mode. The bandwidth weight for queue 1 is 1/8, which is 12.5 percent. Queue 1 is guaranteed this bandwidth and limited to it; it does not extend its slot to the other queues even if the other queues have no traffic and are idle. Queues 2, 3, and 4 are in shared mode, and the setting for queue 1 is ignored. The bandwidth ratio allocated for the queues in shared mode is 4/(4+4+4), which is 33 percent:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# srr-queue bandwidth shape 8 0 0 0
Switch(config-if)# srr-queue bandwidth share 4 4 4 4
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mls qos queue-set output buffers

Allocates buffers to a queue set.

mls qos srr-queue output cos-map

Maps class of service (CoS) values to an egress queue or maps CoS values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map

Maps Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) values to an egress queue or maps DSCP values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos queue-set output threshold

Configures the weighted tail-drop (WTD) thresholds, guarantees the availability of buffers, and configures the maximum memory allocation to a queue set.

priority-queue

Enables the egress expedite queue on a port.

queue-set

Maps a port to a queueset.

show mls qos interface queueing

Displays quality of service (QoS) information.

srr-queue bandwidth share

Assigns the shared weights and enables bandwidth sharing on the four egress queues mapped to a port.

srr-queue bandwidth share

To assign the shared weights and to enable bandwidth sharing on the four egress queues mapped to a port, use the srr-queue bandwidth share interface configuration command switch. The ratio of the weights is the ratio of frequency in which the shaped round robin (SRR) scheduler dequeues packets from each queue. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

srr-queue bandwidth share weight1 weight2 weight3 weight4

no srr-queue bandwidth share

 
Syntax Description

weight1 weight2 weight3 weight4

The ratios of the frequency in which the SRR scheduler dequeues packets. Separate each value with a space. The range is 1 to 255.

 
Defaults

Weight1, weight2, weight3, and weight4 are 25 (1/4 of the bandwidth is allocated to each queue).

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The absolute value of each weight is meaningless, and only the ratio of parameters is used.

In shared mode, the queues share the bandwidth among them according to the configured weights. The bandwidth is guaranteed at this level but not limited to it. For example, if a queue empties and does not require a share of the link, the remaining queues can expand into the unused bandwidth and share it among themselves.

If you configure a shaped queue weight to 0 by using the srr-queue bandwidth shape interface configuration command, this queue participates in SRR shared mode. The weight specified with the srr-queue bandwidth shape command is ignored, and the weights specified with the srr-queue bandwidth share interface configuration command for a queue take effect.

When configuring queues for the same port for both shaping and sharing, make sure that you configure the lowest numbered queue for shaping.


Note The egress queue default settings are suitable for most situations. You should change them only when you have a thorough understanding of the egress queues and if these settings do not meet your QoS solution.


Examples

This example shows how to configure the weight ratio of the SRR scheduler running on an egress port. Four queues are used. The bandwidth ratio allocated for each queue in shared mode is 1/(1+2+3+4), 2/(1+2+3+4), 3/(1+2+3+4), and 4/(1+2+3+4), which is 10 percent, 20 percent, 30 percent, and 40 percent for queues 1, 2, 3, and 4. This means that queue 4 has four times the bandwidth of queue 1, twice the bandwidth of queue 2, and one-and-a-third times the bandwidth of queue 3.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# srr-queue bandwidth share 1 2 3 4

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

mls qos queue-set output buffers

Allocates buffers to a queueset.

mls qos srr-queue output cos-map

Maps class of service (CoS) values to an egress queue or maps CoS values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos srr-queue output dscp-map

Maps Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) values to an egress queue or maps DSCP values to a queue and to a threshold ID.

mls qos queue-set output threshold

Configures the weighted tail-drop (WTD) thresholds, guarantees the availability of buffers, and configures the maximum memory allocation to a queueset.

priority-queue

Enables the egress expedite queue on a port.

queue-set

Maps a port to a queueset.

show mls qos interface queueing

Displays quality of service (QoS) information.

srr-queue bandwidth shape

Assigns the shaped weights and enables bandwidth shaping on the four egress queues mapped to a port.

storm-control

To enable broadcast, multicast, or unicast storm control and to set threshold levels on an interface, use the storm-control interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

storm-control {{ broadcast | multicast | unicast } level { level [ level-low ] | bps bps [ bps-low ] | pps pps [ pps-low ]}} | { action { shutdown | trap }}

no storm-control {{ broadcast | multicast | unicast } level } | { action { shutdown | trap }}

 
Syntax Description

broadcast

Enables broadcast storm control on the interface.

multicast

Enables multicast storm control on the interface.

unicast

Enables unicast storm control on the interface.

level level level-low

Specifies the rising and falling suppression levels as a percentage of total bandwidth of the port.

  • level — Rising suppression level, up to two decimal places. The range is 0.00 to 100.00. B lock the flooding of storm packets when the value specified for level is reached.
  • level-low — (Optional) Falling suppression level, up to two decimal places. The range is 0.00 to 100.00. This value must be less than or equal to the rising suppression value. If you do not configure a falling suppression level, it is set to the rising suppression level.

level bps bps [ bps-low ]

Specifies the rising and falling suppression levels as a rate in bits per second at which traffic is received on the port.

  • bps — Rising suppression level, up to 1 decimal place. The range is 0.0 to 10000000000.0. B lock the flooding of storm packets when the value specified for bps is reached.
  • bps-low — (Optional) Falling suppression level, up to 1 decimal place. The range is 0.0 to 10000000000.0. This value must be equal to or less than the rising suppression value.

You can use metric suffixes such as k, m, and g for large number thresholds.

level pps pps [ pps-low ]

Specifies the rising and falling suppression levels as a rate in packets per second at which traffic is received on the port.

  • pps — Rising suppression level, up to 1 decimal place. The range is 0.0 to 10000000000.0. Bl ock the flooding of storm packets when the value specified for pps is reached.
  • pps-low — (Optional) Falling suppression level, up to 1 decimal place. The range is 0.0 to 10000000000.0. This value must be equal to or less than the rising suppression value.

You can use metric suffixes such as k, m, and g for large number thresholds.

action shutdown | trap

Action taken when a storm occurs on a port. The default action is to filter traffic and to not send an Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) trap.

The keywords have these meanings:

  • shutdown —Disables the port during a storm.
  • trap —Sends an SNMP trap when a storm occurs.

 
Defaults

Broadcast, multicast, and unicast storm control are disabled.

The default action is to filter traffic and to not send an SNMP trap.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The storm-control suppression level can be entered as a percentage of total bandwidth of the port, as a rate in packets per second at which traffic is received, or as a rate in bits per second at which traffic is received.

When specified as a percentage of total bandwidth, a suppression value of 100 percent means that no limit is placed on the specified traffic type. A value of level 0 0 means that all broadcast, multicast, or unicast traffic on that port is blocked. Storm control is enabled only when the rising suppression level is less than 100 percent. If no other storm-control configuration is specified, the default action is to filter the traffic causing the storm and to send no SNMP traps.


Note When the storm control threshold for multicast traffic is reached, all multicast traffic except control traffic, such as bridge protocol data unit (BDPU) and Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) frames, are blocked.However, the switch does not differentiate between routing updates, such as Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) and regular multicast data traffic, so both types of traffic are blocked.


The trap and shutdown options are independent of each other.

If you configure the action to be taken as shutdown (the port is error-disabled during a storm) when a packet storm is detected, you must use the no shutdown interface configuration command to bring the interface out of this state. If you do not specify the shutdown action, specify the action as trap (the switch generates a trap when a storm is detected).

When a storm occurs and the action is to filter traffic, if the falling suppression level is not specified, the switch blocks all traffic until the traffic rate drops below the rising suppression level. If the falling suppression level is specified, the switch blocks traffic until the traffic rate drops below this level.


Note Storm control is supported on physical interfaces. You can also configure storm control on an EtherChannel. When storm control is configured on an EtherChannel, the storm control settings propagate to the EtherChannel physical interfaces.


When a broadcast storm occurs and the action is to filter traffic, the switch blocks only broadcast traffic.

For more information, see the software configuration guide for this release.

Examples

This example shows how to enable broadcast storm control with a 75.5-percent rising suppression level:

Switch(config-if)# storm-control broadcast level 75.5
 

This example shows how to enable unicast storm control on a port with a 87-percent rising suppression level and a 65-percent falling suppression level:

Switch(config-if)# storm-control unicast level 87 65
 

This example shows how to enable multicast storm control on a port with a 2000-packets-per-second rising suppression level and a 1000-packets-per-second falling suppression level:

Switch(config-if)# storm-control multicast level pps 2k 1k
 

This example shows how to enable the shutdown action on a port:

Switch(config-if)# storm-control action shutdown

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show storm-control

Displays broadcast, multicast, or unicast storm control settings on all interfaces or on a specified interface.

switchport access

To configure a port as a static-access or dynamic-access port, use the switchport access interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to reset the access mode to the default VLAN for the switch.

switchport access vlan { vlan-id | dynamic }

no switchport access vlan

 
Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

Configures the interface as a static access port with the VLAN ID of the access mode VLAN; the range is 1 to 4094.

vlan dynamic

Specifies that the access mode VLAN is dependent on the VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) protocol. The port is assigned to a VLAN based on the source MAC address of a host (or hosts) connected to the port. The switch sends every new MAC address received to the VMPS server to get the VLAN name to which the dynamic-access port should be assigned. If the port already has a VLAN assigned and the source has already been approved by the VMPS, the switch forwards the packet to the VLAN.

 
Defaults

The default access VLAN and trunk interface native VLAN is a default VLAN corresponding to the platform or interface hardware.

A dynamic-access port is initially a member of no VLAN and receives its assignment based on the packet it receives.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If the switchport mode is set to access, the port operates as a member of the specified VLAN. If set to dynamic, the port starts discovery of VLAN assignment based on the incoming packets it receives.

The no switchport access command resets the access mode VLAN to the appropriate default VLAN for the device.

The port must be in access mode before the switchport access vlan command can take effect.

An access port can be assigned to only one VLAN.

The VMPS server (such as a Catalyst 6500 series switch) must be configured before a port is configured as dynamic.

These restrictions apply to dynamic-access ports:

  • The software implements the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) client, which can query a VMPS such as a Catalyst 6500 series switch. The switches are not VMPS servers. The VMPS server must be configured before a port is configured as dynamic.
  • Use dynamic-access ports only to connect end stations. Connecting them to switches or routers (that use bridging protocols) can cause a loss of connectivity.
  • Configure the network so that STP does not put the dynamic-access port into an STP blocking state. The Port Fast feature is automatically enabled on dynamic-access ports.
  • Dynamic-access ports can only be in one VLAN and do not use VLAN tagging.
  • Dynamic-access ports cannot be configured as

– Members of an EtherChannel port group (dynamic-access ports cannot be grouped with any other port, including other dynamic ports).

– Source or destination ports in a static address entry.

– Monitor ports.

Examples

This example shows how to change a switched port interface that is operating in access mode to operate in VLAN 2 instead of the default VLAN:

Switch(config-if)# switchport access vlan 2
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces interface-id switchport privileged EXEC command and examining information in the Administrative Mode and Operational Mode rows.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port, including port blocking and port protection settings.

switchport mode

Configures the VLAN membership mode of a port.

switchport autostate exclude

To exclude an interface from the VLAN interface (switch virtual interface) line-state up or down calculation, use the switchport autostate exclude interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

switchport autostate exclude

no switchport autostate exclude


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the IP services image.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

All ports in the VLAN are included in the VLAN interface link-up calculation.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Enter the switchport autostate exclude command on a Layer 2 access or trunk port belonging to an SVI.

A VLAN interface (SVI) is up if ports are forwarding traffic in the associated VLAN. When all ports on a VLAN are down or blocking, the SVI is down. For the SVI line state to be up, at least one port in the VLAN must be up and forwarding. You can use the switchport autostate exclude command to exclude a port from the SVI interface line-state up-or-down calculation. For example, you might exclude a monitoring port from the calculations so that the VLAN is not considered up when only the monitoring port is active.

When you enter the switchport autostate exclude command on a port, the command applies to all VLANs that are enabled on the port.

You can verify the autostate mode of an interface by entering the show interface interface-id switchport privileged EXEC command. If the mode has not been set, the autostate mode does not appear.

Examples

This example shows how to configure autostate exclude on an interface and to verify the configuration:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport autostate exclude
Switch(config-if)# end
Switch# show interface gigabitethernet1/1 switchport
Name: Gi1/1
Switchport: Enabled
Administrative Mode: dynamic auto
Operational Mode: down
Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate
Negotiation of Trunking: On
Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)
Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)
Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled
Voice VLAN: none
Administrative host-association: none
Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL
Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001
Capture Mode Disabled
Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL
Autostate mode exclude

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces [ interface-id ] switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port, including autostate mode, if set.

show running-config

Displays the current operating configuration. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

switchport backup interface

To configure Flex Links, a pair of interfaces that provide backup to each other, use the switchport backup interface interface configuration command on a Layer 2 interface. Use the no form of this command to remove the Flex Links configuration.

switchport backup interface [FastEthernet interface-id | GigabitEthernet interface-id | Port-channel interface-id | TenGigabitEthernet interface-id ] {mmu primary vlan interface-id | multicast fast-convergence | preemption {delay delay-time | mode} | prefer vlan vlan-id}

no switchport backup interface [FastEthernet interface-id | GigabitEthernet interface-id | Port-channel interface-id | TenGigabitEthernet interface-id ] {mmu | multicast fast-convergence | preemption {delay delay-time | mode} | prefer vlan vlan-id}


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the LAN Base image.


 
Syntax Description

FastEthernet

(Optional) Specifies the FastEthernet IEEE 802.3 port name. Valid range is 0 to 9.

GigabitEthernet

(Optional) Specifies the GigabitEthernet IEEE 802.3z port name. Valid range is 0 to 9.

Port-channel

(Optional) Specifies the Ethernet Channel of interface. Valid range is 0 to 48.

TenGigabitEthernet

(Optional) Specifies the Ten Gigabit Ethernet port name. Valid range is 0 to 9.

interface-id

The Layer 2 interface that acts as a backup link to the interface being configured. The interface can be a physical interface or port channel. The portchannel range is 1 to 48.

mmu primary

vlan interface-id

Configures the MAC move update (MMU) for a backup interface pair.

multicast fast-convergence

Specifies the Multicast Fast-convergence parameter.

preemption

Configures a preemption scheme for a backup interface pair.

delay delay-time

Specifies a preemption delay; the valid values are 1 to 300 seconds.

mode

Specifies a preemption mode as bandwidth, forced, or off.

prefer vlan vlan-id

Specifies that VLANs are carried on the backup interfaces of a Flex Link pair. VLAN ID range is 1 to 4,094.

off

Specifies that no preemption occurs from backup to active.

delay delay-time

Specifies a preemption delay; the valid values are 1 to 300 seconds.

 
Defaults

The default is to have no Flex Links defined. Preemption mode is off; no preemption occurs. Preemption delay is set to 35 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

With Flex Links configured, one link acts as the primary interface and forwards traffic, while the other interface is in standby mode, ready to begin forwarding traffic if the primary link shuts down. The interface being configured is referred to as the active link; the specified interface is identified as the backup link. The feature provides an alternative to the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), allowing users to turn off STP and still retain basic link redundancy.

  • This command is available only for Layer 2 interfaces.
  • You can configure only one Flex Link backup link for any active link, and it must be a different interface from the active interface.
  • An interface can belong to only one Flex Link pair. An interface can be a backup link for only one active link. An active link cannot belong to another Flex Link pair.
  • A backup link does not have to be the same type (Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet, for instance) as the active link. However, you should configure both Flex Links with similar characteristics so that there are no loops or changes in behavior if the standby link begins to forward traffic.
  • Neither of the links can be a port that belongs to an EtherChannel. However, you can configure two port channels (EtherChannel logical interfaces) as Flex Links, and you can configure a port channel and a physical interface as Flex Links, with either the port channel or the physical interface as the active link.
  • If STP is configured on the switch, Flex Links do not participate in STP in all valid VLANs. If STP is not running, be sure that there are no loops in the configured topology.

Examples

This example shows how to configure two interfaces as Flex Links:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(conf)# interface fastethernet1/1
Switch(conf-if)# switchport backup interface fastethernet1/2
Switch(conf-if)# end
 

This example shows how to configure the Fast Ethernet interface to always preempt the backup:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(conf)# interface fastethernet1/1
Switch(conf-if)# switchport backup interface fastethernet1/2 preemption forced
Switch(conf-if)# end
 

This example shows how to configure the Fast Ethernet interface preemption delay time:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(conf)# interface fastethernet1/1
Switch(conf-if)# switchport backup interface fastethernet1/2 preemption delay 150
Switch(conf-if)# end
 

This example shows how to configure the Fast Ethernet interface as the MMU primary VLAN:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(conf)# interface fastethernet1/1
Switch(conf-if)# switchport backup interface fastethernet1/2 mmu primary vlan 1021
Switch(conf-if)# end
 
You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces switchport backup privileged EXEC command.
 

The following example shows how to configure preferred VLANs:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport backup interface gigabitethernet 1/1 prefer vlan 60,100-120
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces switchport backup privileged EXEC command.

In the following example, VLANs 60, and 100 to 120 are configured on the switch:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport backup interface gigabitEthernet 1/1 prefer vlan 60,100-120
 

When both interfaces are up, Gi1/2 forwards traffic for VLANs 1 to 50, and Gi1/1 forwards traffic for VLANs 60 and 100 to 120.

Switch# show interfaces switchport backup
Switch Backup Interface Pairs:
 
Active Interface Backup Interface State
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/2 GigabitEthernet1/1 Active Up/Backup Up
 
Vlans Preferred on Active Interface: 1-50
Vlans Preferred on Backup Interface: 60, 100-120
 

When a Flex Link interface goes down (LINK_DOWN), VLANs preferred on this interface are moved to the peer interface of the Flex Link pair. In this example, if interface Gi1/2 goes down, Gi1/1 carries all VLANs of the Flex Link pair.

Switch# show interfaces switchport backup
Switch Backup Interface Pairs:
 
Active Interface Backup Interface State
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/2 GigabitEthernet1/1 Active Down/Backup Up
 
Vlans Preferred on Active Interface: 1-50
Vlans Preferred on Backup Interface: 60, 100-120
 

When a Flex Link interface comes up, VLANs preferred on this interface are blocked on the peer interface and moved to the forwarding state on the interface that has just come up. In this example, if interface Gi1/2 comes up, VLANs preferred on this interface are blocked on the peer interface Gi1/1 and forwarded on Gi1/2.

Switch# show interfaces switchport backup
Switch Backup Interface Pairs:
 
Active Interface Backup Interface State
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/2 GigabitEthernet1/1 Active Up/Backup Up
 
Vlans Preferred on Active Interface: 1-50
Vlans Preferred on Backup Interface: 60, 100-120
 

This example shows how to configure multicast fast-convergence on interface Gi1/1:

Switch# configure terminal
Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 1/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport backup interface gigabitEthernet 1/2 multicast fast-convergence
Switch(config-if)# end
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces switchport backup detail privileged EXEC command.

 
Switch# show interfaces switchport backup detail
 
Switch Backup Interface Pairs:
 
Active Interface Backup Interface State
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/1 GigabitEthernet1/2 Active Up/Backup Standby
Preemption Mode : off
Multicast Fast Convergence : On
Bandwidth : 1000000 Kbit (Gi1/1), 1000000 Kbit (Gi1/2)
Mac Address Move Update Vlan : auto

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces [ interface-id ] switchport backup

Displays the configured Flex Links and their status on the switch or for the specified interface.

switchport block

To prevent unknown multicast or unicast packets from being forwarded, use the switchport block interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to allow forwarding unknown multicast or unicast packets.

switchport block { multicast | unicast }

no switchport block { multicast | unicast }

 
Syntax Description

multicast

Specifies that unknown multicast traffic should be blocked.

Note Only pure Layer 2 multicast traffic is blocked. Multicast packets that contain IPv4 or IPv6 information in the header are not blocked.

unicast

Specifies that unknown unicast traffic should be blocked.

 
Defaults

Unknown multicast and unicast traffic is not blocked.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

 
Usage Guidelines

By default, all traffic with unknown MAC addresses is sent to all ports. You can block unknown multicast or unicast traffic on protected or nonprotected ports. If unknown multicast or unicast traffic is not blocked on a protected port, there could be security issues.

With multicast traffic, the port blocking feature blocks only pure Layer 2 packets. Multicast packets that contain IPv4 or IPv6 information in the header are not blocked.

Blocking unknown multicast or unicast traffic is not automatically enabled on protected ports; you must explicitly configure it.

For more information about blocking packets, see the software configuration guide for this release.

Examples

This example shows how to block unknown unicast traffic on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# switchport block unicast
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces interface-id switchport privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port, including port blocking and port protection settings.

switchport host

To optimize a port for a host connection, use the switchport host interface configuration command. The no form of this command has no affect on the system.

switchport host

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

The default is for the port to not be optimized for a host connection.

 
Command Modes

I nterface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

To optimize the port for a host connection, the switchport host command sets switch port mode to access, enables spanning tree Port Fast, and disables channel grouping. Only an end station can accept this configuration.

Because spanning tree Port Fast is enabled, you should enter the switchport host command only on ports that are connected to a single host. Connecting other switches, hubs, concentrators, or bridges to a fast-start port can cause temporary spanning-tree loops.

Enable the switchport host command to decrease the time that it takes to start up packet forwarding.

Examples

This example shows how to optimize the port configuration for a host connection:

Switch(config-if)# switchport host
switchport mode will be set to access
spanning-tree portfast will be enabled
channel group will be disabled
Switch(config-if)#
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces interface-id switchport privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching port, including switchport mode.

switchport mode

To configure the VLAN membership mode of a port, use the switchport mode interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to reset the mode to the appropriate default for the device.

switchport mode { access | dynamic { auto | desirable } | trunk }

no switchport mode { access | dynamic | trunk }

 
Syntax Description

access

Sets the port to access mode (either static-access or dynamic-access depending on the setting of the switchport access vlan interface configuration command). The port is set to access unconditionally and operates as a nontrunking, single VLAN interface that sends and receives nonencapsulated (non-tagged) frames. An access port can be assigned to only one VLAN.

dynamic auto

Sets the interface trunking mode dynamic parameter to auto to specify that the interface convert the link to a trunk link. This is the default switchport mode.

dynamic desirable

Sets the interface trunking mode dynamic parameter to desirable to specify that the interface actively attempt to convert the link to a trunk link.

trunk

Sets the port to trunk unconditionally. The port is a trunking VLAN Layer 2 interface. The port sends and receives encapsulated (tagged) frames that identify the VLAN of origination. A trunk is a point-to-point link between two switches or between a switch and a router.

 
Defaults

The default mode is dynamic auto.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

A configuration that uses the access or trunk keywords takes effect only when you configure the port in the appropriate mode by using the switchport mode command. The static-access and trunk configuration are saved, but only one configuration is active at a time.

When you enter access mode, the interface changes to permanent nontrunking mode and negotiates to convert the link into a nontrunk link even if the neighboring interface does not agree to the change.

When you enter trunk mode, the interface changes to permanent trunking mode and negotiates to convert the link into a trunk link even if the interface connecting to it does not agree to the change.

When you enter dynamic auto mode, the interface converts the link to a trunk link if the neighboring interface is set to trunk or desirable mode.

When you enter dynamic desirable mode, the interface becomes a trunk interface if the neighboring interface is set to trunk, desirable, or auto mode.

To autonegotiate trunking, the interfaces must be in the same VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) domain. Trunk negotiation is managed by the Dynamic Trunking Protocol ( DTP), which is a point-to-point protocol. However, some internetworking devices might forward DTP frames improperly, which could cause misconfigurations. To avoid this, you should configure interfaces connected to devices that do not support DTP to not forward DTP frames, which turns off DTP.

  • If you do not intend to trunk across those links, use the switchport mode a ccess interface configuration command to disable trunking.
  • To enable trunking to a device that does not support DTP, use the switchport mode trunk and switchport nonegotiate interface configuration commands to cause the interface to become a trunk but to not generate DTP frames.

Access ports and trunk ports are mutually exclusive.

The IEEE 802.1x feature interacts with switchport modes in these ways:

  • If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a trunk port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to trunk, the port mode is not changed.
  • If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a port set to dynamic auto or dynamic desirable, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to dynamic auto or dynamic desirable, the port mode is not changed.
  • If you try to enable IEEE 802.1x on a dynamic-access (VLAN Query Protocol [VQP]) port, an error message appears, and IEEE 802.1x is not enabled. If you try to change an IEEE 802.1x-enabled port to dynamic VLAN assignment, an error message appears, and the VLAN configuration is not changed.

Examples

This example shows how to configure a port for access mode:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access
 

This example shows how set the port to dynamic desirable mode:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode dynamic desirable
 

This example shows how to configure a port for trunk mode:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
 

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port, including port blocking and port protection settings.

switchport access

Configures a port as a static-access or dynamic-access port.

switchport trunk

Configures the trunk characteristics when an interface is in trunking mode.

switchport nonegotiate

To specify that Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) negotiation packets are not sent on the Layer 2 interface, use the switchport nonegotiate interface configuration command. The switch does not engage in DTP negotiation on this interface. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

switchport nonegotiate

no switchport nonegotiate

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

The default is to use DTP negotiation to learn the trunking status.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The no form of the switchport nonegotiate command removes nonegotiate status.

This command is valid only when the interface switchport mode is access or trunk (configured by using the switchport mode access or the switchport mode trunk interface configuration command). This command returns an error if you attempt to execute it in dynamic (auto or desirable) mode.

Internetworking devices that do not support DTP might forward DTP frames improperly and cause misconfigurations. To avoid this, you should turn off DTP by using the switchport no negotiate command to configure the interfaces connected to devices that do not support DTP to not forward DTP frames.

When you enter the switchport nonegotiate command, DTP negotiation packets are not sent on the interface. The device does or does not trunk according to the mode parameter: access or trunk.

  • If you do not intend to trunk across those links, use the switchport mode a ccess interface configuration command to disable trunking.
  • To enable trunking on a device that does not support DTP, use the switchport mode trunk and switchport nonegotiate interface configuration commands to cause the interface to become a trunk but to not generate DTP frames.

Examples

This example shows how to cause a port to refrain from negotiating trunking mode and to act as a trunk or access port (depending on the mode set):

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport nonegotiate
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces interface-id switchport privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching port, including port blocking and port protection settings.

switchport mode

Configures the VLAN membership mode of a port.

switchport port-security

To enable port security on the interface, use the switchport port-security interface configuration command without keywords. Use the keywords to configure secure MAC addresses, sticky MAC address learning, a maximum number of secure MAC addresses, or the violation mode. Use the no form of this command to disable port security or to set the parameters to their default states.

switchport port-security [ mac-address mac-address [ vlan { vlan-id | { access | voice }}] | mac-address sticky [ mac-address | vlan { vlan-id | { access | voice }}]] [ maximum value [ vlan { vlan-list | { access | voice }}]]

no switchport port-security [ mac-address mac-address [ vlan { vlan-id | { access | voice }}] | mac-address sticky [ mac-address | vlan { vlan-id | { access | voice }}]] [ maximum value [ vlan { vlan-list | { access | voice }}]]

switchport port-security [ aging ] [ violation { protect | restrict | shutdown | shutdown vlan}]

no switchport port-security [ aging ] [ violation { protect | restrict | shutdown | shutdown vlan}]

 
Syntax Description

mac-address mac-address

(Optional) Specifies a secure MAC address for the interface by entering a 48-bit MAC address. You can add additional secure MAC addresses up to the maximum value configured.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) On a trunk port only, specifies the VLAN ID and the MAC address. If no VLAN ID is specified, the native VLAN is used.

vlan access

(Optional) On an access port only, specifies the VLAN as an access VLAN.

vlan voice

(Optional) On an access port only, specifies the VLAN as a voice VLAN.

Note The voice keyword is available only if voice VLAN is configured on a port and if that port is not the access VLAN.

mac-address sticky mac-address

(Optional) Enables the interface for sticky learning by entering only the mac-address sticky keywords. When sticky learning is enabled, the interface adds all secure MAC addresses that are dynamically learned to the running configuration and converts these addresses to sticky secure MAC addresses.

(Optional) Enter a mac-address to specify a sticky secure MAC address.

maximum value

(Optional) Sets the maximum number of secure MAC addresses for the interface. The maximum number of secure MAC addresses that you can configure on a switch is set by the maximum number of available MAC addresses allowed in the system. This number is determined by the active Switch Database Management (SDM) template. For more information, see the sdm prefer global configuration command. This number represents the total of available MAC addresses, including those used for other Layer 2 functions and any other secure MAC addresses configured on interfaces.

The default setting is 1.

vlan vlan-list

(Optional) For trunk ports, sets the maximum number of secure MAC addresses on a VLAN. If the vlan keyword is not entered, the default value is used.

  • vlan —Sets a per-VLAN maximum value.
  • vlan vlan-list —Sets a per-VLAN maximum value on a range of VLANs separated by a hyphen or a series of VLANs separated by commas. For nonspecified VLANs, the per-VLAN maximum value is used.

aging

(Optional) See the switchport port-security aging command.

violation

(Optional) Sets the security violation mode or the action to be taken if port security is violated. The default is shutdown.

protect

Sets the security violation protect mode. In this mode, when the number of port secure MAC addresses reaches the maximum limit allowed on the port, packets with unknown source addresses are dropped until you remove a sufficient number of secure MAC addresses to drop below the maximum value or increase the number of maximum allowable addresses. You are not notified that a security violation has occurred.

Note We do not recommend configuring the protect mode on a trunk port. The protect mode disables learning when any VLAN reaches its maximum limit, even if the port has not reached its maximum limit.

restrict

Sets the security violation restrict mode. In this mode, when the number of secure MAC addresses reaches the limit allowed on the port, packets with unknown source addresses are dropped until you remove a sufficient number of secure MAC addresses or increase the number of maximum allowable addresses. An SNMP trap is sent, a syslog message is logged, and the violation counter increments.

shutdown

Sets the security violation shutdown mode. In this mode, the interface is error-disabled when a violation occurs and the port LED turns off. An SNMP trap is sent, a syslog message is logged, and the violation counter increments. When a secure port is in the error-disabled state, you can bring it out of this state by entering the errdisable recovery cause psecure-violation global configuration command, or you can manually reenable it by entering the shutdown and no shut down interface configuration commands.

shutdown vlan

Sets the security violation mode to per-VLAN shutdown. In this mode, only the VLAN on which the violation occurred is error-disabled.

 
Defaults

The default is to disable port security.

When port security is enabled and no keywords are entered, the default maximum number of secure MAC addresses is 1.

The default violation mode is shutdown.

Sticky learning is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

A secure port has the following limitations:

  • A secure port can be an access port or a trunk port; it cannot be a dynamic access port.
  • A secure port cannot be a routed port.
  • A secure port cannot be a protected port.
  • A secure port cannot be a destination port for Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN).
  • A secure port cannot belong to a Fast EtherChannel or Gigabit EtherChannel port group.
  • You cannot configure static secure or sticky secure MAC addresses in the voice VLAN.
  • When you enable port security on an interface that is also configured with a voice VLAN, set the maximum allowed secure addresses on the port to two. When the port is connected to a Cisco IP phone, the IP phone requires one MAC address. The Cisco IP phone address is learned on the voice VLAN, but is not learned on the access VLAN. If you connect a single PC to the Cisco IP phone, no additional MAC addresses are required. If you connect more than one PC to the Cisco IP phone, you must configure enough secure addresses to allow one for each PC and one for the Cisco IP phone.
  • Voice VLAN is supported only on access ports and not on trunk ports.
  • When you enter a maximum secure address value for an interface, if the new value is greater than the previous value, the new value overrides the previously configured value. If the new value is less than the previous value and the number of configured secure addresses on the interface exceeds the new value, the command is rejected.
  • The switch does not support port security aging of sticky secure MAC addresses.

A security violation occurs when the maximum number of secure MAC addresses are in the address table and a station whose MAC address is not in the address table attempts to access the interface or when a station whose MAC address is configured as a secure MAC address on another secure port attempts to access the interface.

When a secure port is in the error-disabled state, you can bring it out of this state by entering the errdisable recovery cause psecure-violation global configuration command. You can manually reenable the port by entering the shutdown and no shut down interface configuration commands or by using the clear errdisable interface privileged EXEC command.

Setting a maximum number of addresses to one and configuring the MAC address of an attached device ensures that the device has the full bandwidth of the port.

When you enter a maximum secure address value for an interface, this occurs:

  • If the new value is greater than the previous value, the new value overrides the previously configured value.
  • If the new value is less than the previous value and the number of configured secure addresses on the interface exceeds the new value, the command is rejected.

Sticky secure MAC addresses have these characteristics:

  • When you enable sticky learning on an interface by using the switchport port-security mac-address sticky interface configuration command, the interface converts all the dynamic secure MAC addresses, including those that were dynamically learned before sticky learning was enabled, to sticky secure MAC addresses and adds all sticky secure MAC addresses to the running configuration.
  • If you disable sticky learning by using the no switchport port-security mac-address sticky interface configuration command or the running configuration is removed, the sticky secure MAC addresses remain part of the running configuration but are removed from the address table. The addresses that were removed can be dynamically reconfigured and added to the address table as dynamic addresses.
  • When you configure sticky secure MAC addresses by using the switchport port-security mac-address sticky mac-address interface configuration command, these addresses are added to the address table and the running configuration. If port security is disabled, the sticky secure MAC addresses remain in the running configuration.
  • If you save the sticky secure MAC addresses in the configuration file, when the switch restarts or the interface shuts down, the interface does not need to relearn these addresses. If you do not save the sticky secure addresses, they are lost. If sticky learning is disabled, the sticky secure MAC addresses are converted to dynamic secure addresses and are removed from the running configuration.
  • If you disable sticky learning and enter the switchport port-security mac-address sticky mac-address interface configuration command, an error message appears, and the sticky secure MAC address is not added to the running configuration.

Examples

This example shows how to enable port security on a port and to set the maximum number of secure addresses to 5. The violation mode is the default, and no secure MAC addresses are configured.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 5
 

This example shows how to configure a secure MAC address and a VLAN ID on a port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address 1000.2000.3000 vlan 3
 

This example shows how to enable sticky learning and to enter two sticky secure MAC addresses on a port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky 0000.0000.4141
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky 0000.0000.000f

 

This example show how to configure a port to shut down only the VLAN if a violation occurs:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/2
Switch(config)# switchport port-security violation shutdown vlan
 

You can verify your settings by using the show port-security privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

clear port-security

Deletes from the MAC address table a specific type of secure address or all the secure addresses on the switch or an interface.

show port-security address

Displays all the secure addresses configured on the switch.

show port-security
interface
interface-id

Displays port security configuration for the switch or for the specified interface.

switchport port-security aging

To set the aging time and type for secure address entries or to change the aging behavior for secure addresses on a particular port, use the switchport port-security aging interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to disable port security aging or to set the parameters to their default states.

switchport port-security aging { static | time time | type { absolute | inactivity }}

no switchport port-security aging { static | time | type }

 
Syntax Description

static

Enables aging for statically configured secure addresses on this port.

time time

Specifies the aging time for this port. The range is 0 to 1440 minutes. If the time is 0, aging is disabled for this port.

type

Sets the aging type.

absolute

Sets absolute aging type. All the secure addresses on this port age out exactly after the time (minutes) specified and are removed from the secure address list.

inactivity

Sets the inactivity aging type. The secure addresses on this port age out only if there is no data traffic from the secure source address for the specified time period.

 
Defaults

The port security aging feature is disabled. The default time is 0 minutes.

The default aging type is absolute.

The default static aging behavior is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

To enable secure address aging for a particular port, set the aging time to a value other than 0 for that port.

To allow limited time access to particular secure addresses, set the aging type as absolute. When the aging time lapses, the secure addresses are deleted.

To allow continuous access to a limited number of secure addresses, set the aging type as inactivity. This removes the secure address when it become inactive, and other addresses can become secure.

To allow unlimited access to a secure address, configure it as a secure address, and disable aging for the statically configured secure address by using the no switchport port-security aging static interface configuration command.

Examples

This example sets the aging time as 2 hours for absolute aging for all the secure addresses on the port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security aging time 120
 

This example sets the aging time as 2 minutes for inactivity aging type with aging enabled for configured secure addresses on the port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security aging time 2
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security aging type inactivity
Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security aging static
 

This example shows how to disable aging for configured secure addresses:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# no switchport port-security aging static

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show port-security

Displays the port security settings defined for the port.

switchport port-security

Enables port security on a port, restricts the use of the port to a user-defined group of stations, and configures secure MAC addresses.

switchport priority extend

To set a port priority for the incoming untagged frames or the priority of frames received by the IP phone connected to the specified port, use the switchport priority extend interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

switchport priority extend { cos value | trust }

no switchport priority extend

 
Syntax Description

cos value

Sets the IP phone port to override the IEEE 802.1p priority received from the PC or the attached device with the specified class of service (CoS) value. The range is 0 to 7. Seven is the highest priority. The default is 0.

trust

Sets the IP phone port to trust the IEEE 802.1p priority received from the PC or the attached device.

 
Defaults

The default port priority is set to a CoS value of 0 for untagged frames received on the port.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When voice VLAN is enabled, you can configure the switch to send the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) packets to instruct the IP phone how to send data packets from the device attached to the access port on the Cisco IP Phone. You must enable CDP on the switch port connected to the Cisco IP Phone to send the configuration to the Cisco IP Phone. (CDP is enabled by default globally and on all switch interfaces.)

You should configure voice VLAN on switch access ports. You can configure a voice VLAN only on Layer 2 ports.

Before you enable voice VLAN, we recommend that you enable quality of service (QoS) on the switch by entering the mls qos global configuration command and configure the port trust state to trust by entering the mls qos trust cos interface configuration command.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the IP phone connected to the specified port to trust the received IEEE 802.1p priority:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport priority extend trust
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces interface-id switchport privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport voice vlan {vlan-id | dot1p | none | untagged}

Configures the voice VLAN on the port.

switchport protected

To isolate unicast, multicast, and broadcast traffic at Layer 2 from other protected ports on the same switch, use the switch port protected interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to disable protection on the port.

switchport protected

no switchport protected

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

No protected port is defined. All ports are nonprotected.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The switch port protection feature is local to the switch; communication between protected ports on the same switch is possible only through a Layer 3 device. To prevent communication between protected ports on different switches, you must configure the protected ports for unique VLANs on each switch and configure a trunk link between the switches. A protected port is different from a secure port.

A protected port does not forward any traffic (unicast, multicast, or broadcast) to any other port that is also a protected port. Data traffic cannot be forwarded between protected ports at Layer 2; only control traffic, such as PIM packets, is forwarded because these packets are processed by the CPU and forwarded in software. All data traffic passing between protected ports must be forwarded through a Layer 3 device.

Port monitoring does not work if both the monitor and monitored ports are protected ports.

Examples

This example shows how to enable a protected port on an interface:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet01/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport protected
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces interface-id switchport privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching port, including port blocking and port protection settings.

switchport block

Prevents unknown multicast or unicast traffic on the interface.

switchport trunk

To set the trunk characteristics when the interface is in trunking mode, use the switchport trunk interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to reset a trunking characteristic to the default.

switchport trunk { allowed vlan vlan-list | native vlan vlan-id | pruning vlan vlan-list }

no switchport trunk { allowed vlan | native vlan | { pruning vlan }

 
Syntax Description

allowed vlan vlan-list

Sets the list of allowed VLANs that can receive and send traffic on this interface in tagged format when in trunking mode. See the following vlan-list format. The none keyword is not valid. The default is all.

native vlan vlan-id

Sets the native VLAN for sending and receiving untagged traffic when the interface is in trunking mode. The range is 1 to 4094.

pruning vlan vlan-list

Sets the list of VLANs that are eligible for VTP pruning when in trunking mode. The all keyword is not valid.

 
Defaults

VLAN 1 is the default native VLAN ID on the port.

The default for all VLAN lists is to include all VLANs.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The vlan-list format is all | none | [ add | remove | except ] vlan-atom [ , vlan-atom... ] where:

  • all specifies all VLANs from 1 to 4094. This keyword is not allowed on commands that do not permit all VLANs in the list to be set at the same time.
  • none indicates an empty list. This keyword is not allowed on commands that require certain VLANs to be set or at least one VLAN to be set.
  • add adds the defined list of VLANs to those currently set instead of replacing the list. Valid IDs are from 1 to 1005; extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs greater than 1005) are valid in some cases.

Note You can add extended-range VLANs to the allowed VLAN list, but not to the pruning-eligible VLAN list.


Separate nonconsecutive VLAN IDs with a comma; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs.

  • remove removes the defined list of VLANs from those currently set instead of replacing the list. Valid IDs are from 1 to 1005; extended-range VLAN IDs are valid in some cases.

Note You can remove extended-range VLANs from the allowed VLAN list, but you cannot remove them from the pruning-eligible list.


Separate nonconsecutive VLAN IDs with a comma; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs.

  • except lists the VLANs that should be calculated by inverting the defined list of VLANs. (VLANs are added except the ones specified.) Valid IDs are from 1 to 1005. Separate nonconsecutive VLAN IDs with a comma; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs.
  • vlan-atom is either a single VLAN number from 1 to 4094 or a continuous range of VLANs described by two VLAN numbers, the lesser one first, separated by a hyphen.

Native VLANs:

  • All untagged traffic received on an trunk port is forwarded with the native VLAN configured for the port.
  • If a packet has a VLAN ID that is the same as the sending-port native VLAN ID, the packet is sent without a tag; otherwise, the switch sends the packet with a tag.
  • The no form of the native vlan command res ets the native mode VLAN to the appropriate default VLAN for the device.

Allowed VLAN:

  • To reduce the risk of spanning-tree loops or storms, you can disable VLAN 1 on any individual VLAN trunk port by removing VLAN 1 from the allowed list. When you remove VLAN 1 from a trunk port, the interface continues to send and receive management traffic, for example, Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP), Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP), and VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) in VLAN 1.
  • The no form of the allowed vlan command resets the list to the default list, which allows all VLANs.

Trunk pruning:

  • The pruning-eligible list applies only to trunk ports.
  • Each trunk port has its own eligibility list.
  • If you do not want a VLAN to be pruned, remove it from the pruning-eligible list. VLANs that are pruning-ineligible receive flooded traffic.
  • VLAN 1, VLANs 1002 to 1005, and extended-range VLANs (VLANs 1006 to 4094) cannot be pruned.

Examples

This example shows how to configure VLAN 3 as the default for the port to send all untagged traffic:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk native vlan 3
 

This example shows how to add VLANs 1, 2, 5, and 6 to the allowed list:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan add 1,2,5,6
 

This example shows how to remove VLANs 3 and 10 to 15 from the pruning-eligible list:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk pruning vlan remove 3,10-15
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces interface-id switchport privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port, including port blocking and port protection settings.

switchport mode

Configures the VLAN membership mode of a port.

switchport voice vlan

To configure voice VLAN on the port. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting, use the switchport voice vlan interface configuration command.

switchport voice vlan { vlan-id | dot1p | none | untagged }

no switchport voice vlan

 
Syntax Description

vlan-id

Specifies the VLAN to be used for voice traffic. The range is 1 to 4094. By default, the IP phone forwards the voice traffic with an priority of 5.

dot1p

Configures the telephone to use IEEE 802.1p priority tagging and uses VLAN 0 (the native VLAN). By default, the Cisco IP phone forwards the voice traffic with an IEEE 802.1p priority of 5.

none

Does not instruct the IP telephone about the voice VLAN. The telephone uses the configuration from the telephone key pad.

untagged

Configures the telephone to send untagged voice traffic. This is the default for the telephone.

 
Defaults

The switch default is not to automatically configure the telephone (none).

The telephone default is not to tag frames.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You should configure voice VLAN on Layer 2 access ports.

You must enable Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) on the switch port connected to the Cisco IP phone for the switch to send configuration information to the phone. CDP is enabled by default globally and on the interface.

Before you enable voice VLAN, we recommend that you enable quality of service (QoS) on the switch by entering the mls qos global configuration command and configure the port trust state to trust by entering the mls qos trust cos interface configuration command.

When you enter a VLAN ID, the IP phone forwards voice traffic in IEEE 802.1X frames, tagged with the specified VLAN ID. The switch puts IEEE 802.1X voice traffic in the voice VLAN.

When you select dot1q, none, or untagged, the switch puts the indicated voice traffic in the access VLAN.

In all configurations, the voice traffic carries a Layer 2 IP precedence value. The default is 5 for voice traffic.

When you enable port security on an interface that is also configured with a voice VLAN, set the maximum allowed secure addresses on the port to two. When the port is connected to a Cisco IP phone, the IP phone requires one MAC address. The Cisco IP phone address is learned on the voice VLAN, but is not learned on the access VLAN. If you connect a single PC to the Cisco IP phone, no additional MAC addresses are required. If you connect more than one PC to the Cisco IP phone, you must configure enough secure addresses to allow one for each PC and one for the Cisco IP phone.

If any type of port security is enabled on the access VLAN, dynamic port security is automatically enabled on the voice VLAN.

You cannot configure static secure MAC addresses in the voice VLAN.

The Port Fast feature is automatically enabled when voice VLAN is configured. When you disable voice VLAN, the Port Fast feature is not automatically disabled.

Examples

This example shows how to configure VLAN 2 as the voice VLAN for the port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/2
Switch(config-if)# switchport voice vlan 2
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces interface-id switchport privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show interfaces interface-id switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport priority extend

Decides how the device connected to the specified port handles priority traffic received on its incoming port.

sync flash sdflash

To copy flash images to destination flash systems, use the command in EXEC mode sync flash sdflash command. This command copies the environment variable BOOT files to the destination flash environment variable with the source flash name being replaced by the destination flash name.

sync flash sdflash { ios-image-name | skip | save-old-files }

 
Syntax Description

ios-image-name

The Cisco IOS image to be synced. This can be an image name or the whole path name. In addition, the Cisco IOS image name is copied to the destination flash BOOT variable.

skip

Specifies skipping copying one or all of these files: config.text, Cisco IOS image, vlan.dat’.

save-old-files

Saves Cisco IOS files.

 
Defaults

No files are saved.

If no Cisco IOS image name is specified, the Cisco IOS image from the source flash BOOT environment variable is copied to the destination flash.

If skip keyword is not specified, all files are copied.

 
Command Modes

EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If the Cisco IOS image name is the same, then the image is also saved with the saved image name. If the source and destination paths have the same directory name, then the destination directory is saved as *-saved. All files in the saved directory stay the same. A new directory with the same name is created on the destination flash for the sync operation.

Examples

This example shows how to sync the Cisco IOS image from the SD flash to the on-board flash:

Switch # sync sdflash: flash: standard_config new_config skip config.txt vlan.dat

system mtu

To set the maximum packet size or maximum transmission unit (MTU) size for Gigabit Ethernet ports, for routed ports, or for Fast Ethernet (10/100) ports, use the system mtu global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to restore the global MTU value to its default value.

system mtu { bytes | jumbo bytes | routing bytes }

no system mtu

 
Syntax Description

bytes

The system MTU for ports that are set to 10 or 100 Mb/s. The range is 1500 to 1998 bytes. This is the maximum MTU received at 10/100-Mb/s Ethernet switch ports.

jumbo bytes

Sets the system jumbo MTU for Gigabit Ethernet ports operating at 1000 Mb/s or greater. The range is 1500 to 9000 bytes. This is the maximum MTU received at the physical port for Gigabit Ethernet ports.

routing bytes

Sets the maximum MTU for routed packets. You can also set the maximum MTU to be advertised by the routing protocols that support the configured MTU size. The range is 1500 bytes to the system MTU value. The system routing MTU is the maximum MTU for routed packets and is also the maximum MTU that the switch advertises in routing updates for protocols such as OSPF.

 
Defaults

The default MTU size for all ports is 1500 bytes. However, if you configure a different value for the system MTU, that configured value becomes the default MTU size for routed ports when it is applied following a switch reset.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When you use this command to change the system MTU or jumbo MTU size, you must reset the switch before the new configuration takes effect.The system mtu routing command does not require a switch reset to take effect.

The system MTU setting is saved in the switch environmental variable in NVRAM and becomes effective when the switch reloads. Unlike the system MTU routing configuration, the MTU settings you enter with the system mtu and system mtu jumbo commands are not saved in the switch Cisco IOS configuration file, even if you enter the copy running-config startup-config privileged EXEC command. Therefore, if you use TFTP to configure a new switch by using a backup configuration file and want the system MTU to be other than the default, you must explicitly configure the system mtu and system mtu jumbo settings on the new switch and then reload the switch.

Gigabit Ethernet ports operating at 1000 Mb/s are not affected by the system mtu command, and 10/100-Mb/s ports are not affected by the system mtu jumbo command.

You can use the system mtu routing command to configure the MTU size on routed ports.


Note You cannot configure a routing MTU size that exceeds the system MTU size. If you change the system MTU size to a value smaller than the currently configured routing MTU size, the configuration change is accepted, but not applied until the next switch reset. When the configuration change takes effect, the routing MTU size defaults to the new system MTU size.


If you enter a value that is outside the range for the specific type of switch, the value is not accepted.


Note The switch does not support setting the MTU on a per-interface basis.


The size of frames that can be received by the switch CPU is limited to 1998 bytes, regardless of the value entered with the system mtu command. Although forwarded or routed frames are usually not received by the CPU, some packets (for example, control traffic, SNMP, Telnet, and routing protocols) are sent to the CPU.

Because the switch does not fragment packets, it drops:

  • Switched packets larger than the packet size supported on the egress interface
  • Routed packets larger than the routing MTU value

For example, if the system mtu value is 1998 bytes and the system mtu jumbo value is 5000 bytes, packets up to 5000 bytes can be received on interfaces operating at 1000 Mb/s. However, although a packet larger than 1998 bytes can be received on an interface operating at 1000 Mb/s, if its destination interface is operating at 10 or 100 Mb/s, the packet is dropped.

Examples

This example shows how to set the maximum jumbo packet size for Gigabit Ethernet ports operating at 1000 Mb/s or greater to 1800 bytes:

Switch(config)# system mtu jumbo 1800
Switch(config)# exit
Switch# reload
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show system mtu privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show system mtu

Displays the packet size set for Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, and routed ports.

test cable-diagnostics tdr

To run the Time Domain Reflector (TDR) feature on an interface, use the test cable-diagnostics tdr command in Privileged EXEC mode.

test cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id

 
Syntax Description

interface interface-id

Specifies the interface on which to run TDR.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

TDR is supported only on 10/100 and 10/100/1000 copper Ethernet ports. It is not supported on SFP module ports. For more information about TDR, see the software configuration guide for this release.

After you run TDR by using the test cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id command, use the show cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id privileged EXEC command to display the results.

Examples

This example shows how to run TDR on an interface:

Switch# test cable-diagnostics tdr interface gigabitethernet0/2
TDR test started on interface Gi0/2
A TDR test can take a few seconds to run on an interface
Use 'show cable-diagnostics tdr' to read the TDR results.
 

If you enter the test cable-diagnostics tdr interface interface-id command on an interface that has a link status of up and a speed of 10 or 100 Mb/s, these messages appear:

Switch# test cable-diagnostics tdr interface gigabitethernet0/3
TDR test on Gi0/3 will affect link state and traffic
TDR test started on interface Gi0/3
A TDR test can take a few seconds to run on an interface
Use 'show cable-diagnostics tdr' to read the TDR results.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show cable-diagnostics tdr

Displays the TDR results.

test relay

To turn on or off the relay circuitry, use the test relay command in Privileged EXEC mode.

test relay { major | minor } { on | off }


Caution Using the test command alters the state (on or off) of a relay. Previous states are not saved.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

You can use the test relay privileged EXEC command to verify relay circuitry connections to the alert devices. You can test alarm scanners without having to create an alarm condition.

Examples

This example shows how to turn on the major relay circuitry:

Switch# test relay major on

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show alarm profile

Displays all alarm profiles or a specified alarm profile and lists the interfaces to which each profile is attached.

show alarm settings

Displays environmental alarm settings and options.

traceroute mac

Use the traceroute mac command in Privileged EXEC mode to display the Layer 2 path taken by the packets from the specified source MAC address to the specified destination MAC address.

traceroute mac [ interface interface-id ] { source-mac-address } [ interface interface-id ] { destination-mac-address } [ vlan vlan-id ] [ detail ]

 
Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Specifies an interface on the source or destination switch.

source-mac-address

The MAC address of the source switch in hexadecimal format.

destination-mac-address

The MAC address of the destination switch in hexadecimal format.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN on which to trace the Layer 2 path that the packets take from the source switch to the destination switch. Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to 4094.

detail

(Optional) Specifies that detailed information appears.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

For Layer 2 traceroute to function properly, Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) must be enabled on all the switches in the network. Do not disable CDP.

When the switch detects a device in the Layer 2 path that does not support Layer 2 traceroute, the switch continues to send Layer 2 trace queries and lets them time out.

The maximum number of hops identified in the path is ten.

Layer 2 traceroute supports only unicast traffic. If you specify a multicast source or destination MAC address, the physical path is not identified, and an error message appears.

The traceroute mac command output shows the Layer 2 path when the specified source and destination addresses belong to the same VLAN. If you specify source and destination addresses that belong to different VLANs, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and an error message appears.

If the source or destination MAC address belongs to multiple VLANs, you must specify the VLAN to which both the source and destination MAC addresses belong. If the VLAN is not specified, the path is not identified, and an error message appears.

The Layer 2 traceroute feature is not supported when multiple devices are attached to one port through hubs (for example, multiple CDP neighbors are detected on a port). When more than one CDP neighbor is detected on a port, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and an error message appears.

This feature is not supported in Token Ring VLANs.

Examples

This example shows how to display the Layer 2 path by specifying the source and destination MAC addresses:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0601 0000.0201.0201
Source 0000.0201.0601 found on con6[switch_mmodel] (2.2.6.6)
con6 (2.2.6.6) :Gi0/1 => Gi0/3
con5 (2.2.5.5) : Gi0/3 => Gi0/1
con1 (2.2.1.1) : Gi0/1 => Gi0/2
con2 (2.2.2.2) : Gi0/2 => Gi0/1
Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2[WS-C3550-24] (2.2.2.2)
Layer 2 trace completed
 

This example shows how to display the Layer 2 path by using the detail keyword:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0601 0000.0201.0201 detail
Source 0000.0201.0601 found on con6[switch_mmodel] (2.2.6.6)
con6 /switch_mmodel/ 2.2.6.6 :
Gi0/2 [auto, auto] => Gi0/3 [auto, auto]
con5 / switch_mmodel / 2.2.5.5 :
Fa0/3 [auto, auto] => Gi0/1 [auto, auto]
con1 / switch_mmodel / 2.2.1.1 :
Gi0/1 [auto, auto] => Gi0/2 [auto, auto]
con2 /switch_mmodel / 2.2.2.2 :
Gi0/2 [auto, auto] => Fa0/1 [auto, auto]
Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2[WS-C3550-24] (2.2.2.2)
Layer 2 trace completed.
 

This example shows how to display the Layer 2 path by specifying the interfaces on the source and destination switches:

Switch# traceroute mac interface fastethernet0/1 0000.0201.0601 interface fastethernet0/3 0000.0201.0201
Source 0000.0201.0601 found on con6[switch_mmodel] (2.2.6.6)
con6 (2.2.6.6) :Gi0/1 => Gi0/3
con5 (2.2.5.5) : Gi0/3 => Gi0/1
con1 (2.2.1.1) : Gi0/1 => G0/2
con2 (2.2.2.2) : Gi0/2 => Gi0/1
Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2[WS-C3550-24] (2.2.2.2)
Layer 2 trace completed
 

This example shows the Layer 2 path when the switch is not connected to the source switch:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0501 0000.0201.0201 detail
Source not directly connected, tracing source.....
Source 0000.0201.0501 found on con5[switch_mmodel] (2.2.5.5)
con5 / switch_mmodel / 2.2.5.5 :
Gi0/1 [auto, auto] => Gi0/3 [auto, auto]
con1 / switch_mmodel / 2.2.1.1 :
Gi0/1 [auto, auto] => Gi0/2 [auto, auto]
con2 / switch_mmodel / 2.2.2.2 :
Gi0/2 [auto, auto] => Fa0/1 [auto, auto]
Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2[WS-C3550-24] (2.2.2.2)
Layer 2 trace completed.
 

This example shows the Layer 2 path when the switch cannot find the destination port for the source MAC address:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0011.1111 0000.0201.0201
Error:Source Mac address not found.
Layer2 trace aborted.
 

This example shows the Layer 2 path when the source and destination devices are in different VLANs:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0601 0000.0301.0201
Error:Source and destination macs are on different vlans.
Layer2 trace aborted.
 

This example shows the Layer 2 path when the destination MAC address is a multicast address:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0601 0100.0201.0201
Invalid destination mac address
 

This example shows the Layer 2 path when source and destination switches belong to multiple VLANs:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0601 0000.0201.0201
Error:Mac found on multiple vlans.
Layer2 trace aborted.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

traceroute mac ip

Displays the Layer 2 path taken by the packets from the specified source IP address or hostname to the specified destination IP address or hostname.

traceroute mac ip

To display the Layer 2 path taken by the packets from the specified source IP address or hostname to the specified destination IP address or hostname, use the traceroute mac ip command in Privileged EXEC mode.

traceroute mac ip { source-ip-address | source-hostname } { destination-ip-address | destination-hostname } [ detail ]

 
Syntax Description

source-ip-address

The IP address of the source switch as a 32-bit quantity in dotted-decimal format.

destination-ip-address

The IP address of the destination switch as a 32-bit quantity in dotted-decimal format.

source-hostname

The IP hostname of the source switch.

destination-hostname

The IP hostname of the destination switch.

detail

(Optional) Specifies that detailed information appears.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

For Layer 2 traceroute to function properly, Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) must be enabled on all the switches in the network. Do not disable CDP.

When the switch detects an device in the Layer 2 path that does not support Layer 2 traceroute, the switch continues to send Layer 2 trace queries and lets them time out.

The maximum number of hops identified in the path is ten.

The traceroute mac ip command output shows the Layer 2 path when the specified source and destination IP addresses are in the same subnet. When you specify the IP addresses, the switch uses Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to associate the IP addresses with the corresponding MAC addresses and the VLAN IDs.

  • If an ARP entry exists for the specified IP address, the switch uses the associated MAC address and identifies the physical path.
  • If an ARP entry does not exist, the switch sends an ARP query and tries to resolve the IP address. The IP addresses must be in the same subnet. If the IP address is not resolved, the path is not identified, and an error message appears.

The Layer 2 traceroute feature is not supported when multiple devices are attached to one port through hubs (for example, multiple CDP neighbors are detected on a port). When more than one CDP neighbor is detected on a port, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and an error message appears.

This feature is not supported in Token Ring VLANs.

Examples

This example shows how to display the Layer 2 path by specifying the source and destination IP addresses and by using the detail keyword:

Switch# traceroute mac ip 2.2.66.66 2.2.22.22 detail
Translating IP to mac.....
2.2.66.66 => 0000.0201.0601
2.2.22.22 => 0000.0201.0201
 
Source 0000.0201.0601 found on con6[WS-C2950G-24-EI] (2.2.6.6)
con6 / switch_mmodel / 2.2.6.6 :
Gi0/1 [auto, auto] => Gi0/3 [auto, auto]
con5 / switch_mmodel / 2.2.5.5 :
Fa0/3 [auto, auto] => Gi0/1 [auto, auto]
con1 / switch_mmodel / 2.2.1.1 :
Gi0/1 [auto, auto] => Gi0/2 [auto, auto]
con2 / switch_mmodel / 2.2.2.2 :
Gi0/2 [auto, auto] => Fa0/1 [auto, auto]
Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2[WS-C3550-24] (2.2.2.2)
Layer 2 trace completed.
 

This example shows how to display the Layer 2 path by specifying the source and destination hostnames:

Switch# traceroute mac ip con6 con2
Translating IP to mac.....
2.2.66.66 => 0000.0201.0601
2.2.22.22 => 0000.0201.0201
 
Source 0000.0201.0601 found on con6
con6 (2.2.6.6) :Gi0/1 => Gi0/3
con5 (2.2.5.5) : Gi0/3 => Gi0/1
con1 (2.2.1.1) : Gi0/1 => Gi0/2
con2 (2.2.2.2) : Gi0/2 => Fa0/1
Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2
Layer 2 trace completed
 

This example shows the Layer 2 path when ARP cannot associate the source IP address with the corresponding MAC address:

Switch# traceroute mac ip 2.2.66.66 2.2.77.77
Arp failed for destination 2.2.77.77.
Layer2 trace aborted.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

traceroute mac

Displays the Layer 2 path taken by the packets from the specified source MAC address to the specified destination MAC address.

trust

To define a trust state for traffic classified through the class policy-map configuration or the class-map global configuration command, use the trust policy-map class configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

trust [ cos | dscp | ip-precedence ]

no trust [ cos | dscp | ip-precedence ]

 
Syntax Description

cos

(Optional) Classifies an ingress packet by using the packet class of service (CoS) value. For an untagged packet, the port default CoS value is used.

dscp

(Optional) Classifies an ingress packet by using the packet Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) values (most significant 6 bits of 8-bit service-type field). For a non-IP packet, the packet CoS value is used if the packet is tagged. If the packet is untagged, the default port CoS value is used to map CoS to DSCP.

ip-precedence

(Optional) Classifies an ingress packet by using the packet IP-precedence value (most significant 3 bits of 8-bit service-type field). For a non-IP packet, the packet CoS value is used if the packet is tagged. If the packet is untagged, the port default CoS value is used to map CoS to DSCP.

 
Defaults

The action is not trusted. If no keyword is specified when the command is entered, the default is dscp.

 
Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Use this command to distinguish the quality of service (QoS) trust behavior for certain traffic from other traffic. For example, incoming traffic with certain DSCP values can be trusted. You can configure a class map to match and trust the DSCP values in the incoming traffic.

Trust values set with this command supersede trust values set with the mls qos trust interface configuration command.

The trust command is mutually exclusive with set policy-map class configuration command within the same policy map.

If you specify trust cos, QoS uses the received or default port CoS value and the CoS-to-DSCP map to generate a DSCP value for the packet.

If you specify trust dscp, QoS uses the DSCP value from the ingress packet. For non-IP packets that are tagged, QoS uses the received CoS value; for non-IP packets that are untagged, QoS uses the default port CoS value. In either case, the DSCP value for the packet is derived from the CoS-to-DSCP map.

If you specify trust ip-precedence, QoS uses the IP precedence value from the ingress packet and the IP-precedence-to-DSCP map. For non-IP packets that are tagged, QoS uses the received CoS value; for non-IP packets that are untagged, QoS uses the default port CoS value. In either case, the DSCP for the packet is derived from the CoS-to-DSCP map.

To return to policy-map configuration mode, use the exit command. To return to privileged EXEC mode, use the end command.

Examples

This example shows how to define a port trust state to trust incoming DSCP values for traffic classified with class1 :

Switch(config)# policy-map policy1
Switch(config-pmap)# class class1
Switch(config-pmap-c)# trust dscp
Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 1000000 20000 exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit
Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

class

Defines a traffic classification match criteria (through the police, set, and trust policy-map class configuration commands) for the specified class-map name.

police

Defines a policer for classified traffic.

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy.

set

Classifies IP traffic by setting a DSCP or IP-precedence value in the packet.

show policy-map

Displays QoS policy maps.

udld

To enable aggressive or normal mode in the UniDirectional Link Detection (UDLD) and to set the configurable message timer time, use the udld global configuration command. Use the no form of the command to disable aggressive or normal mode UDLD on all fiber-optic ports.

udld { aggressive | enable | message time message-timer-interval }

no udld { aggressive | enable | message }

 
Syntax Description

aggressive

Enables UDLD in aggressive mode on all fiber-optic interfaces.

enable

Enables UDLD in normal mode on all fiber-optic interfaces.

message time message-timer-interval

Configures the period of time between UDLD probe messages on ports that are in the advertisement phase and are determined to be bidirectional. The range is to 90 seconds.

 
Defaults

UDLD is disabled on all interfaces.

The message timer is set at 60 seconds.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

UDLD supports two modes of operation: normal (the default) and aggressive. In normal mode, UDLD detects unidirectional links due to misconnected interfaces on fiber-optic connections. In aggressive mode, UDLD also detects unidirectional links due to one-way traffic on fiber-optic and twisted-pair links and due to misconnected interfaces on fiber-optic links. For information about normal and aggressive modes, see the “Understanding UDLD” section in the software configuration guide for this release.

If you change the message time between probe packets, you are making a trade-off between the detection speed and the CPU load. By decreasing the time, you can make the detection-response faster but increase the load on the CPU.

This command affects fiber-optic interfaces only. Use the udld interface configuration command to enable UDLD on other interface types.

You can use these commands to reset an interface shut down by UDLD:

  • The udld reset privileged EXEC command to reset all interfaces shut down by UDLD
  • The shutdown and no shutdown interface configuration commands
  • The no udld enable global configuration command followed by the udld { aggressive | enable } global configuration command to reenable UDLD globally
  • The no udld port interface configuration command followed by the udld port or udld port aggressive interface configuration command to reenable UDLD on the specified interface
  • The errdisable recovery cause udld and errdisable recovery interval interval global configuration commands to automatically recover from the UDLD error-disabled state

Examples

This example shows how to enable UDLD on all fiber-optic interfaces:

Switch(config)# udld enable
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show udld privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show udld

Displays UDLD administrative and operational status for all ports or the specified port.

udld port

Enables UDLD on an individual interface or prevents a fiber-optic interface from being enabled by the udld global configuration command.

udld reset

Resets all interfaces shut down by UDLD and permits traffic to again pass through.

udld port

To enable the UniDirectional Link Detection (UDLD) on an individual interface or prevent a fiber-optic interface from being enabled by the udld global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the udld global configuration command setting or to disable UDLD if entered for a nonfiber-optic port, use the udld port interface configuration command.

udld port [ aggressive ]

no udld port [ aggressive ]

 
Syntax Description

aggressive

(Optional) Enables UDLD in aggressive mode on the specified interface.

 
Defaults

On fiber-optic interfaces, UDLD is not enabled, not in aggressive mode, and not disabled. For this reason, fiber-optic interfaces enable UDLD according to the state of the udld enable or udld aggressive global configuration command.

On nonfiber-optic interfaces, UDLD is disabled.

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

A UDLD-capable port cannot detect a unidirectional link if it is connected to a UDLD-incapable port of another switch.

UDLD supports two modes of operation: normal (the default) and aggressive. In normal mode, UDLD detects unidirectional links due to misconnected interfaces on fiber-optic connections. In aggressive mode, UDLD also detects unidirectional links due to one-way traffic on fiber-optic and twisted-pair links and due to misconnected interfaces on fiber-optic links. For information about normal and aggressive modes, see the “Configuring UDLD” chapter in the software configuration guide for this release.

To enable UDLD in normal mode, use the udld port interface configuration command. To enable UDLD in aggressive mode, use the udld port aggressive interface configuration command.

Use the no udld port command on fiber-optic ports to return control of UDLD to the udld enable global configuration command or to disable UDLD on nonfiber-optic ports.

Use the udld port aggressive command on fiber-optic ports to override the setting of the udld enable or udld aggressive global configuration command. Use the no form on fiber-optic ports to remove this setting and to return control of UDLD enabling to the udld global configuration command or to disable UDLD on nonfiber-optic ports.

You can use these commands to reset an interface shut down by UDLD:

  • The udld reset privileged EXEC command to reset all interfaces shut down by UDLD
  • The shutdown and no shutdown interface configuration commands
  • The no udld enable global configuration command followed by the udld { aggressive | enable } global configuration command to reenable UDLD globally
  • The no udld port interface configuration command followed by the udld port or udld port aggressive interface configuration command to reenable UDLD on the specified interface
  • The errdisable recovery cause udld and errdisable recovery interval interval global configuration commands to automatically recover from the UDLD error-disabled state

Examples

This example shows how to enable UDLD on an port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# udld port
 

This example shows how to disable UDLD on a fiber-optic interface despite the setting of the udld global configuration command:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1
Switch(config-if)# no udld port
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config or the show udld interface privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the running configuration on the switch. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

show udld

Displays UDLD administrative and operational status for all ports or the specified port.

udld

Enables aggressive or normal mode in UDLD or sets the configurable message timer time.

udld reset

Resets all interfaces shut down by UDLD and permits traffic to again pass through.

udld reset

To reset all interfaces disabled by the UniDirectional Link Detection (UDLD) and permit traffic to begin passing through them again (though other features, such as spanning tree, Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP), and Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) still have their normal effects, if enabled), use the udld reset command in Privileged EXEC mode.

udld reset

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

If the interface configuration is still enabled for UDLD, these ports begin to run UDLD again and are disabled for the same reason if the problem has not been corrected.

Examples

This example shows how to reset all interfaces disabled by UDLD:

Switch# udld reset
1 ports shutdown by UDLD were reset.
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show udld privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show running-config

Displays the running configuration on the switch. For syntax information, see the Cisco IOS Software Command Reference, Release 15.0.

show udld

Displays UDLD administrative and operational status for all ports or the specified port.

udld

Enables aggressive or normal mode in UDLD or sets the configurable message timer time.

udld port

Enables UDLD on an individual interface or prevents a fiber-optic interface from being enabled by the udld global configuration command.

vlan

To add a VLAN and to enter the VLAN configuration mode, use the vlan command in global configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to delete the VLAN.

vlan vlan-id

no vlan vlan -id

 
Syntax Description

vlan-id

ID of the VLAN to be added and configured. The range is 1 to 4094. You can enter a single VLAN ID, a series of VLAN IDs separated by commas, or a range of VLAN IDs separated by hyphens.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

Configuration information for normal-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1 to 1005) is always saved in the VLAN database. When you are using (VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) version 3 or when VTP mode is transparent (VTP version 1 or 2), you can create extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs greater than 1005). In VTP version 3, these VLANs are also saved in the VLAN database.

You use the vlan vlan-id global configuration command to add normal-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1 t0 1005) or extended-range VLANs (VLAN IDs 1006 to 4094). With VTP version 1 and version 2, before adding extended-range VLANs, you must use the vtp transparent global configuration command to put the switch in VTP transparent mode. With VTP version 1 and 2, extended-range VLANs are not learned by VTP and are not added to the VLAN database. When VTP mode is transparent, VTP mode and domain name and all VLAN configurations are saved in the running configuration, and you can save them in the switch startup configuration file.

VTP version 3 supports propagation of extended-range VLANs and you can create them in VTP server or client mode.

When you save the VLAN and VTP configurations in the startup configuration file and reboot the switch, the configuration is selected in these ways:

  • If both the VLAN database and the configuration file show the VTP mode as transparent and the VTP domain names match, the VLAN database is ignored. The VTP and VLAN configurations in the startup configuration file are used. The VLAN database revision number remains unchanged in the VLAN database.
  • If the VTP mode is server, or if the startup VTP mode or domain names do not match the VLAN database, the VTP mode and the VLAN configuration for the first 1005 VLANs use the VLAN database information. With VTP version 3, all VLAN-IDs are in the VLAN database.

With VTP version 1 and version 2, if you try to create an extended-range VLAN when the switch is not in VTP transparent mode, the VLAN is rejected, and you receive an error message.

If you enter an invalid VLAN ID, you receive an error message and do not enter config-vlan mode.

Entering the vlan command with a VLAN ID enables config-vlan mode. When you enter the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN, you do not create a new VLAN, but you can modify VLAN parameters for that VLAN. The specified VLANs are added or modified when you exit the config-vlan mode. Only the shutdown command (for VLANs 1 to 1005) takes effect immediately.

These configuration commands are available in config-vlan mode. The no form of each command returns the characteristic to its default state.


Note Although all commands are visible, the only VLAN configuration commands that are supported on extended-range VLANs are mtu mtu-size and remote-span. For extended-range VLANs, all other characteristics must remain at the default state.


  • are are-number —Defines the maximum number of all-routes explorer (ARE) hops for this VLAN. This keyword applies only to TrCRF VLANs.The range is 0 to 13. The default is 7. If no value is entered, 0 is assumed to be the maximum.
  • backupcrf —Specifies the backup CRF mode. This keyword applies only to TrCRF VLANs.

– enable backup CRF mode for this VLAN.

– disable backup CRF mode for this VLAN (the default).

  • bridge { bridge-number| type }—S pecifies the logical distributed source-routing bridge, the bridge that interconnects all logical rings having this VLAN as a parent VLAN in FDDI-NET, Token Ring-NET, and TrBRF VLANs. The range is 0 to 15. The default bridge number is 0 (no source-routing bridge) for FDDI-NET, TrBRF, and Token Ring-NET VLANs. The type keyword applies only to TrCRF VLANs and is one of these:

– srb (source-route bridging)

– srt (source-route transparent) bridging VLAN

  • exit —Applies changes, increments the VLAN database revision number (VLANs 1 to 1005 only), and exits config-vlan mode.
  • media —Defines the VLAN media type. See Table 2-20 for valid commands and syntax for different media types.

Note The switch supports only Ethernet ports. You configure only FDDI and Token Ring media-specific characteristics for VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) global advertisements to other switches. These VLANs are locally suspended.


– ethernet is Ethernet media type (the default).

– fddi is FDDI media type.

– fd-net is FDDI network entity title (NET) media type.

– tokenring is Token Ring media type if the VTP v2 mode is disabled, or TrCRF if the VTP Version 2 (v) mode is enabled.

– tr-net is Token Ring network entity title (NET) media type if the VTP v2 mode is disabled or TrBRF media type if the VTP v2 mode is enabled.

  • mtu mtu-size —Specifies the maximum transmission unit (MTU) (packet size in bytes). The range is 1500 to 18190. The default is 1500 bytes.
  • name vlan-name —Names the VLAN with an ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters that must be unique within the administrative domain. The default is VLANxxxx where xxxx represents four numeric digits (including leading zeros) equal to the VLAN ID number.
  • no —Negates a command or returns it to the default setting.
  • parent parent-vlan-id —Specifies the parent VLAN of an existing FDDI, Token Ring, or TrCRF VLAN. This parameter identifies the TrBRF to which a TrCRF belongs and is required when defining a TrCRF. The range is 0 to 1005. The default parent VLAN ID is 0 (no parent VLAN) for FDDI and Token Ring VLANs. For both Token Ring and TrCRF VLANs, the parent VLAN ID must already exist in the database and be associated with a Token Ring-NET or TrBRF VLAN.
  • remote-span —Configures the VLAN as a Remote SPAN (RSPAN) VLAN. When the RSPAN feature is added to an existing VLAN, the VLAN is first deleted and is then recreated with the RSPAN feature. Any access ports are deactivated until the RSPAN feature is removed. If VTP is enabled, the new RSPAN VLAN is propagated by VTP for VLAN-IDs that are lower than 1024. Learning is disabled on the VLAN. See the remote-span command for more information.
  • ring ring-number —Defines the logical ring for an FDDI, Token Ring, or TrCRF VLAN. The range is 1 to 4095. The default for Token Ring VLANs is 0. For FDDI VLANs, there is no default.
  • said said-value —Specifies the security association identifier (SAID) as documented in IEEE 802.10. The range is 1 to 4294967294, and the number must be unique within the administrative domain. The default value is 100000 plus the VLAN ID number.
  • shutdown —S huts down VLAN switching on the VLAN. This command takes effect immediately. Other commands take effect when you exit config-vlan mode.
  • state —Specifies the VLAN state:

– active means the VLAN is operational (the default).

– suspend means the VLAN is suspended. Suspended VLANs do not pass packets.

  • ste ste-number —Defines the maximum number of spanning-tree explorer (STE) hops. This keyword applies only to TrCRF VLANs. The range is 0 to 13. The default is 7.
  • stp type —Defines the spanning-tree type for FDDI-NET, Token Ring-NET, or TrBRF VLANs. For FDDI-NET VLANs, the default STP type is ieee. For Token Ring-NET VLANs, the default STP type is ibm. For FDDI and Token Ring VLANs, the default is no type specified.

– ieee for IEEE Ethernet STP running source-route transparent (SRT) bridging.

– ibm for IBM STP running source-route bridging (SRB).

– auto for STP running a combination of source-route transparent bridging (IEEE) and source-route bridging (IBM).

  • tb-vlan1 tb-vlan1-id and tb-vlan2 tb-vlan2-id —Specifies the first and second VLAN to which this VLAN is translationally bridged. Translational VLANs translate FDDI or Token Ring to Ethernet, for example. The range is 0 to 1005. If no value is specified, 0 (no transitional bridging) is assumed.

 

Table 2-20 Valid Commands and Syntax for Different Media Types

Media Type
Valid Syntax

Ethernet

name vlan-name, media ethernet, state {suspend | active}, said said-value, mtu mtu-size, remote-span, tb-vlan1 tb-vlan1-id, tb-vlan2 tb-vlan2-id

FDDI

name vlan-name, media fddi, state {suspend | active}, said said-value, mtu mtu-size, ring ring-number, parent parent-vlan-id, tb-vlan1 tb-vlan1-id, tb-vlan2 tb-vlan2-id

FDDI-NET

name vlan-name, media fd-net, state {suspend | active}, said said-value, mtu mtu-size, bridge bridge-number, stp type {ieee | ibm | auto}, tb-vlan1 tb-vlan1-id, tb-vlan2 tb-vlan2-id

If VTP v2 mode is disabled, do not set the stp type to auto.

Token Ring

VTP v1 mode is enabled.

name vlan-name, media tokenring, state {suspend | active}, said said-value, mtu mtu-size, ring ring-number, parent parent-vlan-id, tb-vlan1 tb-vlan1-id, tb-vlan2 tb-vlan2-id

Token Ring concentrator relay function (TrCRF)

VTP v2 mode is enabled.

name vlan-name, media tokenring, state {suspend | active}, said said-value, mtu mtu-size, ring ring-number, parent parent-vlan-id, bridge type {srb | srt}, are are-number, ste ste-number, backupcrf {enable | disable}, tb-vlan1 tb-vlan1-id, tb-vlan2 tb-vlan2-id

Token Ring-NET

VTP v1 mode is enabled.

name vlan-name, media tr-net, state {suspend | active}, said said-value, mtu mtu-size, bridge bridge-number, stp type {ieee | ibm}, tb-vlan1 tb-vlan1-id, tb-vlan2 tb-vlan2-id

Token Ring bridge relay function (TrBRF)

VTP v2 mode is enabled.

name vlan-name, media tr-net, state {suspend | active}, said said-value, mtu mtu-size, bridge bridge-number, stp type {ieee | ibm | auto}, tb-vlan1 tb-vlan1-id, tb-vlan2 tb-vlan2-id

Table 2-21 describes the rules for configuring VLANs.

 

Table 2-21 VLAN Configuration Rules

Configuration
Rule

VTP v2 mode is enabled, and you are configuring a TrCRF VLAN media type.

Specifies a parent VLAN ID of a TrBRF that already exists in the database.

Specifies a ring number. Do not leave this field blank.

Specifies unique ring numbers when TrCRF VLANs have the same parent VLAN ID. Only one backup concentrator relay function (CRF) can be enabled.

VTP v2 mode is enabled, and you are configuring VLANs other than TrCRF media type.

Do not specify a backup CRF.

VTP v2 mode is enabled, and you are configuring a TrBRF VLAN media type.

Specifies a bridge number. Do not leave this field blank.

VTP v1 mode is enabled.

No VLAN can have an STP type set to auto.

This rule applies to Ethernet, FDDI, FDDI-NET, Token Ring, and Token Ring-NET VLANs.

Add a VLAN that requires translational bridging (values are not set to zero).

The translational bridging VLAN IDs that are used must already exist in the database.

The translational bridging VLAN IDs that a configuration points to must also contain a pointer to the original VLAN in one of the translational bridging parameters (for example, Ethernet points to FDDI, and FDDI points to Ethernet).

The translational bridging VLAN IDs that a configuration points to must be different media types than the original VLAN (for example, Ethernet can point to Token Ring).

If both translational bridging VLAN IDs are configured, these VLANs must be different media types (for example, Ethernet can point to FDDI and Token Ring).

Examples

This example shows how to add an Ethernet VLAN with default media characteristics. The default includes a vlan-name of VLANxxx, where xxxx represents four numeric digits (including leading zeros) equal to the VLAN ID number. The default media option is ethernet ; the state option is active. The default said-value variable is 100000 plus the VLAN ID; the mtu-size variable is 1500; the stp-type option is ieee. When you enter the exit config-vlan configuration command, the VLAN is added if it did not already exist; otherwise, this command does nothing.

This example shows how to create a new VLAN with all default characteristics and enter config-vlan mode:

Switch(config)# vlan 200
Switch(config-vlan)# exit
Switch(config)#
 

This example shows how to create a new extended-range VLAN with all the default characteristics, to enter config-vlan mode, and to save the new VLAN in the switch startup configuration file:

Switch(config)# vtp mode transparent
Switch(config)# vlan 2000
Switch(config-vlan)# end
Switch# copy running-config startup config
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show vlan privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show vlan

Displays the parameters for all configured VLANs or one VLAN (if the VLAN ID or name is specified) in the administrative domain.

vlan access-map

To create or modify a VLAN map entry for VLAN packet filtering, use the vlan access-map global configuration command. This entry changes the mode to the VLAN access-map configuration. Use the no form of this command to delete a VLAN map entry. Use the vlan filter interface configuration command to apply a VLAN map to one or more VLANs.

vlan access-map name [ number ]

no vlan access-map name [ number ]

 
Syntax Description

name

Name of the VLAN map.

number

(Optional) The sequence number of the map entry that you want to create or modify (0 to 65535). If you are creating a VLAN map and the sequence number is not specified, it is automatically assigned in increments of 10, starting from 10. This number is the sequence to insert to, or delete from, a VLAN access-map entry.

 
Defaults

There are no VLAN map entries and no VLAN maps applied to a VLAN.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

In global configuration mode, use this command to create or modify a VLAN map. This entry changes the mode to VLAN access-map configuration, where you can use the match access-map configuration command to specify the access lists for IP or non-IP traffic to match and use the action command to set whether a match causes the packet to be forwarded or dropped.

In VLAN access-map configuration mode, these commands are available:

  • action —Sets the action to be taken (forward or drop).
  • default —Sets a command to its defaults.
  • exit —Exits from VLAN access-map configuration mode.
  • match —Sets the values to match (IP address or MAC address).
  • no —Negates a command or set its defaults.

When you do not specify an entry number (sequence number), it is added to the end of the map.

There can be only one VLAN map per VLAN and it is applied as packets are received by a VLAN.

You can use the no vlan access-map name [ number ] command with a sequence number to delete a single entry.

In global configuration mode, use the vlan filter interface configuration command to apply the map to one or more VLANs.

For more information about VLAN map entries, see the software configuration guide for this release.

Examples

This example shows how to create a VLAN map named vac1 and apply matching conditions and actions to it. If no other entries already exist in the map, this will be entry 10.

Switch(config)# vlan access-map vac1
Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address acl1
Switch(config-access-map)# action forward
 

This example shows how to delete VLAN map vac1 :

Switch(config)# no vlan access-map vac1

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

action

Sets the action for the VLAN access map entry.

match (access-map configuration)

Sets the VLAN map to match packets against one or more access lists.

show vlan access-map

Displays information about a particular VLAN access map or all VLAN access maps.

vlan filter

Applies the VLAN access map to one or more VLANs.

vlan filter

To apply a VLAN map to one or more VLANs, use the vlan filter global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to remove the map.

vlan filter mapname vlan-list { list | all }

no vlan filter mapname vlan-list { list | all }


Note This command is available only when the switch is running the IP services image.


 
Syntax Description

mapname

Name of the VLAN map entry.

vlan-list

List of the VLANs.

list

The list of one or more VLANs in the form tt, uu-vv, xx, yy-zz, where spaces around commas and dashes are optional. The range is 1 to 4094.

all

Removes the filter from all VLANs.

 
Defaults

There are no VLAN filters.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

To avoid accidentally dropping too many packets and disabling connectivity in the middle of the configuration process, we recommend that you completely define the VLAN access map before applying it to a VLAN.

For more information about VLAN map entries, see the software configuration guide for this release.

Examples

This example applies VLAN map entry map1 to VLANs 20 and 30:

Switch(config)# vlan filter map1 vlan-list 20, 30
 

This example shows how to delete VLAN map entry mac1 from VLAN 20:

Switch(config)# no vlan filter map1 vlan-list 20
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show vlan filter privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show vlan access-map

Displays information about a particular VLAN access map or all VLAN access maps.

show vlan filter

Displays information about all VLAN filters or about a particular VLAN or VLAN access map.

vlan access-map

Creates a VLAN map entry for VLAN packet filtering.

vmps reconfirm (privileged EXEC)

To immediately send VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) queries to reconfirm all dynamic VLAN assignments with the VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS), use the vmps reconfirm command in Privileged EXEC mode.

vmps reconfirm

 
Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to immediately send VQP queries to the VMPS:

Switch# vmps reconfirm
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show vmps privileged EXEC command and examining the VMPS Action row of the Reconfirmation Status section. The show vmps command shows the result of the last time the assignments were reconfirmed either because the reconfirmation timer expired or because the vmps reconfirm command was entered.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show vmps

Displays VQP and VMPS information.

vmps reconfirm (global configuration)

Changes the reconfirmation interval for the VQP client.

vmps reconfirm (global configuration)

To change the reconfirmation interval for the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) client, use the vmps reconfirm global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

vmps reconfirm interval

no vmps reconfirm

 
Syntax Description

interval

Reconfirmation interval for VQP client queries to the VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) to reconfirm dynamic VLAN assignments. The range is 1 to 120 minutes.

 
Defaults

The default reconfirmation interval is 60 minutes.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to set the VQP client to reconfirm dynamic VLAN entries every 20 minutes:

Switch(config)# vmps reconfirm 20
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show vmps privileged EXEC command and examining information in the Reconfirm Interval row.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show vmps

Displays VQP and VMPS information.

vmps reconfirm (privileged EXEC)

Sends VQP queries to reconfirm all dynamic VLAN assignments with the VMPS.

vmps retry

To configure the per-server retry count for the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) client, use the vmps retry global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

vmps retry count

no vmps retry

 
Syntax Description

count

Number of attempts to contact the VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) by the client before querying the next server in the list. The range is 1 to 10.

 
Defaults

The default retry count is 3.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

Examples

This example shows how to set the retry count to 7:

Switch(config)# vmps retry 7
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show vmps privileged EXEC command and examining information in the Server Retry Count row.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show vmps

Displays VQP and VMPS information.

vmps server

To configure the primary VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) and up to three secondary servers, use the vmps server global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to remove a VMPS server.

vmps server ipaddress [ primary ]

no vmps server [ ipaddress ]

 
Syntax Description

ipaddress

IP address or hostname of the primary or secondary VMPS servers. If you specify a hostname, the Domain Name System (DNS) server must be configured.

primary

(Optional) Specifies whether primary or secondary VMPS servers are being configured.

 
Defaults

No primary or secondary VMPS servers are defined.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

The first server entered is automatically selected as the primary server whether or not primary is entered. The first server address can be overridden by using primary in a subsequent command.

If a member switch in a cluster configuration does not have an IP address, the cluster does not use the VMPS server configured for that member switch. Instead, the cluster uses the VMPS server on the command switch, and the command switch proxies the VMPS requests. The VMPS server treats the cluster as a single switch and uses the IP address of the command switch to respond to requests.

When using the no form without specifying the ipaddress value, all configured servers are deleted. If you delete all servers when dynamic-access ports are present, the switch cannot forward packets from new sources on these ports because it cannot query the VMPS.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the server with IP address 191.10.49.20 as the primary VMPS server. The servers with IP addresses 191.10.49.21 and 191.10.49.22 are configured as secondary servers:

Switch(config)# vmps server 191.10.49.20 primary
Switch(config)# vmps server 191.10.49.21
Switch(config)# vmps server 191.10.49.22
 

This example shows how to delete the server with IP address 191.10.49.21:

Switch(config)# no vmps server 191.10.49.21
 

You can verify your setting by entering the show vmps privileged EXEC command and examining information in the VMPS Domain Server row.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show vmps

Displays VQP and VMPS information.

vtp (global configuration)

To set or modify the VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) configuration characteristics, use the vtp global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to remove the settings or to return to the default settings.

vtp { domain domain-name | file filename | interface name [ only ] | mode { client | off | server | transparent } [ mst | unknown | vlan ] | password password [ hidden | secret ] | pruning | version number }

no vtp { file | interface | mode [ client | off | server | transparent ] [ mst | unknown | vlan ] | password | pruning | version }

 
Syntax Description

domain domain-name

Specifies the VTP domain name, an ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters that identifies the VTP administrative domain for the switch. The domain name is case sensitive.

file filename

Specifies the Cisco IOS file system file where the VTP VLAN configuration is stored.

interface name

Specifies the name of the interface providing the VTP ID updated for this device.

only

(Optional) Uses only the IP address of this interface as the VTP IP updater.

mode

Specifies the VTP device mode as client, server, or transparent.

client

Places the switch in VTP client mode. A switch in VTP client mode is enabled for VTP, and can send advertisements, but does not have enough nonvolatile storage to store VLAN configurations. You cannot configure VLANs on the switch. When a VTP client starts up, it does not send VTP advertisements until it receives advertisements to initialize its VLAN database.

off

Places the switch in VTP off mode. A switch in off VTP off mode functions the same as a VTP transparent device except that it does not forward VTP advertisements on trunk ports.

server

Places the switch in VTP server mode. A switch in VTP server mode is enabled for VTP and sends advertisements. You can configure VLANs on the switch. The switch can recover all the VLAN information in the current VTP database from nonvolatile storage after reboot.

transparent

Places the switch in VTP transparent mode. A switch in VTP transparent mode is disabled for VTP, does not send advertisements or learn from advertisements sent by other devices, and cannot affect VLAN configurations on other devices in the network. The switch receives VTP advertisements and forwards them on all trunk ports except the one on which the advertisement was received.

When VTP mode is transparent, the mode and domain name are saved in the switch running configuration file, and you can save them in the switch startup configuration file by entering the copy running-config startup config privileged EXEC command.

mst

(Optional) Sets the mode for the multiple spanning tree (MST) VTP database (only VTP version 3).

unknown

(Optional) Sets the mode for unknown VTP databases (only VTP version 3).

vlan

(Optional) Sets the mode for VLAN VTP database. This is the default (only VTP version 3).

password password

Sets the administrative domain password for the generation of the 16-byte secret value used in MD5 digest calculation to be sent in VTP advertisements and to validate received VTP advertisements. The password can be an ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters. The password is case sensitive.

hidden

(Optional) Specifies that the key generated from the password string is saved in the VLAN database file. When the hidden keyword is not specified, the password string is saved in clear text. When the hidden password is entered, you need to reenter the password to issue a command in the domain. This keyword is supported only in VTP version 3.

secret

(Optional) Allows the user to directly configure the password secret key (only VTP version 3).

pruning

Enables VTP pruning on the switch.

version number

Sets VTP version to version 1, version 2, or version 3.

 
Defaults

The default filename is flash:vlan.dat .

The default mode is server mode and the default database is VLAN.

In VTP version 3, for the MST database, the default mode is transparent.

No domain name or password is defined.

No password is configured.

Pruning is disabled.

The default version is Version 1.

 
Command Modes

Global configuration

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

When you save VTP mode, domain name, and VLAN configurations in the switch startup configuration file and reboot the switch, the VTP and VLAN configurations are selected by these conditions:

  • If both the VLAN database and the configuration file show the VTP mode as transparent and the VTP domain names match, the VLAN database is ignored. The VTP and VLAN configurations in the startup configuration file are used. The VLAN database revision number remains unchanged in the VLAN database.
  • If the startup VTP mode is server mode, or the startup VTP mode or domain names do not match the VLAN database, VTP mode and VLAN configuration for the first 1005 VLANs are selected by VLAN database information, and VLANs greater than 1005 are configured from the switch configuration file.

The vtp file filename cannot be used to load a new database; it renames only the file in which the existing database is stored.

Follow these guidelines when configuring a VTP domain name:

  • The switch is in the no-management-domain state until you configure a domain name. While in the no-management-domain state, the switch does not send any VTP advertisements even if changes occur to the local VLAN configuration. The switch leaves the no-management-domain state after it receives the first VTP summary packet on any port that is trunking or after you configure a domain name by using the vtp domain command. If the switch receives its domain from a summary packet, it resets its configuration revision number to 0. After the switch leaves the no-management-domain state, it can no be configured to reenter it until you clear the NVRAM and reload the software.
  • Domain names are case-sensitive.
  • After you configure a domain name, it cannot be removed. You can only reassign it to a different domain.

Follow these guidelines when setting VTP mode:

  • The no vtp mode command returns the switch to VTP server mode.
  • The vtp mode server command is the same as no vtp mode except that it does not return an error if the switch is not in client or transparent mode.
  • If the receiving switch is in client mode, the client switch changes its configuration to duplicate the configuration of the server. If you have switches in client mode, be sure to make all VTP or VLAN configuration changes on a switch in server mode. If the receiving switch is in server mode or transparent mode, the switch configuration is not changed.
  • Switches in transparent mode do not participate in VTP. If you make VTP or VLAN configuration changes on a switch in transparent mode, the changes are not propagated to other switches in the network.
  • If you change the VTP or VLAN configuration on a switch that is in server mode, that change is propagated to all the switches in the same VTP domain.
  • The vtp mode transparent command disables VTP from the domain but does not remove the domain from the switch.
  • In VTP versions 1 and 2, the VTP mode must be transparent for you to add extended-range VLANs or for VTP and VLAN information to be saved in the running configuration file. VTP supports extended-range VLANs in client and server mode and saved them in the VLAN database.
  • With VTP versions 1 and 2, if extended-range VLANs are configured on the switch and you attempt to set the VTP mode to server or client, you receive an error message, and the configuration is not allowed. Changing VTP mode is allowed with extended VLANs in VTP version 3.
  • VTP can be set to either server or client mode only when dynamic VLAN creation is disabled.
  • The vtp mode off command sets the device to off. The no vtp mode off command resets the device to the VTP server mode.

Follow these guidelines when setting a VTP password:

  • Passwords are case sensitive. Passwords should match on all switches in the same domain.
  • When you use the no vtp password form of the command, the switch returns to the no-password state.
  • The hidden and secret keywords are supported only in VTP version 3. If you convert from VTP version 2 to VTP version 3, you must remove the hidden or secret keyword before the conversion.

Follow these guidelines when setting VTP pruning:

  • VTP pruning removes information about each pruning-eligible VLAN from VTP updates if there are no stations belonging to that VLAN.
  • If you enable pruning on the VTP server, it is enabled for the entire management domain for VLAN IDs 1 to 1005.
  • Only VLANs in the pruning-eligible list can be pruned.
  • Pruning is supported with VTP Version 1 and Version 2.

Follow these guidelines when setting the VTP version:

  • Toggling the Version 2 (v2) mode state modifies parameters of certain default VLANs.
  • Each VTP switch automatically detects the capabilities of all the other VTP devices. To use Version 2, all VTP switches in the network must support Version 2; otherwise, you must configure them to operate in VTP Version 1 mode.
  • If all switches in a domain are VTP Version 2-capable, you need only to configure Version 2 on one switch; the version number is then propagated to the other Version-2 capable switches in the VTP domain.
  • If you are using VTP in a Token Ring environment, VTP Version 2 must be enabled.
  • If you are configuring a Token Ring bridge relay function (TrBRF) or Token Ring concentrator relay function (TrCRF) VLAN media type, you must use Version 2.
  • If you are configuring a Token Ring or Token Ring-NET VLAN media type, you must use Version 1.
  • In VTP version 3, all database VTP information is propagated across the VTP domain, not only VLAN database information.
  • Two VTP version 3 regions can only communicate over a VTP version 1 or VTP version 2 region in transparent mode.

You cannot save password, pruning, and version configurations in the switch configuration file.

Examples

This example shows how to rename the filename for VTP configuration storage to vtpfilename :

Switch(config)# vtp file vtpfilename
 

This example shows how to clear the device storage filename:

Switch(config)# no vtp file vtpconfig
Clearing device storage filename.
 

This example shows how to specify the name of the interface providing the VTP updater ID for this device:

Switch(config)# vtp interface gigabitethernet
 

This example shows how to set the administrative domain for the switch:

Switch(config)# vtp domain OurDomainName
 

This example shows how to place the switch in VTP transparent mode:

Switch(config)# vtp mode transparent
 

This example shows how to configure the VTP domain password:

Switch(config)# vtp password ThisIsOurDomain’sPassword
 

This example shows how to enable pruning in the VLAN database:

Switch(config)# vtp pruning
Pruning switched ON
 

This example shows how to enable Version 2 mode in the VLAN database:

Switch(config)# vtp version 2
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show vtp status privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show vtp status

Displays the VTP statistics for the switch and general information about the VTP management domain status.

vtp (interface configuration)

Enables or disables VTP on an interface.

vtp (interface configuration)

To enable the VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) on a per-port basis, use the vtp interface configuration command. Use the no form of this command to disable VTP on the interface.

vtp

no vtp


Note This command is supported only when the switch is running the LAN Base image and VTP version 3.


 
Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

 
Defaults

None

 
Command Modes

Interface configuration.

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command is supported only on switches configured for VTP version 3.

Examples

This example shows how to enable VTP on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# vtp
 

This example shows how to disable VTP on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# no vtp

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

vtp (global configuration)

Globally configures VTP domain-name, password, pruning, version, and mode.

 

vtp primary

To configure a switch as the VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) primary server, use the vtp primary privileged EXEC command.

vtp primary [ mst | vlan ] [ force ]

There is no no form of the command.


Note This command is supported only when the switch is running the LAN Base image and VTP version 3.



Note Although visible in the command line help, the vtp {password password | pruning | version number} commands are not supported.


 
Syntax Description

mst

(Optional) Configures the switch as the primary VTP server for the multiple spanning tree (MST) feature.

vlan

(Optional) Configures the switch as the primary VTP server for VLANs.

force

(Optional) Configures the switch to not check for conflicting devices when configuring the primary server.

 
Defaults

The switch is a VTP secondary server.

 
Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

 
Command History

Release
Modification

15.0(1)EY

This command was introduced.

 
Usage Guidelines

This command is supported only on switches configured for VTP version 3.

A VTP primary server updates the database information and sends updates that are honored by all devices in the system. A VTP secondary server can only back up the updated VTP configurations received from the primary server to NVRAM.

By default, all devices come up as secondary servers. Primary server status is needed only for database updates when the administrator issues a takeover message in the domain. You can have a working VTP domain without any primary servers.

Primary server status is lost if the device reloads or domain parameters change.

Examples

This example shows how to configure the switch as the primary VTP server for VLANs:

Switch# vtp primary vlan
Setting device to VTP TRANSPARENT mode.
 

You can verify your settings by entering the show vtp status privileged EXEC command.

 
Related Commands

Command
Description

show vtp status

Displays the VTP statistics for the switch and general information about the VTP management domain status.

vtp (global configuration)

Configures the VTP filename, interface, domain name, mode, and version.